What version of OnSong is right for me? LEARN MORE

×

OnSong Manual

Entire Manual

Overview

As a musician, you know that every second on stage counts, so we have created an easy-to-use application for your iPad or iPhone for quick music access. The OnSong app eliminates the need for messy and disorganized sheet music and allows you to quickly and easily access your music for performances. When you are on stage, the app can easily handle all aspects of performance. Use this manual to delve into the many unique features OnSong offers you as a musician.

We've heard from many of our users that OnSong is "deep". You may be accustom to basic apps that perform one or two functions. OnSong is a completely suite that manages your practice time as well as your on stage performance. It's used by hundreds of thousands of musicians around the world, every week.

What this means for you is... well, you have some learning to do! Besides this user manual, we've created a number of video tutorials to get you up and running quickly.

Beginner's Guide

This guide will take you through the most basic features of OnSong quickly so you get up to speed with common use cases and how to start playing immediately.

Features

It's hard to explain OnSong without sounding like an infomercial. Honestly, OnSong does so many great things that it's hard to coalesce into a single thing. This section of the user manual reviews core features of OnSong and links to the parts of the app that comprise the feature.

FAQ

Once you get going with OnSong, you may have some questions! This FAQ will help answer common questions you may have when using OnSong.

User Interface

For those who like to know what every part of an app is for, this guide you through every screen and function.

Settings

For every musician, there's a different way to do music. OnSong is built for customization. This section of our user manual will guide you through the various settings and what they do.

OnSong Console

OnSong Console is a web application that allows you to manage your OnSong library from any computer running a modern web browser. It works by starting up a web site hosted by your device that you connect to by typing in the local web address. Once loaded, you can easily import, create, and edit your songs as well as manage your books and sets.

Frequently Asked Questions

Get answers to questions you likely have.

Connecting

To use OnSong Console, you must enable it in your OnSong app and then enter the web address that displays.

Header

The top is the header which contains the OnSong logo. To the left of the logo is the name of the current song. If you have made changes to the save, a save button will appear to the right of the song title allowing you to save changes back to your OnSong library on the device. Finally, the help link is located on the far right and provides access to this web site.

Sidebar

The sidebar can be accessed by tapping on the icon in the upper left corner. It's where you can view and manage collections, books, and sets.

Song List

The song list is where you view songs in your collection, book, or set. You can add, import, search, and manage your songs from the list.

Song Editor

When you tap on the song, it appears in the song editor. Here you can type lyrics and chords, change metadata, and perform other functions.

Song Viewer

As you edit your songs in the song editor, the changes appear in realtime in the song viewer. You can use functions here to change how your song looks and behaves.

Lyrics Projection

OnSong Console also features lyrics projection allowing you to place a web browser window in full screen and control from Console or from the OnSong app.

OnSong Console is available through an OnSong Premium subscription or to OnSong Pro users who have previously purchased it as an add-on

Connecting

OnSong Console is available to OnSong Premium subscribers or if you've previously purchased it as an add-on. To purchase, open the Utilities Menu and choose Account to view your options.

Enabling

To enable Console, go into the Utilities Menu and choose Console. Next, tap on the Enable Console button to turn on the web site on your iPad. The area below will show an IP address such as http://192.168.0.123

Loading

Type this web address into the location bar in a web browser on a computer that is connected to the same computer network. For instance, if you connect your iPad or iPhone to Linksys 5G, connect your computer to the same WiFi network. You may also be able to have a wired connection to the same network.

Troubleshooting

If you have trouble connecting to OnSong Console with your web browser, it is most likely caused by network or computer security settings on. Please review our troubleshooting guide if you have trouble connecting.

Whitelisting

To protect access to your OnSong library, you'll be prompted on your device to permit access to the web browser you are using. Tap on the Accept button to view the full interface and begin using OnSong Console.

OnSong uses cookies to allow the browser to connect again without prompting in the future. However, if you use another computer or web browser, you will be prompted each time to ensure your OnSong library is being accessed properly.

Frequently Asked Questions

Here are some questions that you may have before purchasing, or when using OnSong Console.

Does Console work on Windows or just Mac?
OnSong Console works on both Windows and Mac, and most likely Linux too. It just requires a modern web browser that supports the HTML 5 and CSS 3 web standards.
Do I need to purchase Console for every device I own?
No. OnSong Console is purchased either as an in-app purchase, or is included in your OnSong Premium subscription. These are both available on multiple devices as long as you are signed in with your Apple ID or OnSong account.
My computer is wired to my network, but my iPad is wireless. Will Console still work?
Yes. As long as both devices are on the same computer network, a wired connection or wireless shouldn't matter. However, some routers set up different networks for each of these access methods. You will want to consult your network equipment user manual for more details on merging the networks if there are issues.
Both my devices are on the same network but I only get a blank screen in my web browser. Why?
OnSong Console works by turning your iPad or iPhone into a mini web server which may not be appreciated by some networks. Please try the following if you are having trouble connecting to Console:
  1. Ensure that your iPad or iPhone is on and OnSong is running. Console requires OnSong to be running in order to communicate.
  2. Disable and enable Console from the Console screen in the Utilities menu, or restart your iPad. In some cases, the web address that is shown may not be correct, especially when switching between networks.
  3. Make sure you are typing in the web address correctly. You must add the http:// before the four-part number called an IP address, and include the colon with the port number (5076).
  4. Some corporate networks do not permit other services to be running. Check with your IT staff to see if you are allowed to run console in that environment. OnSong Console operates on ports 80, 5076 and 5077. Some networks may block traffic on these ports. Log into your router and be sure to allow these ports to be active on the network. Some corporate networks do not permit other services to be running. Check with your IT staff to see if you are allowed to run console in that environment.
  5. If you are running a firewall on the computer, temporarily disable it to make sure that it is not inhibiting traffic.
  6. Try a different network to see if that helps resolved the issue.
Can I use my iPhone or iPad hotspot connection instead of a WiFi access point to use Console?
Yes. Turn on the hotspot in your device's Settings screen and use the WiFi option. Bluetooth or USB will not work. Connect your computer to the hotspot network, and connect your device if it is not already the hotspot. Keep in mind that some carrier may charge you for hotspot connectivity.
My Console screen is telling me to type in 127.0.0.1:5076 and it doesn't work. Any ideas?
127.0.0.1 is essentially the iPad or iPhone referring to itself and is caused by the network IP address not being able to be resolved. Go into the Console screen and disable and enable the console again to see if that refreshes to a different web address. You can also go into the Share menu » Connect » Servers and use the IP address found under your device's name.
My Console screen is telling me to type in an IP address that starts with 169...* and it doesn't work. Any ideas?
IP addresses in this range are often generated in the event that proper DHCP (the assignment of IP addresses on a network) has failed. You may need to go into your network settings and renew the lease to force the network to assign a different IP address, if one is available.
Why is the "Follow" button disabled in OnSong Console?
The follow button in Console requires the operation of Web Sockets. This is a special way for two devices to directly communicate over a network. The Follow button is disabled when the OnSong web socket server cannot be started. This may be caused by too many devices using the socket port on the network or due to a network security setting.
What web browsers does Console work with?
OnSong Console is an HTML 5, web-based application. This means that it works on modern web browsers such as the latest versions of Chrome, Safari, Firefox and Internet Explorer. Different browsers have their quirks and we are continuing to refine around these. Older versions of Internet Explorer will definitely have some issues.
I'm getting just the opening screen with the OnSong logo and it gets stuck. Why?
OnSong Console requires Javascript to be enabled in order to communicate with your device. Make sure that Javascript is enabled in your web browser's preferences and that no additional security plugins are preventing Javascript from operating.

Header

The header portion of the console interface appears at the top of the browser window. This contains the following elements:

OnSong Logo

The OnSong logo appears on the left side of the header to visually reinforce the web app. In addition, this logo's glow will pulse subtly when network operations are occurring.

Song Title

The song title appears prominently and changes as you select a different song in the Song List.

Save Button

The save button will appear once you've made a change in the Song Editor or in one of the palettes.

Lyrics Projection Button

Tapping on the lyrics projection button will open a new window suitable for running lyrics projection from within a web browser on a remote machine.

Help Link

This will link to the Console help web page on the OnSong web site.

Lyrics Projection

Tapping on the lyrics projection button in the Console will open a new window that displays the configured background and lyrics. This allows you to display lyrics from a remote computer and operate it with OnSong running on an iOS device, or through the console if the leading is enabled.

Full Screen Mode

Drag the window to the external screen you'd like to target and click in the body of the window. This will cause the window to enter full screen mode. You can then press ESC on the keyboard to exit full screen mode. Keep in mind that full screen mode acts differently depending on your browser and platform.

Navigation

When the lyrics window is enabled, you can use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move between sections.

Background and Styles

Currently all changes to the look of the lyrics projection must be performed through the External Video Menu from inside the host device.

Palettes

OnSong Console uses palettes to let you select and specific information. Palettes are like floating menus that can be repositioned on the screen. You can open and close palettes by using the menubar or the x icon in the upper right corner of the palette.

You can learn about each palette below:

Add Book Palette

This palette allows you to add new books to your library and is accessed through the Add Menu in the Sidebar.

Add Set Palette

This palette allows you to add new sets to your library and is accessed through the Add Menu in Sidebar.

Chords Palette

Gives you options for transposing and capoing chords, as well as controlling how chords and diagrams appear on the screen. This is similar to the bottom of the Style Preferences Menu. This palette is accessed from the menubar in the Song Viewer.

Import Files Palette

This palette lets you import one or more files from your computer and is accessed both from the Add Menu in the Sidebar as well as the Add Button in the Song List.

Insert Palette

This palette allows you to insert chords and section labels into the song and is accessed from the menubar in the Song Editor.

Metadata Palette

This palette allows you to change the metadata information about the song and is accessed from the menubar in the Song Editor. This is similar in function to the Metadata Editor found in the Song Editor within the OnSong app.

New Song Palette

This palette lets you create a new song from scratch and is accessed both from the Add Menu in the Sidebar as well as the Add Button in the Song List.

Style Palette

This palette lets you change how your songs lyrics and chords appear and is accessed via the menubar in the Song Viewer.

Text Tools Palette

This palette lets search and replace and alter the chord format of the song being edited. This is accessed through the menubar in the Song Editor.

Add Book

This palette allows you to simply set the name of the book to create. Type a name and click Create Book. You can then select the book from the sidebar to view the Song List in order to add new or existing songs to the book.

If you do not specify a name for the book and create it, no book will be added to your library.

Add Set

Use this palette to create new sets in your library. Simply enter a date or an optional title.

To select a date, either type it in the field or tap on the calendar icon to open a date picker. If you do not select a date, the current date is used. If you do not type a title, the full date will appear as the title of the set in your library.

To create the set, click on Create Set.

Chords

The chords palette provides tools for changing how chords appear in the chord chart. This affects both transposition, appearance, and chord diagrams.

Style

Typically chord charts use alphabetic characters to define chords. OnSong can convert alphabetic chords into numeric ones to better suit musicians that play using a number system. The selected style is highlighted. Choose from one of the following chord styles:

  • Alphabet uses letters A-G with sharps and flats to indicate precisely what chord should be played. If using different chord localizations, this may also include an H. Default.
  • Nashville uses a decimal numbering system which indicates the chord number based on the root chord of the key. In addition, this method uses symbols for different chord variations.
  • Roman uses upper and lowercase Roman numerals for chords. Major chords are represented in uppercase while minor chords are lowercase. Symbols are also used to indicate different modes such as a minus symbol for minor.
  • Solfege uses do, re, mi, fa, so, la, ti, do instead of numbers. Symbols are used to indicate different modes such as a minus for minor.

Transpose

Use this slider to transpose the song to any key. The key of C is placed on the far left and the key of Cb is on the far right. You can use the arrow keys to make fine-tune adjustments the key you would like to pick.

The power icon on the right turns transposition on and off. If turned off, and if no capo is applied, then no transposition is performed. This will display chords just as they appear in the Song Editor.

Capo

This slider allows you to apply a capo to the song. Slide from 0 to 11. This will modulate the chords of the song down to maintain the key of the song when a capo is applied. You can change the direction of this modulation in Settings » Display Settings » Song Formatting » Capo » Capo Modulates

You can turn the application of the capo on and off using the power icon on the right side. This allows you to maintain a capo and determine if you want to apply it or not depending on the instrument you are playing.

Diagrams

This section of the chords palette is used to toggle the chord diagram display on and off. Use the slider to adjust how many diagrams appear across the page. You can select a number between 4 and 10. Use the power icon on the right to toggle the visibility of chord diagrams on and off.

You can change how and where chord diagram appear in Settings » Display Settings » Song Formatting » Chord Diagrams.

Diagram Position

The diagram position chooser lets you determine where diagrams and drawn on the page. You can choose from:

  • None turns off chord diagrams. Default.
  • Below draws diagrams under the song content.
  • Above draws diagrams above the song content directly below the title and metadata.
  • Within draws chord diagrams in place of chords within the lyrics.

Instrument

This section allows you to select the instrument to use when displaying chords. The selected instrument is highlighted. Choose a different instrument to have the chord diagrams change to the selected instrument.

Transposing Instrument

If you are playing an instrument that does not play at concert pitch, you can adjust the chords that appear throughout the song to adjust for those instruments. Options include:

  • Off used for concert pitch and most stringed or percussion instruments like piano.
  • B-flat used for B-flat instruments such as trumpet, clarinet, bass clarinet, and soprano and tenor saxophones.
  • E-flat used for E-flat tuned instruments such as soprano clarinet, or alto and baritone saxophones.
  • F used for F tuned instruments such as French and English horns.
  • G used for alto flute.

Note: Making changes in this palette does not affect the song content but is applied in addition to the original song.

Import Files

This palette allows you to import one or more files at once into OnSong. Click on the Select files... button to open a file chooser window. Browse and select a file to import. Use the shift, command and control keys on your keyboard to select more than one file to import.

When you are all done, click on the Choose button in the window. Console will automatically upload and import those files into your library and show you the import status below the Select files... button. You can then close the palette to continue editing.

Please note that OnSong will only permit Supported File Formats to be imported into your OnSong library.

Insert

The insert palette is used to insert chords, line formatting, and section labels into a song. Position the text cursor where you would like to insert chords or on the line where you'd like to apply line formatting.

Chords

As you write new chords in the text editor, they will appear here. Position the text cursor where you would like to insert the chord and then click on a button to insert the chord in that location. Position of the cursor differs for each chord format:

  • Bracketed Chords requires the cursor to be placed within lyrics where you would like the chord to be played.
  • Chords Over Lyrics requires the cursor to be placed above lyrics and positioned above lyrics using spaces.

Font Style

Click on a color to insert color codes at the front of the line. You can also toggle the bold and italic buttons to insert those line formatting codes as well.

Highlighting

Click on a color to add highlighting line formatting code to the front of the line. The white option will remove the code.

Labels

Common section labels appear in this section. Tap on one to name the current section.

Metadata

The metadata palette automatically updates its fields as you select songs in the Song List. Change the contents of the fields to have OnSong update the metadata section of your song. This palette includes these fields:

Song Title

The title of the song.

Artist

The name of the artist or the byline to output under the song title.

Number

A number used to lookup the song in numbered music collections like hymnals.

Keywords

Keywords or topics to enter for the song. This is used in the By Topic tab in the Songs Menu.

Key

This sets the key of the song. If the key had been already set and there are chords in the song, this will also rewrite the chords of the song into that key.

You can also change the mode of the key to minor by clicking on the "m" button on the right side. The song contents are not rewriting when toggling between major and minor keys.

Capo

Sets the recommended capo level for the song.

Tempo

Set the tempo using this slider. Remember that you can click on the arrows to the left and right of the sliders to fine-tune adjust the values.

Time Signature

Click on a button that represents the time signature of the song to be written in the metadata section. If you do not want a time signature outputted, click on a selected time signature again to remove it. If the time signature you need is not in the list, congratulations on your rhythmic genius. Because of your skills, you'll just need to write the time signature yourself.

Duration

This is the time duration of the song. Set this to a default to enable autoscrolling with the approximate speed. This can be expressed as hh:mm:ss or numeric seconds.

Flow

This is the flow of the song used to arrange the parts of the song into a top-down fashion. Please see Flow for more details.

Copyright

This is the copyright line of the music. This will appear at the bottom of chord charts as well as in lyrics projection.

CCLI Song

This is the unique identifier for registering the song with CCLI SongSelect reporting. This will appear at the bottom of the chord chart on screen as well as at the bottom of lyrics projection.

Restrictions

These are a list of restrictions that are used to limit what recipients of the song can do with it. Please see Restrictions for a list of possible options.

New Song

This palette allows you to create a new song for editing in the Song Editor where you can type lyrics, chords and then save to your library on the device.

To create a song, type in an optional title and artist name and then select either Create OnSong or Create ChordPro from the buttons below. This will create the template song in the Song Editor and open the Metadata Palette for you to custom the song content.

Style

The style palette is used to change the way the chord chart looks in the Song Viewer. Use this to change the font, size, visibility, and color of different parts of the chord chart.

Font

This section contains toggle buttons that allow you to choose the typeface in which your chord chart should appear. Press the font button to make a change. The current font selection is highlighted.

Title

This slider allows you to the change the size and visibility of the title of the song. Slide to the left or right to decrease or increase the font size. The point size of the font is displayed as you adjust. You can also click on the arrow buttons to the left and right to fine-tune adjust the amount. Tap on the power icon on the right to toggle visibility of the title on and off.

Metadata

This slider allows you to the change the size and visibility of metadata of the song. This includes the artist name, key, capo, tempo, and time signature.

Slide to the left or right to decrease or increase the font size. The point size of the font is displayed as you adjust. You can also click on the arrow buttons to the left and right to fine-tune adjust the amount. Tap on the power icon on the right to toggle visibility of metadata on and off.

Section Labels

This slider allows you to change the size and visibility of section labels which are used to display a label for the upcoming lyrics and chords such as "Chorus" and "Verse".

Slide to the left or right to decrease or increase the font size. The point size of the font is displayed as you adjust. You can also click on the arrow buttons to the left and right to fine-tune adjust the amount. Tap on the power icon on the right to toggle visibility of section labels on and off.

Lyrics

This slider allows you to the change the size and visibility lyrics in the song. Lyrics comprise all content in the song other than chords such as musical instruction, section labels, etc.

Slide to the left or right to decrease or increase the font size. The point size of the font is displayed as you adjust. You can also click on the arrow buttons to the left and right to fine-tune adjust the amount. Tap on the power icon on the right to toggle visibility of lyrics on and off.

Chords

This slider allows you to the change the size and visibility of chords that appear above or within lyrics. Chords are detected in the song or have been surrounded with square brackets.

Slide to the left or right to decrease or increase the font size. The point size of the font is displayed as you adjust. You can also click on the arrow buttons to the left and right to fine-tune adjust the amount. Tap on the power icon on the right to toggle visibility of chords on and off.

Line Spacing

This slider is used to adjust the spacing between text in the chord chart. Slide to the left or right to decrease or increase the line spacing. You can use the arrow buttons to the left and right to fine-tune adjust the amount.

Chord Highlight

You can choose the highlight chords in your chord chart using this color picker. Click on the color of the highlight you desire. It will display under the chord in 50% opacity, just like a highlighter. Choosing the white color option removes the highlight.

Chord Color

This section allows you to change the color of the chords as well as their appearance. Click on a color in the color picker to change the color of the chord text. Choosing black uses the default text color which is black or white depending on the selected low light mode.

You can also toggle italic and bold appearance on and off for the chords as needed for extra visibility.

Text Tools

The text tools palette is used to perform operations on the text content of the song. This can help you change text quickly or switch and fix chord formatting.

Search and Replace

This section of the text tools palette is used to search and replace text in the Song Editor. This is useful for replacing words or chords when using bracketed chords. For instance, you can change all instances of [A4] to [Asus4].

To use, type the search value in the first field and the replace value in the second field. Then press the Perform Search/Replace button to perform the operation.

Chord Format

This section includes toggle buttons that allow you to switch between the two supported formats. If there are any square brackets located in the song content, the Bracketed Chords button is selected. Otherwise the Chords Over Lyrics button is selected. Press the opposite button to reformat the text content into the desired chord format.

It is useful to switch the bracketed chords when splitting or combining lines. This is because the chords will travel with the lyrics in this case. You can then switch to chords over lyrics if you would like to position chords in a more visual manner.

Fix Spaces

This section provides a single-use tool for correcting issues that may occur when converting text from a word processor. You may find that chords are pushed to the right and beyond the lyrics they used to reside over. This is due to variable-width fonts that require many more space characters to align chords above lyrics.

Press the Fix Alignment Spaces button to have chords detected and the space between the chords reduced by a specific amount. This usually will align the chords very close to their original positions when viewed in a word processor or printed. From there you can more easily adjust the chord positions.

Sidebar

The sidebar is where you can view and manage your collections, books, and sets in OnSong Console. To access the sidebar, tap on the icon in the upper left corner that appears as three horizontal lines. This will cause the sidebar to slide in from the left. Tapping on an option in the sidebar will collapse the sidebar and reveal the Song List contained in your selection.

The sidebar is organized in a hierarchy in these three categories:

Collections

This contains the All Songs and Unbound Songs collections that you're familiar with in OnSong. Tapping on All Songs will display all songs in your library in the Song List. Once you select an option here, the sidebar disappears to reveal the songs list. You can import songs in the song list, or by right-clicking to reveal the Add Menu.

Books

This contains all books that are used to organize songs in your library. You can tap on the arrow icon on the left to expand to reveal books. If you have no books in your library, no arrow icon appears. You can add a book by right-clicking on Books to reveal the Add Menu to add songs, books, and sets.

Sets

This contains the sets and folders that you use to play songs for a specific event. Tap on the arrow icon to reveal set folders. You can expand All Sets to view all sets in your library. To view a set, tap on the name. To add a set, right-click anywhere to open the Add Menu to add songs, books, or sets.

Add Menu

You can add songs, books, or sets by tapping on the + button in the lower-left corner. This will reveal a menu where you can choose what to add to your library.

Add Menu

You can use this menu to add songs, books, and sets to your library. In addition, if the menu appears when selecting an item in the sidebar, you can also delete that item. The following actions are available.

Add Song

The add song menu item reveals two ways in which you can add songs to your library.

  • Add New will open the New Song Palette where you can set a song title, artist, and create the OnSong or ChordPro format in the song editor.
  • Import Files will open the Import Files Palette where you can select one or more files to be imported into your library.

Add Book

Selecting this option will open the Add Book Palette to enter a name and create the book.

Add Set

Selecting this option will open the Add Set Palette to enter an optional set title and date for the set to create a new one.

Delete

Selecting the delete option (where available) will delete the selected book or set from the library after a prompt. This option is not available when selecting the + button at the bottom of the sidebar.

Song Editor

The song editor contains tools and a large text area used to change the text-based content of the song.

The text editor component of this pane allows you to type content using the full-sized keyboard of your computer. As you type, the changes you make are reflected in the Preview Pane on the right. This gives you feedback on what the song will look like to avoid trial and error.

In addition to typing content in the text editor, you can also use palettes accessible from the toolbar to get the song looking just right. The toolbar buttons include:

Metadata

This toolbar button toggles the Metadata Palette on and off. Use this to set information about the song without knowing OnSong or ChordPro tags.

Insert

This toolbar button toggles the Insert Palette on and off. Use this palette to insert chords, section labels, and line formatting into the text editor.

Text Tools

This toolbar button toggles the Text Tools Palette on and off. Use this to change the formatting of the song or perform search and replace functions.

Delete

Click on this toolbar button to delete the song from your library. When you choose this option, you will be prompted prior to the song being deleted.

Convert

When you've imported a convertible file such as PDF or Microsoft Word, this option becomes enabled. Click on this to begin the conversion process on the host device. Once completed, the text editor is updated with the newly converted text.

Song List

The song list appears in the left-most pane of the web app and is used for finding and selecting songs to view and edit. Use one of the following to add, import, or edit songs:

Adding

The + button in the upper left corner displays a menu of options for adding songs to the list. From here you can create new songs, import songs from your computer, or add existing songs to existing books or sets.

You can also drag and drop files from your computer onto the song list to import them into your library.

Searching

The search bar gives you an area to type keywords. Press enter on your computer keyboard to filter the list by those keywords. You can then clear the search field to view all songs again.

Browsing

The majority of this pane displays a table of songs. Three columns provide common information for browsing songs including:

  • Icon column displays an icon that was picked from the Organizer Menu. You can sort songs by this attribute by clicking the table header in the column.
  • Song Title displays the name of the song. You can sort the list by song title by clicking on the column header. The song list is sorted by the song title by default.
  • Key displays the key of the song if one is provided. Clicking on the table header above this column will sort the songs by key.

Click on a song to load it into Console. The song's contents will appear in the Song Editor and the song will be displayed in the Song Viewer.

Reordering

If you are viewing a set list, you can drag and drop songs in the list to reorder the set.

Deleting

You can delete songs from your library or remove them from the selected book or set by selecting the song and then pressing the Delete key on your computer keyboard. You will be prompted to ensure you don't accidentally delete the song. The song will then be either removed from the selected book or set, or deleted from your library.

Add Menu

Add songs in the Song List can perform different actions. For instance, you may want to write a new song, or import files from your computer. Additionally you may want to add songs to a set that are already in your library.

New Song

This option will open the New Song Palette where you can set a song title, artist, and create the OnSong or ChordPro format in the song editor.

Existing Songs

If you are viewing a book or a set, this option is available. Selecting this option will open a slightly different interface depending on your current selection.

  • Books will open the Add Songs to Book interface for selecting songs to place in the book from your library.
  • Sets will open the Add Songs to Set interface for selection songs to place into your set from your library.

Import Files

This option will open the Import Files Palette where you can select one or more files to be imported into your library.

Song Viewer

The song viewer pane displays how the song will look inside of OnSong. You can scroll this pane to view the entire song. Use the toolbar to toggle features and palettes on and off.

Note: If you are viewing a file that is not text-based, it is up to the web browser if and how the file will be displayed. Most web browsers can view PDF files in a browser window, but other documents such as Microsoft Word will be downloaded to your computer for viewing in a separate application.

Low Light

Click on this button to toggle low light mode on and off. Not only does this show you how the chord chart will look in the preview, but when you save your changes the host device will also switch to low light mode too.

Pages

Click on this button to toggle viewing the chord chart on physical pages. This will divide your song based on the Page Layout options you've set in settings. This can give you an idea of how the chord chart will print.

Lead

When you turn on lead, action you make in Console like changing songs, scrolling and selecting sections also take place on the host device. This allows Console to remotely control another iPad, iPhone or iPod touch.

Follow

When you turn on follow, Console will load the currently viewed song on the host device. In addition, the screen will scroll along with any changes made on the host device. This is handy for knowing the song that is loaded on the device.

Note that follow may not be available if your network disallows web sockets from running. Please try disabling and enabling Console again and refreshing the browser window.

Style

This opens and closes the Style Palette, allowing you to style how the song should appear in the preview and on the device.

Chords

This opens and closes the Chords Palette so you can transpose, capo, and change the way chords and diagrams appear on the screen.

View As...

When viewing external files such as a PDF, this will display the PDF in the preview pane. You can switch between that and the text-based version of the song similar to the Use the imported file instead of OnSong switch in the Conversion Toolbar of the Song Editor.

Download

Click on the down arrow to choose a format to download the chord chart in. This will use the host device to create the file so be sure to save your changes first.

Print

Click on the print button to have the host device generate the print-ready PDF file and print it from your computer. This will prompt you to save your changes before printing.

Download Menu

When you click on the down arrow next to the download toolbar button, you can choose one of the following formats to download to your computer.

Note: This uses the host device to generate the content so you will be prompted to save any changes prior to the file being generated.

Console for Mac

OnSong Console for Mac is a Mac application that lets you connect to and manage your OnSong library.

Connecting

OnSong Console for Mac connects to iOS devices running OnSong. While choosing devices and switching between them are easy, there are a few steps that may help get you up and running quickly.

Overview

Once you've connected to your iOS device, you can start importing, editing and managing songs in your OnSong library. This overview will show you how to use the application.

Other Platforms

Console for Mac is limited to Apple desktop computers. If you're looking for console features on other devices that operate a modern web browser, use the Console Add-On.

OnSong Console for Mac requires OS X 10.9 and higher and an iOS device (iPad, iPhone or iPod Touch)

Connecting

OnSong Console for Mac connects to your iPad or iPhone device using web-based standards. To make the connecting between your Mac and iOS device, please watch our video tutorial.

Here are a few pointers to keep in mind:

Same Wireless or Wired Network

Make sure that both of your devices are connected to the same computer network. Most routers support both wired and wireless connections. While iOS devices typically are not connected to a network with an Ethernet cable, your Mac may be. Just make sure both are connected to the same network.

Share Your Library With Others

As a security precaution, you need to enable OnSong to share your library with other devices. To do this, open the Share Menu and then open the Connect Screen. On the Servers Tab there is a Share your library with others switch that must be enabled.

Network Security Settings

Keep in mind that network security settings can hamper a proper connection between the Mac app and the iOS device. This connection uses OnSong Connect technology. This works by setting up your iOS device as a web server and announces itself on the network using multicast DNS, sometimes referred to as Bonjour or mDNS. Some network routers may not support this protocol, or it may be limited due to other network restrictions like firewalls.

Check with your network administrator if you experience issues, or try another network to see if that resolves the connection problem.

Overview

Let's get familiar with the user interface:

Title Bar

The top of the screen provides basic window management as well as the Navigator which allows you to switch between devices, books and sets.

Songs List

On the left side of the screen is a list of songs that are retrieved according to what is selected in the Navigator. In addition, this area provides a search bar, sort bar and the add button for importing and creating new songs.

Song Editor

The center area provides a text box and palettes for modifying the underlying content and information about the song.

Song Viewer

The viewer is located on the right side of the screen and displays either the rendered text-based chord chart or the imported file associated with the song.

Title Bar

The title bar appears at the top of the screen and provides for basic window management and content navigation.

From right to left, it includes:

Window Management

On the left side are the standard three OS X buttons for closing, minimizing and maximizing the window. Closing the window does not close down the application. To close down the application, you need to close it from the Menubar. Minimizing the window will minimize into the OS X dock. Maximizing the window will take the application full screen in OS X. To make the window the size of the current display, press the OPTION key when clicking on this button.

Navigator

The navigator is used to switch between devices, books and sets.

Save Button

The save button highlights once changes are made to the selected song. Tapping on the save button will send changes to the selected device to save those changes.

Pane Controls

The three buttons on the right are used to toggle the visibility of each of the application's panes. The position of these buttons corresponds with the song list, song editor and song viewer accordingly. You can click on the button to hide the pane and then click again to show it.

Note: You can also adjust the size of each pane by dragging the divider between the panes.

Beginner's Guide

In this guide we will show you the core features of OnSong needed to start using OnSong right away. We will reference various screens in our in-depth user manual, but focus on getting you the know-how to use OnSong effectively, quickly.

Installing

OnSong is only available for purchase on the App Store. Search for "OnSong" in the App Store or follow this direct link. Tap on the buy button and enter your Apple ID and password. This will purchase the OnSong app directly from Apple and begin the download process.

Note: If you have already purchased OnSong you can download and install the app on another device for free as long as you are using the same Apple ID with which you first purchased the app.

Launch OnSong

When the app has finished downloading and installing, it will appear on your home screen. Tap on this icon to open OnSong. Once opened, you will find a Registration Screen. Fill out your information to receive periodic emails on new OnSong releases. You will then see the Getting Started where you can find information about OnSong. Close that screen by tapping on the Close button in the upper right corner.

Getting Oriented

Once you open the app, you will be immediately immersed in the OnSong user interface. You'll see the majority of the screen is filled with a demonstration song called Welcome to OnSong. Above that you'll find the Menubar which is where you will be accessing nearly all the tools and functions of the app. In the lower right corner is the Live Bar where you can toggle certain live features like Autoscroll, Backing Tracks and the Metronome. Let's first start by adding a new song to your song library.

Viewing Your Songs

Tap on the Songs button in the upper left corner of the screen to open the Songs Menu. This is where you organize all your songs and sets. Make sure the All Songs tab is selected at the bottom. Here you will see all the songs in your OnSong library. You should have only the Welcome To OnSong at this point.

Importing Songs

Tap on the + button in the lower right corner to view the Add Songs screen. Here you can find many ways to import files or subscriptions you have into OnSong. OnSong supports a variety of file formats. We are going to use Dropbox to import files that we have wirelessly and anywhere there's an Internet connection. You'll need to setup a Dropbox account and authorize OnSong to access your Dropbox. That's a one-time thing. After that, you just browse and select files you want to import and then tap on the Import button. The files will download and be added to your library. You'll be returned to the All Songs list and your imported songs will appear in the Song Viewer.

If you'd like to import content from the Internet, OnSong provides the Add To OnSong Safari Extension which lets you import from popular chord chart and lyrics websites. Some bands don't just post their chord charts, but also media like backing tracks and loops! The Add To OnSong Safari extension can import any type of file format OnSong supports too!.

Viewing Songs

Tap on the song in this screen that you want to view and it will be loaded into the Song Viewer. You can scroll this song up and down to view it. Does it look like you want? If not, you can make changes to it using the Song Editor.

Editing Songs

Text-based chord charts work best with OnSong, although you can also import chord charts you may have in Word, PDF, and other supported formats. To edit your chord chart, tap on the pencil icon in the Menubar to open the Song Editor. In here you can make changes to the song's lyrics and chords. You can learn more about the OnSong and ChordPro file formats.

When you're all done making changes, tap on the Done button to save the changes and redraw the screen with your updates.

Change Formatting

Tap on the sliders icon in Menubar to open the Style Preferences Menu. Here you can change the font, size of different elements of the page, as well as highlight the chords. Try to make some changes and see how it affects the chord chart you are viewing.

Add a Sticky Note

Now let's add a sticky note to the song. To do this, tap on the sticky note icon in the Menubar to open the Annotations Menu. Next, choose Sticky Note from the menu to place a sticky note on the screen. Use the Note Editor to write a note. Tap on Done and then tap and drag the note to place it where you like. Double tap on the note to open the editor again. Tap on the "A" icon to open the Appearance Menu where you can change the note color and other parameters. Tap Done to save your changes.

Create a Set List

Now that we have two songs, let's create a set. Tap on the Songs button in the Menubar to open the Songs Menu. Tap on the My Sets tab at the bottom. Make sure that you are on the All Sets screen and then tap on the + button at the bottom to create a new set. Set the date and optional title and then tap Done.

Tap on the new set to view the set and then tap on the + button on the bottom right to pick some songs. Tap on both songs in your library to place a checkmark next to them and then tap Done. Now you have a set with two songs. Rearrange these songs by tapping on the Edit button in the upper right corner to enter editing mode where you can drag and drop songs where you'd like. Tap Done to save your changes.

Backup Your Library

As you create your library of songs and sets, your OnSong library will become more and more valuable to you. Keep it safe by creating a backup. No matter what happens to your device or OnSong library, you can always restore from this backup file in the event of an emergency.

Continued Learning

OnSong is a deep app full of features that you can use. To get started, refer to the Features section of the user manual. If you want to learn more about a specific screen or tool inside of the app, refer to the User Interface section of this manual.

# of Devices

No content available

Technical Support

OnSong provides email-based support for paid users of OnSong. So whether you have purchased OnSong in the past, purchased OnSong Pro, or are a member of OnSong Essentials or Premium, we can help assist you. To get help, just go into the Utilities Menu by tapping on the gear icon in the Menubar and then choose Communicate and then Get Support.

If you're already a subscriber, your name and email will be filled in and you can provide a brief subject overviewing the issue you have as well as a more in-depth description that describes how we can replicate the issue you are having. This screen will automatically backup your library including your settings, and send them to our help desk staff along with the currently selected song, set, and book. This will allow us to see the issue you are having and provide resolution as quickly as possible.

OnSong does not provide telephone support. We have found that telephone support does not provide us with the details we need to help resolve most issues and also does not allow us to send vital resources such as attachments, images, or video that can help resolve your issue.

If you are an OnSong Premium member, you can access the same support system but opt to enable the Fast Track option. This will move your request to the top of our list and notify our team directly of the issue. We work to ensure our loyalty users get the best service we can offer.

Premium Technical Support

No content available

Features

OnSong is designed to be the go-to app for musicians. Whether you're practicing, teaching, or performing live, OnSong has the tools and features to let you be free to play music.

The following is a dissection of OnSong as a series of features. Choose one to get an overview of the feature as well as links into the interface of the app that makes the feature work.

Add To OnSong

Add content to your OnSong library right from the Safari web browser.

Autoscroll

Scroll from the top of the chord chart to the bottom like a teleprompter.

Backing Tracks

Play backing tracks through your device while you play along with chord charts.

Backup

Save your entire OnSong library to a single file for easy restoration.

Books

Organize your songs into books to manage large music libraries.

Capo

Slap a capo on your guitar and let OnSong adjust what you need to play to stay in key.

Chords

Chords are detected in text-based documents letting you highlight, transpose, and even play them on a virtual instrument.

ChordVault

Access thousands of main stream songs and keep things legal.

Color

OnSong lets you use color to suit your music and mood through an intuitive color picker.

Connect

Wirelessly control your band's OnSong devices with music to meet their needs.

Console

Manage the library on your device from a web browser for fast edits.

Chromecast

Use an inexpensive dongle from Google to project lyrics without wires.

Developers

Create your website or app to integrate with OnSong through our URL scheme and OnSong Connect API.

Drawing

Draw on the chord chart with pens and highlighters.

Dropbox

Import, export, and sync with Dropbox to get content on and off your device.

External Video

Expand the OnSong experience beyond one device with lyrics projection and stage monitor mode.

File Formats

OnSong supports a number of text-based file formats, as well as the ability to view other types of files.

Files

Import and export to any app-based storage service that supports the Files app in iOS.

Flow

Write each section of your song once and let OnSong expand the content from top to bottom.

Foot Pedals

Your hands are busy on stage, so use your feet to control your music and perform other actions in the app.

Gears

Extend your control when using foot pedals to shift into different gears.

Hands-Free Operation

Your hands are busy when playing an instrument. OnSong can use foot pedals and more.

Low Light Mode

Increase readability and reduce light wash when in dimly lit environments.

Lyrics Projection

Project lyrics to a crowd, individuals, or to a congregation.

Messages

Send color-coded, custom messages to your team for hassle-free signaling.

Metronome

Play to a click track for practice or to start the song off right on stage.

MIDI Integration

Send MIDI to control the sound of instruments, or listen for song changes and more.

OnCue

Stream your set and songs to OnSong devices around you with Bluetooth or WiFi.

Output Options

OnSong features a number of ways to output your information to get the job done. Export, print, and open content into other apps.

Pitch Pipe

Play back tones to get acappella or vocal intros started without music.

Planning Center Integration

Download your songs or plans from Planning Center into OnSong for use on-stage.

Printing

Output your songs or sets to paper or PDF. Includes song lists and multipage printing.

Rockin' With The Cross

Access thousands of worship songs for a low monthly fee.

Scenes

Create dynamic stage lighting with coordinated lyrics projection backgrounds and control it all on stage.

Sets

Create sets for playing a venue or event. Flip through your songs with ease.

Stage Monitor

Connect one or more video screens and run your stage with one OnSong device.

SongSelect

Access PDF chord charts or text-based lyrics from this common service.

Sticky Notes

Stick notes on your chord chart to remind yourself of intros and more.

Synchronization

Maintain the same library on your personal devices.

Timeline

OnSong now features non-linear autoscrolling by recording navigation events onto a timeline for playback.

Transposition

Change the key of the song instantly without bringing up bad memories of music theory class.

Universal App

OnSong is an universal app so it works on iPad, iPhone and iPod touch. Install on your iPad and iPhone. Learn some differences in the user interface when using OnSong on a more mobile device.

WorshipReady.com

Get worship songs hand-crafted for use in OnSong with subscription tiers.

Actions

One of the first steps to automating your stage presence is actions. Actions are the things that can be done in OnSong such as scrolling down through the song, or flipping to the next song. Actions are performed by triggers which are the events that take place that cause the action. For instance, pressing a foot pedal on the floor would trigger an action like turning the virtual page.

Of course, that's the tip of the iceberg. OnSong has over 150 actions you can assign to each trigger, giving you boundless opportunities. With OnSong Premium, you get features like Double Tap and Multiple Actions to perform more actions with less hardware. It's as simple as assigning an action to a trigger.

Here's a look at some of the triggers where you can assign actions:

Foot Pedals

OnSong supports many wireless foot pedals from companies like AirTurn, CODA and PageFlip. This means you can finally put your foot down and get some action.

Smart Buttons

If you have enough going on with your feet, you may want to use Flic, a smart button that works over Bluetooth. Featuring microsuction mounting, you can place this on your instrument and perform up to three actions per button.

Screen Taps

Even if you don't have the budget or desire for more hardware, you can assign actions to regions of your screen, giving you control with just a tap.

MIDI

The very mention of this acronym can make even the most seasoned musician tremble, but MIDI gives you the power to fully automate your instruments and audio devices. In the most simple form, you can listen for signals from your instrument and have OnSong do all the things.

Sticky Notes

Sticky notes give you the ability to keep notes like what pedal board or keyboard patches you need to change. But what if you could tap on the note and have OnSong do all that for you with MIDI? Well, you can.

Triggers

Many actions are performed by your input. But what if you want to perform an action when something else happens? You can do that too. For instance, you can start a backing track as soon as you flip to another song.

Double Tap

Many users choose to control OnSong using foot pedals. In most cases, that's two pedals on the floor to keep things simple. But what if you need to do more with less? Double Tap unlocks additional functions by simply pressing the same foot pedal twice.

Double Tap works with every type of trigger in OnSong including foot pedal presses, screen taps, MIDI input, and sticky notes. This means you can double your control.

To use Double Tap, you first need to be an OnSong Premium member. This gives you access to all the premium features. Next, assign an action to a trigger as you normally would. At the bottom of the Actions Menu, tap on the Double Tap tab to assign an different action. That's it! You can now tap once with the original action, and tap twice for another action.

When you assign a double tap action, the single tap action will incur a slight delay of a few milliseconds in order to determine if a single tap or a double tap was intended. Do not use Double Tap if you intend to use a time-sensitive action on the single tap.

Multiple Actions

Simply put, actions let you control OnSong from a physical or external trigger. For instance, pressing a foot pedal can perform a single action. While Double Tap lets you double the utility of a single pedal, you may still want even more control for more sophisticated setups.

The Multiple action is available in the Actions Menu and allows you program a single trigger (pedal, tap, MIDI input, etc) to perform different actions each time the same trigger is activated.

Multiple Actions is a premium feature and requires an OnSong Premium membership.

Moments

Moments let you add other events to your set list, turning it into a run sheet for event management. Moments can be added to an existing set by tapping on the compose button next to the + button in the lower right corner.

When you add a moment with a duration, you are prompted to set a start time for your set. This will result in scheduled times being displayed to the right of each item in the set. This time is calculated from the duration of the moment of the song.

Adding Moments

To add a moment, tap on the compose button in the lower right corner to choose from a list of preset moments.

Editing Moments

Once you select a present moment, or if you tap on a moment when in editing mode, you can change your moment including its title, icon, color, and duration.

Broadcasting

Musicians today want to be able to reach their listeners both live and online. Live-streaming performances has become commonplace as a way to reach a global fan base. In addition, e-learning has become a necessity in today's global economy. OnSong lets you share your screen with popular video conferencing apps, all from a single device!

To get started, open the Share Menu from the Menubar and then choose the Social option. From there, choose Broadcast top open the system broadcast picker.

Be sure to watch the tutorial video to learn how to use broadcasting to reach your audience with your favorite apps!

Bumpers

OnSong enables you to scroll through yours songs and through your entire set with just a press of a foot pedal. Though this is convenient, it could mean accidentally navigating to the next or previous song in your set.

Bumpers give you protection from these accidents by notifying you that the next pedal press will navigate you to the next or previous song. In addition to showing you to the song title, it also provides key and capo information so you can prepare. When you reach the end of the set, it will let you know too so if you have any triggers assigned to the beginning or end of the set.

Bumpers appear in a semi-translucent box that is based off the app color. This looks good and is visible when running in and out of Low Light Mode.

While some users may appreciate this extra safety, others may want to disable it to avoid additional pedal presses. You can do this in Settings » Navigation Settings » Foot Pedals » Show Bumpers. You can also adjust this setting in the Foot Pedal Settings Menu.

Document Scanner

The document scanner is an OnSong Premium feature that lets you use your device's camera to import songs into your OnSong library. You simply line up the camera with pages on a table or music stand. The document scanner finds rectangles that look like paper and snap the shot. It automatically perspective corrects your pages.

Prerequisites

The document scanner is available in OnSong 2020.0 and requires iOS/iPadOS 13 or higher because of the advanced computer vision that is being used. You'll also need to have OnSong Premium to use this feature.

If you don't see this in your Add Songs Menu, tap on the + button to add it to your customized import sources.

Scanning Pages

The document scanner takes over your enter screen to use your camera in augmented reality to capture pages.

Making Adjustments

You can make adjustments in the camera to handle changes in the environment. For instance, if you are on a dimly lit stage, turn on the flash button to enable the rear flashlight to illuminate the paper.

Reviewing Pages

Use the menubar that appears that the bottom of the screen with your scanned pages to make adjustments to each page, more bad scans, reorder pages, and finally import the document into your library.

Importing

Once you're satisfied with your scanned document, tap on the Save button in the right corner to import the document as a PDF file into your library.

Importing

Coming soon...

Making Adjustments

As you're getting started scanning pages, there are a few controls on the side or bottom of the screen you can use to make a great scan from the beginning.

Flash

The first option is to enable flash when taking the photograph for the scan. The default option is auto which determines if flash should be used by evaluating lighting conditions. You can also tap on this to turn flash on or off.

Color Mode

This option lets you choose the color mode to use when taking the scan. By the default, the scanner will take the picture using full color. You can choose from the following options:

  • Color is a full color scan and is useful for showing high-contrast text along with colors. This may sacrifice accurate color reproduction for better legibility of text.
  • Grayscale is used for documents that are printing with black, but may have various levels of shading.
  • Black & White is used for text-only documents and may result in higher contrast and become easier to convert into text-based documents using optical character recognition.
  • Photo is used for scanning photographs and will result in the use of more accurate color, but is not good for scanning textual documents.

Shutter Mode

The document scanner will automatically take a picture when it detects a rectangle and determines that a good scan can be made. You can enable Manual shutter mode which will require you to take the picture using the button on the screen instead.

Page Editor

Tapping on a thumbnail of a page displays the editing toolbar where you can access a number of tools including:

Crop

This tool loads the photo that was taken and displays the selection as a rectangle shape. You can use tap and drag on the four corners to better crop the page as well as make corrections for perspective distortion. During this process, you may also opt to try again by tapping on the Retake button. Keep in mind that the document scanner cannot adjust for curvature in the pages, only perspective correction.

Color Mode

Tap on the color mode button to choose from a different color mode including:

  • Color is a full color scan and is useful for showing high-contrast text along with colors. This may sacrifice accurate color reproduction for better legibility of text.
  • Grayscale is used for documents that are printing with black, but may have various levels of shading.
  • Black & White is used for text-only documents and may result in higher contrast and become easier to convert into text-based documents using optical character recognition.
  • Photo is used for scanning photographs and will result in the use of more accurate color, but is not good for scanning textual documents.

Rotate

Use this tool to rotate the scan into the proper orientation. Tapping on this tool shows you the cropped and perspective-corrected scan and lets you rotate it by 90 degrees.

Delete

If you've accidentally scanned a page you don't want, just tap on the trash can icon to delete the page.

Reviewing Pages

Once you've scanned your pages, they appear in the menubar at the bottom of the screen. Here you can go in and edit each page. Once you're happy with the document, tap on the Save button to create a PDF file and then import the file into your library.

Cancel

If you've changed your mind, just tap on the Cancel button to close the document scanner without adding the document to your library.

Editing Pages

Tap on the thumbnails in the menubar to open the Page Editor. In here you can make changes to the crop, rotation, and color mode as well as delete or retake the picture for that page.

Importing

Once you're happy the scan, just tap on the Save button to import the scanned document into your library as a song.

Scanning Pages

The document scanner takes over your enter screen to use your camera in an augmented reality interface to capture pages. Here are some steps to make sure you get the best results.

Best Practices

Here are some tips for getting the best quality scans.

  1. Make sure that your case or cover is not blocking the camera.
  2. Place your paper on a flat surface such as a table, the floor, or a music stand.
  3. Ensure the paper is as flat as possible to avoid warping as the system corrects for perspective.
  4. Use good lighting to ensure the highest contrast ratio between the paper and text.
  5. Use other controls on the left to adjust the image using flash, mode, and shutter.

Capturing the Page

As you move the camera, the computer vision system will identify rectangles in the scene. If the rectangle is determined to be a piece of paper, the scanner will automatically take a picture. You can also tap on the camera button on the bottom or side of the screen to initiate a photo.

Multiple Pages

As you capture pages, they will appear in the menubar at the bottom of the screen. You can flip through multiple pages for a single song. You can always go back and make adjustments.

Extract Text

OnSong can import and view a wide variety of file formats, but works best with text-based chord charts, allowing for chord transposition, text formatting, and lyrics projection. Converting existing files can be a challenge. OnSong provides tools to make converting these file formats easier.

Adobe PDF

Many users have PDF files available that they have used in their paper binders for years. The Adobe PDF file format is great for accurately representing the printed page and is portable between different computer platforms.

Images

You can import photos and other files using the JPEG, PNG, and TIFF file formats. These are images that are displayed "as-is" but may be able to be converted into text if they are from a scanned document.

Word Processing Files

OnSong can view many popular word processing files such as Microsoft Word, Apple Pages, and the Rich Text Format (RTF). These are viewed "as-is" but can usually be converted to text-based chord charts.

Adobe PDF

PDF files are a popular option for storing and printing chord charts and lyrics sheets. You may have been using PDF files for years to catalog your digital library. The Adobe PDF file format is great for accurately representing the printed page and is portable between different computer platforms. Let's take a look at some challenges with this file format and ways we can extract text for best results.

Adobe PDF files are displayed "as-is" in OnSong and can't be edited, formatted, or participate in low light mode. While these files may contain text, it is placed on the the virtual page in a way that enables it to be printed, and not easily understood or modified by other apps. In addition, PDF files can also be comprised of graphics or scanned images, or any combination of these. They can also be encrypted, protecting their contents from being extracted. Because of this, every PDF file is different so there's no way to handle perfect conversion into a text-based document.

You can extract the text of a PDF file within OnSong using the Song Editor and tapping on the Extract Text button in the Conversion Toolbar that appears before the on-screen keyboard is revealed. OnSong will attempt to extract the text from the PDF file first, and if no text is available, it will process the file using Optical Character Recognition (OCR). The result will most likely end with text, but you will need to review and tweak the text into a file format that OnSong understands. In addition, if the file was encrypted, the result of the extraction may result in garbled characters. These files are not able to be extracted due to the protection applied to them by the authoring software.

Here are some issues you may have with extracted PDF files:

Bad Spacing

You may find that some text is placed out of order, or with poor spacing. This is because PDF files may text shortcuts to align text using multiple text fragments. OnSong works to place these text fragments in proximity to each other using frame proximity calculations, but there may still be issues that require you to manually correct this.

Chords with Extra Spaces

Every chord chart is created differently depending on the author and the software used. For instance, the original file may have had multiple space characters used to align chords above lyrics. If a variable-width font is used, this may result in many more spaces being used then the lyrics below. Use Fix Alignment Spaces found in the Text Tools Menu found in the Menubar of the Song Editor to bring those chords back closer to their position and then manually adjust as needed.

Compressed Chords

Another problem may be chords that are too close together on a line above the chords. This can happen if chords were originally placed into text boxes and then aligned above chords. You will need to manually align those chords over the corresponding lyrics in the Song Editor.

Garbled Characters

If you attempt to extract text from an encrypted PDF document, it may result in a screen full of characters. You will need to revert the extraction process or cancel out of the Song Editor and find a different way to extract text.

Unrecognized Characters

If OnSong cannot extract the text from the document directly, it may need to submit the document to optical character recognition (OCR). This means that a computer will attempt to "read" the document visually. Depending on the quality of the PDF, this may result in the improper character being used. For instance, if your document had a flat symbol, it may be interpreted as a lowercase letter "b", or if the PDF was scanned, faded text may result in other characters. Review the document and make these manual changes as needed in the Song Editor.

Images

Images are viewed using the web-based image viewer in OnSong and are very limited due to the file format. They are displayed "as-is" in OnSong and can't be edited, formatted, or participate in low light mode.

You can extract the text of an image file within OnSong using the Song Editor and tapping on the Extract Text button in the Conversion Toolbar that appears before the on-screen keyboard is revealed. OnSong will process the file using Optical Character Recognition (OCR) and the result will most likely end with text. You will then need to to review and tweak the text into a file format that OnSong understands.

You will likely find issues with the resulting text depending on the quality of the image. For instance, if you attempt to extract text from a photo of a beautiful sunset, you will be sorely disappointed. But if you extract text from a good image of a text document from a scanner, you will have decent results. You will want to check the spacing of chords since that may be lost during the OCR process. You can make changes to the text-based document after extraction using the Song Editor.

Word Processing Files

If you've written your chord charts or lyrics sheets in programs like Microsoft Word, you can view those "as-is" in OnSong. However, these file types cannot be edited, formatted, or participate in low light mode. Because of the subtleties of each word processor and the author of the document, there's no way to handle perfect conversion of these into a plain-text document.

You can extract the text of word processing files within OnSong using the Song Editor and tapping on the Extract Text button in the Conversion Toolbar that appears before the on-screen keyboard is revealed. OnSong will attempt to extract the text from the file, but you will need to review and tweak the text into a file format that OnSong understands.

Here are some issues you may have with the extracted file:

Chord Spacing

A common issue with word processing documents is chord spacing. This is because most chord charts are written with chords over the lyrics with spaces used to align the chords above the correct words and phrases. When a variable-width font is used, many more space characters must be used to align chords above as compared to the lyrics below. When this is covered to plain text and viewed in a fixed-width font, you'll notice chords are pushed out to the right of the document and no longer align.

Use Fix Alignment Spaces found in the Text Tools Menu found in the Menubar of the Song Editor to bring those chords back closer to their position and then manually adjust as needed.

Unrecognized Characters

One issue with any imported file is how it handles special characters. In particular, you may find that quotation marks are replaced with strange international characters. This happens because Microsoft Word uses international characters as placeholders for these smart quote characters.

To solve this, we recommend either disabling smart quotes in the word processing application, or to export the text from your word processing document as a plain text (*.txt) document and then importing into OnSong. Alternately, you can copy and paste from the word processing application into OnSong Console and tweak the song in real time.

Fast Track

OnSong takes customer support seriously. But with nearly a million users around the world, it may take some time to get back to you with personalized support. If you're an OnSong Premium member, go straight to the head of the line with Fast Track.

For the fastest support, open the Utilities Menu by tapping on the gear icon in the Menubar and then choose Communicate » Get Support. Fill out your email address and name as well as a brief explanation of the issue. Be sure to provide steps our support staff can use to replicate the issue. Include what you expect to happen versus what is happening.

At the bottom of the screen is a switch which allows you to turn on Fast Track. When you send your request, OnSong support staff will be notified directly to review your case and provide near immediate response times.

Libraries

When you first start using OnSong, you import and manage your songs in a library. The library comprises all of your songs, sets, books, settings... everything! For most, this is all you will ever need.

Libraries allow you to create completely separate instances of OnSong that are isolated from each other. This may be useful if you are using one device for multiple users, or never want to mix songs or sets from multiple bands.

You can access your libraries and manage them by opening the Songs Menu and selecting the Songs tab. Next, tap on Books button to view a list of your collections and books. You can then tap Back to see the Libraries Menu.

Live Video

More than ever, musicians are reaching their audiences through live-streaming. OnSong has features that let you make an impact with engaging still or motion graphics, lyrics, and live video that doesn't break the bank.

Enable Live Video

Live video is an OnSong Premium feature that lets you use your camera as a motion background. You can enable live video by tapping the Live button in the External Video Menu to turn it on. You can configure your live video by tapping and holding on the Live button, or by tapping on the arrow button to open the Live Video Configuration Editor.

Broadcasting

With OnSong, you can broadcast your OnSong screen to video conferencing apps, right on your device! You can use the Lyrics Preview Widget full screen to show your audience your live video with effects and lyrics. Reduce the opacity of your Lyrics Preview Widget to show your chord chart underneath.

Video Capture and IMAG

You can also use the output of live video to output to an HDMI video capture card or video switcher to use the camera on your device for live-streaming and recording. You can even use it as a view for live video editing for IMAG (image multiplication) use cases.

MainStage

OnSong is a powerful MIDI controller that lets you control your rig in a manner that's contextual to each song. This means that you can have your patches and effects ready to play just by going to the next song in your set list. Apple's MainStage is a Mac app you can use to add sonic depth to your music. With pre-designed templates like those from Sunday Sounds, you can use OnSong in a very intuitive way.

Connecting to a Mac Laptop

There are many ways to connect your iPad or iPhone for controlling MainStage on a Mac, but none are as simple as IDAM. IDAM stands for Inter-Device Audio and MIDI mode which uses the sync/charge cable that came with your iOS device. To use this, simple connect your iOS device to your laptop using the USB charging cable. Next, go into your Applications folder and open the Utilities folder to find the Audio MIDI Setup app. Once open, view the Audio Devices window and locate your iOS device. Tap on the Enable button adjacent to the device on the list. This will allow audio to flow from your iPad to your computer and also allow MIDI to be sent to and from your iOS device to your laptop.

IDAM allows for a simple connection without additional hardware. If your needs are more advanced or you need to use the Lighting or USB-C port on your device for other functions, you can choose other ways to integrate with MIDI devices.

Changing Patches

You can easily change patches in MainStage using MIDI program changes. Program changes are used to communicate changes to how your instrument sounds. MIDI combines this with bank selects, permitting selection of thousands of options. Setting this up is a simple two-step process.

In MainStage, select a patch in from the Patch List while in Edit mode. Locate the Patch Settings panel in the lower center of the screen and choose the Attributes tab. Find the Program Change option and checkmark it. You can then use the controls on the right to set a number between 1 and 128. You can optionally choose a bank select using the field above program change.

In OnSong, you need to set the program change to the song. You can do this in text-based chord charts by tapping and holding on the title of the song to open the Section Mapping Menu. You can then tap on the + button in the lower right corner to add a MIDI event to be sent. Choose Program Change and then set the number to match when you typed in MainStage. Tap Done to save your changes and add the MIDI to the list. Now when you swipe to that song, the MIDI information is sent and MainStage will change to that patch.

Synchronizing Tempo

Patches can use tempo to change drum beats, arpeggios, and delay effects. When you're using a product like Sunday Sounds, you want to be able to dynamically adjust the tempo to keep with the band. OnSongs lets you easily keep track of your song's tempo which can be sent using MIDI Clock. It's just a two step process to set this up.

In MainStage, click on your concert at the top of the Patch List while in Edit mode. Next, locate the Concert Settings panel in the lower center of the screen. Click on the Timing tab and place a checkmark next to the Get Tempo from MIDI Input option. This will tell MainStage to listen to the MIDI clock to acquire tempo.

In OnSong, tap on the gear icon in the Menubar to open the Utilities Menu and then tap on Settings. Tap on MIDI Settings on the left and then locate the Sync section on the right. Turn on the MIDI clock option. Now when you switch songs, OnSong will adjust the MIDI clock to set the tempo in MainStage.

*Note: Use MIDI clock only on wired MIDI connection as wireless connections like Bluetooth and WiFi introduce latency that will cause the MIDI clock and tempo to shift.

Performance Pack

It's the little things that make a big difference when you're on stage. OnSong is more than a document reader for musicians. It has the features you need and the performance required for live music. Check out some of the features below that together make for a great experience.

Autoscroll

Once your music is digital, you no longer have to worry about turning pages! Autoscroll turns your device into a teleprompter-like experience to scroll down your song and even through your entire set. You just set a duration for the song and let it roll. Of course if you need finer control you can always use Timeline.

Flow

Once your song is autoscrolling, you may find that you want to repeat certain sections of the song. Instead of changing the song by copying and pasting, flow lets you dictate the arrangement or layout of the song. Just add a flow tag to repeat sections of your song and turn it on and off as needed.

Heads-Up Display

When you switch songs in OnSong, the menubar shows you the name of the song. While that's handy, it can do so much more. Just swipe to the left or right over the name of the song for different views of information you care about like sets, timers, or audio playback control.

Quick Pick

While many musicians pull their sets before stepping on the stage, you may want to take requests. The Quick Pick feature of OnSong lets you tap the name of the song in the menubar and immediately prompts you to start typing. Type a few letters of the song title or artist name and tap to add the song to your set list.

Messages

Communicating with the band can always be tricky and you make have developed hand signals or vocal inflections to try to guide your fellow musicians. OnSong lets you flash messages on each participant's screen with color and text to communicate effectively on stage. Combine with foot pedals or Timeline and never lift a finger.

Moments

Organizing your event is more than just songs. Moments lets you insert additional items on your set list to turn it into a run sheet for your event. You can even specify the amount of time for each song and moment to help you organize your event and keep everyone on track.

Pitch Pipe

If you're singing an a cappella piece, you may need a reminder of the pitches to sing. OnSong lets you assign an action to play the pitch. By default, this plays the notes of the song key, but you can customize the notes and octave of those notes for more advanced songs.

Timeline

With OnSong you can automate the entire song. Scroll the page, select sections for lyrics projection, trigger actions, or coordinate MIDI devices all in one timed sequence that's saved with the song.

Viewport

You may want to view a specific section of the song sheet. Zoom and position your song and then use the viewport feature to save the initial view for the song to be recalled when the song loads.

Song Reporting

OnSong can keep track of what you're performed, printed, and projected which can be useful for understanding your habits, as well as reporting to content licensing organizations.

OnSong keeps track of what you play in two different ways. By default, OnSong will keep track of what you play in sets. Because sets in OnSong automatically have a date and time associated with them, it means OnSong knows when you've last played those songs. You can also configure OnSong to report song by usage. This means if you view a song for more than a certain amount of time, it gets reported. You can change this preference in Song Reporting Settings.

To access this feature, go into the Utilities Menu by tapping on the gear icon in the Menubar and choose Editors and then choose Song Reporting. From there you can choose a timeframe to begin viewing your song usage in new ways.

Support

OnSong is a powerful app that is unlike anything else you may have used on a mobile device. Many musicians only use a fraction of its functionality. As you begin to invest time into OnSong, you'll likely want to get some extra help. Check out ways that you can find the help you need to make the most out of OnSong.

Knowledge Base

Get instant help with our vast knowledge base that has answers for nearly any question you may have.

User Manual

Browse the current user manual and learn how to do more with OnSong. Search for keywords and get answers.

Tutorial Videos

Access our comprehensive collection of tutorial videos to learn new tricks, or brush up your skills.

Technical Support

If you're just stuck and need OnSong to review your issue, you can submit your question directly in the app. Not only does this send your request directly to our support team, it also includes details about your library so we can pinpoint our advice to better serve you. You can access this by opening the Utilities Menu by tapping on the gear icon, and then choose Communicate and Get Support. If you are a Premium member, you get Premium Support that gives you immediately response times from when you fast track your request.

Premium

If you're serious about your stage performance, becoming a Premium members gets you direct access to OnSong staff and experts. Here are some ways that becoming an OnSong Premium member has its benefits.

Fast Track

Fast Track is just what it sounds like. You can take any support request and escalate it to receive the fastest possible response time from our technical support staff with automatic escalation. Your request gets bumped ahead of any other request in the queue and OnSong staff work together to resolve your concern.

OnSong Insiders

Being a paid OnSong Premium member also means you can join our private, exclusive Facebook group where OnSong experts, staff, and developers hang out. Join in the discussion!

Vertical Menubar

The menubar in OnSong is where you access all the functions of the app. Tapping icons in the menubar open popover menus which provide transient access for picking songs or changing the appearance of your charts. While this is good for most functions, it does result in those menus disappearing after each use.

The vertical menubar in OnSong lets you place the menubar down the left or right side of the screen. Tapping on options allows menus to appear from the screen edge. By pinning the menus, they can appear in a split-screen orientation, allowing the menu to remain visible while you interact with the song viewer.

You can turn on the Vertical Menubar mode for OnSong in Settings » Menu Settings » Menubar » Vertical Menubar.

AirDrop

AirDrop is an wireless file transfer protocol by Apple that works with newer iOS devices as well as Mac computers running OS X Yosemite that are from 2012 or later.

With AirDrop you can both import files from a computer or another iOS device as well as export just as easily. Use this to add songs to your library, create printouts when an AirPrint printer is not available, or to export your set list to a band member.

Drag and Drop

iOS 11 has changed the way we interact with our iPads with drag and drop. You can now drag and drop items within and between apps using intuitive gestures. Drag and drop is integrated throughout OnSong so you can use it to:

Import Songs

You can drag files of supported formats into the OnSong songs menu to add them to your library. Drag them into Books to create a new book or simply into All Songs to add them to your library. You can even drag them into a Set.

Reordering Items

Wherever you can reorder items in a list in OnSong, you can use Drag and Drop instead. Just tap and hold and then drag your items to where you like.

Organizing Your Library

You can also use drag and drop to organize your library. Drag songs into a book or set to find a new way to manage your repertoire.

Exporting Files

You can then drag and drop songs, sets, books and even your library into other apps such as the iOS 11 Files app as a faster, more intuitive way to export your content.

You can disable Drag and Drop within OnSong in Settings » Menu Settings » Use Drag and Drop Interface.

Drag and Drop is only available on iOS 11 or higher running on an iPad.

Flic

Many musicians have already discovered the flexibility of hands-free control of their iPads during practice and performance. OnSong now supports Flic – Bluetooth smart buttons Bluetooth that you can stick anywhere. Place Flic on the ends of your keyboard, or on the body of your guitar... anywhere you want to reach to trigger one of the may actions in OnSong.

Flic is configurable in the Foot Pedal Setup screen. You can assign one of more than 50 actions. Since Flic supports single click, double click and press and hold gestures, you can assign up to three different actions.

Google Drive

Google Drive is a popular cloud-based service for storing and editing your files and documents online. You can use Google Drive to transfer files between all of your devices no matter where you are. Save your PDF, Word, or text-based chord charts to a Google Drive folder and then import those files using OnSong. You can also export files to Dropbox to access from other devices like your computer.

When you sign up for a free Google Drive account you receive 15 gigabytes of storage. There are also subscription plans to expand your storage as your needs grow. In typical usage, 15 gigabytes of storage is plenty of space for using with OnSong.

Sign Up

To sign up for Google Drive, visit the Google Drive website.

Import

You can easily import files from Google Drive using the Google Drive import source. Sign in, browse your Google Drive and choose songs to import. It's that easy!

Export

Use the Share Menu to Export your songs and sets to different file formats. Just use the Location Picker to upload your files to Google Drive.

Sync

You can even synchronize your OnSong library to Google Drive, allowing you to use the same songs and sets on another device.

Multitasking

OnSong lets you make the most of an iPhone or iPad on stage. Watch these tutorial videos to learn more about ways you can use more than one app at a time to enhance your performance.

Run In Background

OnSong prevents the screen from sleeping while running so you can use your hands for playing music instead of trying to keep the iPad awake.

Typically apps shut down when you leave the app. OnSong is efficient on your battery, but will continue to play music even if you leave the app. You can also set OnSong to run in the background for more advanced tasks.

Multitasking

Newer iOS 9 devices like the iPad Pro can run more than one app at a time in split screen mode. Fully supports slide over and split screen multitasking simply by swiping your finger from the right side of the screen to the center.

OnSong also supports playing video tutorials with picture-in-picture so you can watch the video while you are using OnSong or other apps on your device.

Quick Pick

Even the best laid plans can go awry. Maybe you get a song requested that's not in your set list, or perhaps you show up to the gig late and need to pull songs as you go. No matter what the event, OnSong has you covered with the new Quick Pick feature.

Using Quick Pick

To access the Quick Pick screen, tap on the song title in the menubar when a song title is displayed. The search bar is then automatically selected and you can begin searching. Tap on the song to display it or add it as the next song.

Add To OnSong

As a musician, you use a variety of sources to find and organize your chord charts. OnSong provides a number of ways to import your music into your digital library that you can use without an Internet connection.

If you are running iOS 8, you can import chord charts from your favorite websites using the new Add To OnSong extension in Safari. When you find a song you like, tap on the action menu in the toolbar and choose the Add To OnSong option. The next time you open OnSong, the song will be added to your library.

Not only does the Add To OnSong extension let you import chord charts on common websites, but also lyrics and even files such as a PDF, Microsoft Word or audio tracks. This makes the Add To OnSong extension the most powerful tool in the OnSong toolkit.

Note: Be sure to read the Terms of Service of each website that you use to ensure that you are complying with the rules for using that content. OnSong will prompt you before each import to insure that you are aware of any agreement you've made between you and the content provider.

Autoscroll

As a musician, you put all of yourself into your music. Now let the music carry you with the hands-free operation of autoscroll. Autoscroll displays your chord chart from top to bottom like a teleprompter. All you need to do is to get the song started and autoscroll will take care of the rest.

Setup

The setup for autoscroll is really easy. Tap on the autoscroll button in the live bar to set a duration for the song for linear autoscrolling from the top to the bottom of the page. You can even configure non-linear autoscrolling using Timeline.

Once configured, tap to start autoscroll. OnSong scrolls the song from the top to the bottom in the amount of time you set or plays back recorded timeline events. Tap and hold the autoscroll button to set a different duration or timeline events for the song. See Live Bar Autoscroll for details.

Flow

OnSong scrolls through your song vertically like a scroll. Songs are typically arranged based on different sections like verses and choruses. You can use Flow to arrange your song in the order that you will perform it. Add instrumentals, intros, verses, choruses, and bridges. When OnSong scrolls from the top to the bottom, it will display the entirety of your song.

You can configure the flow of the song in the Playback Menu or in the Metadata Editor found in the Song Editor.

Triggers

Start autoscroll by tapping on the screen, or with a supported foot pedal for completely touch-free operation. Since autoscroll is the action you normally take to start a song, you can even set up additional actions to occur at the same time autoscroll starts. Configure this in Settings Navigation Settings Triggers Autoscroll Trigger.

Backing Tracks

OnSong is not only great at displaying chord charts and music, but it can also be used in place of heavy and expensive stage equipment. This can make moving from one gig to another much easier, as well as making shows run smoother than they ever have before.

Backing tracks can be linked to each of your chord charts allowing you to play a song in an instant. Just tap or tap and hold on the Audio Live Bar Button to link or toggle audio playback. Use the Playback Menu to perform more advanced functions. You can even configure audio playback to crossfade between two playing tracks in Settings Live Settings Live Bar Audio.

OnSong links to tracks that are available in the Music app of your iOS device or you can manage audio tracks inside of OnSong.

iTunes Music Library

You can use iTunes technologies to transfer music and media to your device. That advantage to this is you get the full playback abilities of the built-in Music player and tracks are shared between apps. You can also playback tracks that are stored in the cloud. Learn more about linking to tracks your iTunes Music Library

Here are a few methods you can use to get music into your iTunes music library:

  • iTunes Sync is the standard way to move music files from your computer to device.
  • iTunes in the Cloud accesses iTunes tracks you have purchased on your device and allows you to play them from the cloud or download them to the device.
  • iTunes Music Match is similar to iTunes in the Cloud but allows you to submit your entire music library to iCloud for a low yearly fee. This allows all your content to be transferred to your iOS device without connecting to a computer.

Note: It's a common misconception that only music tracks that are purchased through the iTunes Music Store can be played on an iOS device. Learn more on Adding Music Tracks to iTunes.

OnSong Audio Media Library

If you don't prefer to use iTunes to manage your music, you can import backing tracks directly into your OnSong media library and manage them inside of the app. This is a great option if you don't have access to a laptop for synchronizing content.

You can learn more about importing, managing and linking to tracks in your OnSong Media Library

Importing into iTunes

iTunes is a powerful media management program that is available for free from Apple. It is also used to manage your iOS device as well. You can use iTunes to browse and purchase music and other media from the iTunes Store, or simply use it as a media management device.

If you have tracks that you want to add as Backing Tracks in OnSong, you'll need to make sure they are in your computer's iTunes library before synchronizing them to your device, using iTunes in the Cloud, or iTunes Music Match.

To add tracks to iTunes, locate them on your computer, select in the Finder (Mac OS X) or File Explorer (Windows) and drag and drop them in the library area of iTunes. You can also do the same thing by opening the File option in the menubar and choosing Add To Library.... From here you can browse your files and select those that you want to add to iTunes.

iTunes will typically copy these files into its own library and organize the files based on the information available in the audio track file. You can change these settings by opening iTunes Preferences and selecting the Advanced tab.

iTunes Sync

While millions of people own iPads or iPhones, not everyone knows how to get their music on their device. Follow these steps to get music synced to the device using the USB cable.

  1. Connect the device to a computer using the USB sync/charge cable that came to the device. Ensure that the computer has iTunes 12 installed and running.
  2. In iTunes, click on the Device Icon in the bar just below the volume slider and choose your device if more than one is listed.
  3. Tap on the Music option under settings. This is where you tell iTunes what music you would like to sync to the device.
  4. You will need to turn on music syncing by clicking to checkmark Sync Music.
  5. Use the other checkmarks below to determine what music to send to the device. For instance, you can sync Entire music library or only Selected playlists, artists, albums and genres.
  6. If you picked the latter, place a checkmark next to what you would like to sync to the device.
  7. When you are finished, click on the Apply button in the lower left to start copying the music over.
  8. Check that the music is on the device by launching the Music app from the home screen.

iTunes in the Cloud

If you only have to access music tracks that you've purchased from the iTunes music store, you can access those files on your device without synchronizing with a computer.

To do this, open the Settings app from your device's home screen. Select the iTunes & App Store section on the left. On the right side, turn on the Music switch under the Show All section. This will display songs in your Music library that are not actually stored on your device.

These songs are streamed from iCloud when they are played. This requires an Internet connection for playback and is not recommended for live use. To download songs to your device, find them in the Music app on your device and then tap on the cloud download icon.

Note: iTunes in the Cloud can only display music that was purchased through the iTunes Music Store. To access any music track on your computer in the same manner, you will need to use iTunes Music Match. This will allow any track in your iTunes library to be synchronized with all of your devices.

iTunes Music Match

If you need to access any track on your computer and do not want to manually synchronize with iTunes, you can opt to use iTunes Music Match.

iTunes Music Match is an optional service that costs $24.99 USD per year. When enabled in iTunes on your computer, all your audio tracks are uploaded to iCloud in a way that makes them available on any device you own. This allows you to access all tracks such as those:

  • Purchased on iTunes
  • Downloaded from other online services
  • Ripped from CD
  • Created by you

You can learn more about setting up and enabling this service on the iTunes Music Match web site.

To enable Music Match on your device, open the Settings app from your device's home screen. Select the iTunes & App Store section on the left. On the right side, turn on the Music switch under the Show All section as well as the iTunes Match switch. This will display all the songs on your computer in your device's Music library.

These songs are streamed from iCloud when they are played. This requires an Internet connection for playback and is not recommended for live use. To download songs to your device, find them in the Music app on your device and then tap on the cloud download icon.

Backup

One great advantage with OnSong is that your OnSong library is stored directly on your device. This means you never need to worry if you have an Internet connection to access your music. Whether you are playing in a pub on the outskirts of town, a busy concert hall with lots of wireless interference, or as a missionary in the jungles of the Philippines, OnSong will continue to work non-stop.

Why Backup?

While having everything stored on the device itself a great feature, it does have some downsides. We hear all too often of users who have had their iPads stolen or lost. Sometimes they just forgot their device on the roof of the tour van and picked up the pieces on the highway. Yet others find their app missing when deleted by children or when wiping their iPad for a new operating system. The crucial step you need to take is to make a backup!

How To Backup

Creating a backup in OnSong is really easy. First, we recommend backing up your library to Dropbox to make sure your content is stored safely off your device. In addition, if anything happens to your device, you can easily restore your library from your Dropbox with an Internet connection and your Dropbox credentials. Go to the Dropbox section to learn how to sign up for Dropbox and use it in OnSong.

Next, go into the Share Menu from the Menubar in OnSong. Tap on the Export option. In this screen, place a checkmark next to the OnSong Backup format. Tap on the folder icon in the lower right to open the Location Picker and choose Dropbox. From there you can select a location where the backup file should be stored. Once you choose a location, tap on the Export button at the top of the export screen to create the backup file and upload the file to your Dropbox location.

What's In a Backup?

The backup file that is created has a .backup file extension and the file name is the current date and time in YYYYMMDDHHMMSS format. This allows no two backup files to have the same name.

The backup file is actual a ZIP archive that contains the entire contents of your OnSong library folder. In addition to containing the OnSong database called OnSong.sqlite3 and imported files, this also contains your imported media files (music and images), help files, and a special preferences file that contains all the settings you had made in the app.

How To Restore

So now that you have the file in a safe place, let's learn how we can restore the backup file. It's as easy as importing a file into OnSong.

Go into the Songs Menu and select the All Songs tab. Tap on the + button on the bottom right to view the Add Songs screen. Tap on the Dropbox option. From here you can browse for your backup file and import it.

When you select the backup file to restore, you will be prompted that importing it will completely overwrite any other songs or settings you have in the current library. If you agree, the file will be downloaded and restored, returning your OnSong library to it's original state.

Note: Backup files are the ZIP-compressed contents of the OnSong library directory. OnSong can create backup files of approximately 4 GB in size.

Books

Most musicians we talk to are involved in more than one band or team. Sometimes it's hard to keep things straight like which songs you play with your friends when jamming and then ones you practice in the garage with the band. You may also play in church on Sunday morning and really don't want to accidental pick Stairway to Heaven to start off your worship set.

OnSong is designed to help you stay organized and one of the best tools for that job is called books. Books place your songs into various collections allowing you to focus on one set of songs at a time. Even when you are picking sets those books help you use just the right songs for the event you are playing.

To create books, open the Songs Menu and tap on the Books Button in the upper left corner when you have the All Songs tab selected. From here, you can create books, add songs to books, and more.

Of course you can always view your entire library at one glance by choosing to view All Songs. For those of you who like everything to be in its place, you can also view Unbound Songs to see songs that have not been added to a book yet.

When you are Pulling Songs for a set, OnSong will first prompt you to pick a book to limit the songs that you are picking. Pretty handy right?

Capo

If you're a guitarist, you know the advantages to using a capo. You can increase the pitch of your guitar to provide dynamics between other instruments, or simply transpose out of difficult to play keys like D-flat. Whatever your reason, OnSong can adapt the chord chart to meet your needs. Let's take a look at how OnSong handles capo in regard to transposition.

Difficult Keys

OnSong is designed to maintain the designated key of a song at all costs. This is important to know because changing the capo of the song will not transpose the song. Instead, it combines the transposition with the capo itself. Let's take a song written in D-flat as an example.

  1. You have a song that is written in D-flat because your pianist is fancy like that.
  2. You want to be able to play the song, but sadly you don't have fingers like E.T.
  3. Figuring you can play the song with C chord forms instead, you apply a capo to your guitar on the first fret.
  4. In OnSong, you simply slide the capo slider in the Style Preferences Menu to the first fret so it knows where you put your capo.
  5. OnSong now maintains the key of D-flat, but displays chords in the key of C so you can play along with everyone else.

In this case, we didn't transpose the song at all, but just wanted to be able to play the song in the key that it is written. OnSong modulates the chords in the song down to maintain the key - essentially reversing the transposition that the capo applies.

Transposing With Capo

What if we want to use the capo slider to transpose the slider? What you'll need to do is adjust the key and the capo. Lets say that you have a song in the key of C and want to transpose to D. With a capo, you'd place the capo on the second fret. In OnSong, adjust the capo from zero to the 2 position and then drag the transpose slider to the D key.

This underscores that transposition in OnSong is one step, and then capo is applied on top of that transposition. The order of operations are:

  1. The song is written and declared in a specific key.
  2. If the song's key is not declared, the key is determined using another detection method
  3. Tranposition is then applied to the original key. If the original key was the key of A and we want to play the song in the key of D, OnSong would transpose up by five (5) half steps to bring the song to the key of D.
  4. Now when we want to play with a capo so we can play in the key of C. Set the capo to 2. OnSong then modulates the chords that are rendered down two (2) half steps to the key of C.

Toggling Capo

You can also toggle the capo on and off in the Style Preferences Menu using the power button. This is useful for playing with or without a capo as your needs arise.

Learning to Share

Since OnSong changes the chords that appear on the screen when capo is applied, sharing with others may be more difficult. What if you both need to use the same chord chart? In this case, you can display both chords.

To enable dual capo chord mode, go into Settings Display Settings Song Formatting Capo Display Dual Chords. This can be configured to display either the capoed or non-capoed chord first with the other chord being displayed in parenthesis.

Chords

Chords are the lifeblood of music. It's no wonder that most of OnSong revolves around what you can do with chords.

Writing Music

You can write and edit music right inside of OnSong. OnSong understands both the OnSong and ChordPro formats, and even works with most text files too. You can also use different ways to display chords and lyrics in your song.

Styling Chords

Once chords are detected in OnSong, you can use the style preferences menu found in the menubar to change how chords appear. Highlight, color, bold, and italicize them to make them pop from the page.

Instrument Diagrams

Tap on a chord in the song viewer to view different ways to play the chord on a variety of instruments. You can even make your own variations in the chord diagram library.

Playing Chords

Tap on the speaker icon in the upper left corner to toggle chord playback on and off. Playback does require a sound bank to be installed. You can purchase sound banks in the Add-Ons Screen. You can alter the way chords are played under the Utilities Menu Settings Live Settings Chord Playback.

Chromecast

Engaging your listeners is an important part of your musicianship. For houses of worship, this means having the ability to project lyrics for congregational singing. Most churches invest in separate computers, wiring and expensive software that requires a volunteer to operate. This means more time spent planning services and checking lyrics. But what if you can skip expensive software and hardware upgrades and display lyrics right from the stage inexpensively and wirelessly?

OnSong has a powerful lyrics projection feature with composite images and motion backgrounds. With the new scenes feature, you can even dynamically style lyrics projection and lighting for each song or section of a song. Simply connect your device to an HDTV or projector with a wired adapter, AppleTV, and now with Google Chromecast. So no matter where your projector or TV is located, you can run lyrics without any additional wiring.

Chromecast can only be used to project lyrics. It cannot be used to show chords and lyrics in stage monitor mode.

Color Picker

Color is used throughout OnSong to quickly communicate musical information. In each of these places, OnSong uses a color picker component that lets you pick from a palette of colors by tapping on a swatch. You can also create your own color swatches and arrange them in the palette.

Picking Colors

To pick a color you tap on it. OnSong surrounds the swatch with a border to indicate it has been selected. Since the size of the color picker may be limited, you can scroll to additional colors. Swipe to the left or right to access additional color swatches.

Adding Colors

At the end of the color picker palette is a button you can tap to add new colors. This will open the color builder screen that lets you choose the hue, brightness, saturation and opacity of the new color.

Editing Colors

You can also edit existing colors in your palette by double tapping on them. This will open the color builder screen which you can use to make adjustments to the color.

Arranging Colors

The color picker is designed to provide quick access to more commonly used colors. You will want to place these towards the left in your palette for faster access. To do this, tap and hold on a color swatch for about one second and then drag the color to a new location in the color picker.

Deleting Colors

To remove a color from the palette, tap and hold on the swatch as if you were going to place it elsewhere in the palette. Drag the color off of the palette to remove it.

Color Builder

The color builder is used for creating new colors as well as editing existing ones. In addition, smaller form factor devices like the iPhone or iPod touch may use the color builder directly to create or pick colors from the palette.

*When you're done picking or building a color, tap on the Done button in the upper right corner to save your changes.

The color builder is divided into these five functional areas.

Saturation/Brightness Picker

The main area of the color builder is comprised for the saturation/brightness picker. The values displayed in this two-dimensional space vary the saturation of the color horizontally and the brightness of the color vertically. Tap or drag your finger in this space to adjust these attributes based on the selected hue.

Hue Picker

The hue picker appears under the saturation/brightness picker and allows you to choose a hue. This appears as a one-dimensional slider that moves from 0-360 from red, through the rainbow and back to red.

Opacity Picker

The color picker can also specify opacity in a color. AN example of where this is used is for chord highlighting. In this case, all colors run about 50% opacity. Using the opacity picker, you can vary the transparency of the of the final color.

Tap or drag your finger up and down to move between 0-100% opacity. All of these changes effect the add swatch button in the lower right corner.

Add Swatch Button

As you make changes to the hue, saturation, brightness and opacity, the color changes appear within the builder. Most notably, it appears in an add color button in the lower right corner. You can tap this button to add the selected color to the palette.

Color Picker

The color picker for the edited palette appears below all other controls. This lets you quickly choose a preset color from the palette to edit, or you can add and arrange your palette from the builder.

Console

OnSong Console is a powerful in-app purchase that lets you edit your library on any computer using a standard, modern web browser. You get a real-time preview of your chord chart along with palettes that help you make your chord charts just right. When you're all done, one click saves the chord chart back to your library.

Most people agree that laptops or desktops are great at creating content. OnSong Console lets you use your computer to quickly make changes to your OnSong library. What's more, you can even make changes to an iPad while it's being used on the stage, or use it in the back-of-house to determine lyrics for a song.

FAQ

While OnSong Console is easy to use, you may have questions about connecting to it on your network or how it effects your OnSong library as well.

Requirements

Find out the components and services you need to make console work.

Setup

Learn how to get OnSong Console up and running so it's ready to be put to good use.

User Interface

Learn the user interface components of Console and how they can be combined to make music creation and management easy.

Frequently Asked Questions

Here are some questions that you may have before purchasing, or when using OnSong Console.

Does Console work on Windows or just Mac?
OnSong Console works on both Windows and Mac, and most likely Linux too. It just requires a modern web browser that supports the HTML 5 and CSS 3 web standards.
Do I need to purchase Console for every device I own?
No. As long as you are using the same Apple ID to access the App Store, you only need to pay once. The price may appear and you may be prompted to purchase again. This is part of the iTunes in-app purchase process. Once you sign in with your Apple ID, you will be able to enable Console for free on that device.
My computer is wired to my network, but my iPad is wireless. Will Console still work?
Yes. As long as both devices are on the same computer network, a wired connection or wireless shouldn't matter.
Both my devices are on the same network but I only get a blank screen in my web browser. Why?
OnSong Console works by turning your iPad or iPhone into a mini web server which may not be appreciated by some networks. Please try the following if you are having trouble connecting to Console:
  1. Ensure that your iPad or iPhone is on and OnSong is running. Console requires OnSong to be running in order to communicate.
  2. Disable and enable Console from the Console screen in the Utilities menu, or restart your iPad. In some cases, the web address that is shown may not be correct, especially when switching between networks.
  3. Make sure you are typing in the web address correctly. You must add the http:// before the four-part number called an IP address, and include the colon with the port number (5076).
  4. Some corporate networks do not permit other services to be running. Check with your IT staff to see if you are allowed to run console in that environment. OnSong Console operates on ports 5076 and 5077. Some networks may block traffic on these ports. Log into your router and be sure to allow these ports to be active on the network. Some corporate networks do not permit other services to be running. Check with your IT staff to see if you are allowed to run console in that environment.
  5. If you are running a firewall on the computer, temporarily disable it to make sure that it is not inhibiting traffic.
  6. Try a different network to see if that helps resolved the issue.
Can I use my iPhone or iPad hotspot connection instead of a WiFi access point to use Console?
Yes. Turn on the hotspot in your device's Settings screen and use the WiFi option. Bluetooth or USB will not work. Connect your computer to the hotspot network, and connect your device if it is not already the hotspot. Keep in mind that some carrier may charge you for hotspot connectivity.
My Console screen is telling me to type in 127.0.0.1:5076 and it doesn't work. Any ideas?
127.0.0.1 is essentially the iPad or iPhone referring to itself and is caused by the network IP address not being able to be resolved. Go into the Console screen and disable and enable the console again to see if that refreshes to a different web address. You can also go into the Share menu Connect Servers and use the IP address found under your device's name.
What web browsers does Console work with?
OnSong Console is an HTML 5, web-based application. This means that it works on modern web browsers such as the latest versions of Chrome, Safari, Firefox and Internet Explorer. Different browsers have their quirks and we are continuing to refine around these. Older versions of Internet Explorer will definitely have some issues.
I'm getting just the opening screen with the OnSong logo and it gets stuck. Why?
OnSong Console requires Javascript to be enabled in order to communicate with your device. Make sure that Javascript is enabled in your web browser's preferences and that no additional security plugins are preventing Javascript from operating.

Requirements

One advantage to how Console works is that no connection to the public Internet is required. OnSong Console runs directly on your device and uses WiFi to wirelessly connect to your computer. Though this is a great advantage, there are times where you still may run into some issues. Here are some requirements for using OnSong Console.

Any iOS device running OnSong 1.989
OnSong Console was first added to OnSong in version 1.989. This means that you will need to be running the latest version of OnSong to have the ability to run Console. Because Console turns your device into a web site, you will need to have your device turned on and OnSong running in order to connect.
Desktop or laptop computer
The idea with OnSong Console is to allow you to connect to the library on your device from a full size computer such as a desktop-class workstation or laptop. While these machines don't need to be overly powerful, we do recommend a modern operating system capable of running the latest web browsers. Your computer can run Windows, Mac OS X or Linux as long as it's running a supported web browser.
Connection to a local area network
You typically connect your iPad or iPhone to a WiFi network to access the Internet, or to access other resources at your location such as network printers or Smart TVs. OnSong Console is no different. The connection between your device and your computer is created because both devices are attached to the same network. Your computer can be connected to this network with a wire, or wirelessly. The requirement is that they are on the network with the same name. Your iPad or iPhone connect to the network and are assigned a unique IP Address. Think of this as a phone number that other devices use to call your device.
Network use of custom ports
This one is a little more technical but pretty easy to explain. Each device on your network can be contacted through different ports. Ports are like extensions for a phone number. You may call the main business's phone number and then can choose who your want to speak with. OnSong uses ports 5076 and 5077 to communicate with your computer. If you have trouble connecting to Console, this requirement is the most likely cause. Some network security measures like firewalls and routers with policies may block these ports or make it difficult to get through. Kind of like a cranky receptionist meets Rambo. Please refer to the Troubleshooting Guide for help.
HTML5-compatible web browser
OnSong Connect should work with most web browsers that are in use today. Inevitably there are some who may have older versions of web browsers that do not support the web standard required to use OnSong Console. We recommend that you use a current version of one of these browsers, in order of best experience:
  • Apple Safari v7.x
  • Google Chrome v37.x
  • Mozilla Firefox v31.x
  • Internet Explorer v11.x
Javascript-enabled browsing
OnSong Console is an advanced web application that requires Javascript to operate. Make sure that you do not have Javascript disabled as that will cause Console to not start up.

Setup

OnSong Console is a web-based application that runs in a web browser. It is powered by OnSong running on an iPad, iPhone, or iPod touch. This section will cover running Console and what you need to know to get up and running.

Preparing the Network

To get started, make sure both your iPad or iPhone are on the same network as your computer. This can be any name. OnSong does not set up it's own WiFi network like other devices. Instead, just make sure that you are connected to the same network as your desktop or laptop computer where you plan to use console.

Enabling Console

To enable console, open OnSong on your iPad or iPhone and choose the Utilities menu in the menubar. On and iPad, this is located by tapping on the gear icon in the upper-right corner. On an iPhone or iPod touch, this can be accessed when viewing a song. The gear icon will appear in the upper right corner of the screen.

Next, tap on the Console option in the menu. This will open the Console screen with text that explains what Console is, along with the video tutorial. You will notice an "Enable Console" button in the lower center of the screen as well as a potential price in the upper right corner. Tap on the "Enable Console" button or the price to purchase Console. Console is $9.99 USD. Once purchased, the console will be enabled. If you've already purchased Console previously, simply ensure that the console is enabled by tapping "Enable Console".

After a moment, a web address will appear under the enable/disable button. You will want to enter this web address into your web browser in order to load the Console web application. Remember to type in every part of this web address so your computer "calls" the right person... so to speak. If all is successful, you will get a splash screen containing an OnSong logo.

Granting Access

You don't want just anyone peering in on your music library. OnSong maintains a list of who may connect to your device. You'll notice a message below the logo in Console that says "allow access to this browser on the host device to connect". At the same time, you will notice an alert appear within OnSong on your device. Agree to this prompt within 30 seconds to add the device to the whitelist of allowed devices for use with OnSong Connect.

OnSong Console generates a random identifier to identify itself to OnSong. It then stores that identifier as a cookie in your web browser. That means as long as you don't use a different OnSong library, clear your cookies or use a different web browser or computer, you can continue to use that device indefinitely without needing to approve the connection each time.

If you choose to not accept the connection, OnSong will inform the web browser running Console so that it stops trying to connect. This will render OnSong incapable of accepting new connections for 5 seconds. After this time, OnSong will listen for new incoming requests to connect.

Troubleshooting

While connecting to Console should be easy, you may experience difficulty. This is because Console relies on your network setup and computer configuration, which may inadvertently be blocking access to the service running on the device. The following are things to check to resolve most of these issues:

Check your web address
Believe it or not, one of the most common issues is that the web address that was entered into the web browser is either not correct or incomplete. Be sure to type the full web address that appears in the Console screen in OnSong. The web address must start with "http://", contain four numbers separated by periods, and end with ":5076", which is the port.

If Console was working and you've connected to another network, such as traveling from work or church to your home, then you may need to check for an updated web address. This is because as your device connects to new networks, it is assigned a different IP address. OnSong 1.99 automatically switches the IP address as the networks change, but you will need to make sure you are using the most current web address as displayed in the console screen.

If you bookmark the web address, it is likely to not work in the future. This is because your network may assign a new IP address to your device in the future. Some networks will attempt to reuse the same IP address for the same device, but may need to assign a new one if there is a conflict.

Check your network
Make sure that both your computer and iOS device are connected to the same local area network. OnSong does requires a common WiFi connection to communicate between the devices.

More advanced network connections or public networks may have restrictions to prevent users from abusing the service or to maintain the user's privacy. If you are at a public location and having trouble using OnSong Connect, you may want to try a different network to see if the problem persists.

If you don't have a WiFi network available, you can also set up your iPad or iPhone to be a cellular hotspot if it has cellular capability. Remember that OnSong Console does not use the Internet, so you shouldn't receive any usage for enabling Console while connected to a cellular hotspot.

Check your firewall
One of the most common issues in connecting to Console is a computer firewall that denies access to resources in order to protect itself from possible security issues. If you are having trouble connecting to Console for the first time, go into your computer's firewall settings and temporarily disable the firewall. You can then determine if that is the issue. If this enables Console to work, be sure to grant ports 5076 and 5077 access.
Check your web browser
Console works on all modern web browsers that support the HTML5 standard and Canvas tag. You may have an older browser that won't work correctly with Console. If you are unsure, we recommend downloading and installing Google Chrome. This browser is updated often and supports all the standards required to run OnSong Console.

Disabling Console

While there's no pressing need to disable the Console, there are a few reason why you should. First, you probably don't want just anyone attempting to connect to your device. It would require them to be on the same local network as you and have the ability to guess or scan for your OnSong device, but it is possible. Turning the Console off will prevent them from connecting to you.

While very small, OnSong Console does use a few extra resources while running. On stage, a little extra battery life and performance can go a long way. That's just another reason to turn it off if you're not using it.

To disable Console, open the Console screen and tap on the button again to Disable Console. After a moment, the button will change back to Enable Console and the web address will be removed.

User Interface

Once you've loaded Console into a web browser, you're ready to get to work. Console let's you import or create songs as well as edit the songs you already have in your OnSong library on the device. This is accomplished by selecting a song, making changes in the editor, viewing in the real-time preview screen, and then saving. Let's take a look at the different areas of the Console's interface to help with each of these tasks.

Header

The top is the header which contains the OnSong logo. To the left of the logo is the name of the current song. If you have made changes to the save, a save button will appear to the right of the song title allowing you to save changes back to your OnSong library on the device. Finally, the help link is located on the far right and provides access to this web site.

Palettes

Palettes are floating windows that can be placed around the user interface. These palettes can be opened and closed using the menubar of the following panes.

Song List

The song list is displayed on the left and contains all the songs in your library. To view and edit a song, just select it from the list. This area also contains a search bar to search songs in your library as well as an add button to create new songs or import existing songs from your computer. Tapping on the + button displays the Add Songs Palette.

Song Editor

The song editor appears in the center of the screen and provides a text editor for making changes to your song. The toolbar items give you access to tools for managing your content such as the metadata, insert and text tools palettes, as well toolbars to convert text and delete the song.

Song Preview

The song preview pane displays the chord chart on the right side and is updated as it is updated in the song editor. The toolbar items allow you to turn certain features on and off such as Low Light mode, Pages mode, and follow mode. The toolbar also gives you access to additional palettes including style palette (to make changes to the look of the song) and chords palette (to transpose and capo). Lastly, you can toggle between the text and imported files with the view as menu, or export and print using the export menu and print button.

Header

The header portion of the console interface appears at the top of the browser window. This contains the following elements:

OnSong Logo

The OnSong logo appears on the left side of the header to visually reinforce the web app. In addition, this logo's glow will pulse subtly when network operations are occurring.

Song Title

The song title appears prominently and changes as you select a different song in the Song List.

Save Button

The save button will appear once you've made a change in the Song Editor or in one of the palettes.

Lyrics Projection Button

Tapping on the lyrics projection button will open a new window suitable for running lyrics projection from within a web browser on a remote machine.

Help Link

This will link to the Console help web page on the OnSong web site.

Lyrics Projection

Tapping on the lyrics projection button in the Console will open a new window that displays the configured background and lyrics. This allows you to display lyrics from a remote computer and operate it with OnSong running on an iOS device, or through the console if the leading is enabled.

Full Screen Mode

Drag the window to the external screen you'd like to target and click in the body of the window. This will cause the window to enter full screen mode. You can then press ESC on the keyboard to exit full screen mode. Keep in mind that full screen mode acts differently depending on your browser and platform.

Navigation

When the lyrics window is enabled, you can use the arrow keys on the keyboard to move between sections.

Background and Styles

Currently all changes to the look of the lyrics projection must be performed through the External Video Menu from inside the host device.

Palettes

Palettes provide the means to interact with songs and are similar to menus in the OnSong app for iOS. These palettes are opened by toggling buttons in the toolbars of the various panes in the application. Once opened, you can close and minimize the palette using the buttons in the upper-right corner of the palette titlebar.

Here is a list of all the palettes used in Console:

Add Songs Palette

The add songs palette is opened in the Song List pane and is used to create new songs or import files.

Metadata Palette

Provides fields that can be set to write the metadata of each song in the proper format. This is similar in function to the Metadata Editor found in the Song Editor.

Insert Palette

Provides buttons to insert chords and sections, as well as line formatting characters without needing to know the OnSong file format codes.

Text Tools Palette

Provides tools like search and replace, as well as the ability to toggle between chord formats similar to the Text Tools Menu in the Song Editor.

Style Palette

Enables you to customize the look of the song in a way similar to the Style Preferences Menu.

Chords Palette

Gives you options for transposing and capoing chords, as well as controlling how chords and diagrams appear on the screen. This is similar to the bottom of the Style Preferences Menu.

Add Songs Palette

The add songs palette is used to either create a new song completely within the Console, or to upload Supported Files to create songs.

Create New

This section of the palette allows you to type an optional song title and artist name. You can then click on one of the buttons to create the song and open it in the Song Editor.

Import Files

This area of the palette allows you to import one or more files at once into OnSong. Click on the Select files... button to open a file chooser window. Browse and select a file to import. Use the shift, command and control keys on your keyboard to select more than one file to import.

When you are all done, click on the Choose button in the window. Console will automatically upload and import those files into your library and show you the import status below the Select files... button. You can then close the palette to continue editing.

Chords Palette

The chords palette provides tools for changing how chords appear in the chord chart. This affects both transposition, appearance, and chord diagrams.

Style

Typically chord charts use alphabetic characters to define chords. OnSong can convert alphabetic chords into numeric ones to better suit musicians that play using a number system. The selected style is highlighted. Choose from one of the following chord styles:

  • Alphabet uses letters A-G with sharps and flats to indicate precisely what chord should be played. If using different chord localizations, this may also include an H. Default.
  • Nashville uses a decimal numbering system which indicates the chord number based on the root chord of the key. In addition, this method uses symbols for different chord variations.
  • Roman uses upper and lowercase Roman numerals for chords. Major chords are represented in uppercase while minor chords are lowercase. Symbols are also used to indicate different modes such as a minus symbol for minor.
  • Italian uses do, re, mi, fa, so, la, ti, do instead of numbers. Symbols are used to indicate different modes such as a minus for minor.

Transpose

Use this slider to transpose the song to any key. The key of C is placed on the far left and the key of Cb is on the far right. You can use the arrow keys to make fine-tune adjustments the key you would like to pick.

The power icon on the right turns transposition on and off. If turned off, and if no capo is applied, then no transposition is performed. This will display chords just as they appear in the Song Editor.

Capo

This slider allows you to apply a capo to the song. Slide from 0 to 11. This will modulate the chords of the song down to maintain the key of the song when a capo is applied. You can change the direction of this modulation in Settings Display Settings Song Formatting Capo Capo Modulates

You can turn the application of the capo on and off using the power icon on the right side. This allows you to maintain a capo and determine if you want to apply it or not depending on the instrument you are playing.

Diagrams

This section of the chords palette is used to toggle the chord diagram display on and off. Use the slider to adjust how many diagrams appear across the page. You can select a number between 4 and 10. Use the power icon on the right to toggle the visibility of chord diagrams on and off.

You can change how and where chord diagram appear in Settings Display Settings Song Formatting Chord Diagrams.

Instrument

This section allows you to select the instrument to use when displaying chords. The selected instrument is highlighted. Choose a different instrument to have the chord diagrams change to the selected instrument.

Note: Making changes in this palette does not affect the song content but is applied in addition to the original song.

Insert Palette

The insert palette is used to insert chords, line formatting, and section labels into a song. Position the text cursor where you would like to insert chords or on the line where you'd like to apply line formatting.

Chords

As you write new chords in the text editor, they will appear here. Position the text cursor where you would like to insert the chord and then click on a button to insert the chord in that location. Position of the cursor differs for each chord format:

  • Bracketed Chords requires the cursor to be placed within lyrics where you would like the chord to be played.
  • Chords Over Lyrics requires the cursor to be placed above lyrics and positioned above lyrics using spaces.

Font Style

Click on a color to insert color codes at the front of the line. You can also toggle the bold and italic buttons to insert those line formatting codes as well.

Highlighting

Click on a color to add highlighting line formatting code to the front of the line. The white option will remove the code.

Labels

Common section labels appear in this section. Tap on one to name the current section.

Metadata Palette

The metadata palette automatically updates its fields as you select songs in the Song List. Change the contents of the fields to have OnSong update the metadata section of your song. This palette includes these fields:

Song Title

The title of the song.

Artist

The name of the artist or the byline to output under the song title.

Number

A number used to lookup the song in numbered music collections like hymnals.

Keywords

Keywords or topics to enter for the song. This is used in the By Topic tab in the Songs Menu.

Key

This sets the key of the song. If the key had been already set and there are chords in the song, this will also rewrite the chords of the song into that key.

You can also change the mode of the key to minor by clicking on the "m" button on the right side. The song contents are not rewriting when toggling between major and minor keys.

Capo

Sets the recommended capo level for the song.

Tempo

Set the tempo using this slider. Remember that you can click on the arrows to the left and right of the sliders to fine-tune adjust the values.

Time Signature

Click on a button that represents the time signature of the song to be written in the metadata section. If you do not want a time signature outputted, click on a selected time signature again to remove it. If the time signature you need is not in the list, congratulations on your rhythmic genius. Because of your skills, you'll just need to write the time signature yourself.

Duration

This is the time duration of the song. Set this to a default to enable autoscrolling with the approximate speed. This can be expressed as hh:mm:ss or numeric seconds.

Flow

This is the flow of the song used to arrange the parts of the song into a top-down fashion. Please see Flow for more details.

Copyright

This is the copyright line of the music. This will appear at the bottom of chord charts as well as in lyrics projection.

CCLI Song

This is the unique identifier for registering the song with CCLI SongSelect reporting. This will appear at the bottom of the chord chart on screen as well as at the bottom of lyrics projection.

Restrictions

These are a list of restrictions that are used to limit what recipients of the song can do with it. Please see Restrictions for a list of possible options.

Style Palette

The style palette is used to change the way the chord chart looks in the Song Preview Pane. Use this to change the font, size, visibility, and color of different parts of the chord chart.

Font

This section contains toggle buttons that allow you to choose the typeface in which your chord chart should appear. Press the font button to make a change. The current font selection is highlighted.

Title

This slider allows you to the change the size and visibility of the title of the song. Slide to the left or right to decrease or increase the font size. The point size of the font is displayed as you adjust this. You can also click on the arrow buttons to the left and right to fine-tune adjust the amount. Tap on the power icon on the right to toggle visibility of the title on and off.

Metadata

This slider allows you to the change the size and visibility of metadata of the song. This includes the artist name, key, capo, tempo, and time signature.

Slide to the left or right to decrease or increase the font size. The point size of the font is displayed as you adjust this. You can also click on the arrow buttons to the left and right to fine-tune adjust the amount. Tap on the power icon on the right to toggle visibility of metadata on and off.

Lyrics

This slider allows you to the change the size and visibility lyrics in the song. Lyrics comprise all content in the song other than chords such as musical instruction, section labels, etc.

Slide to the left or right to decrease or increase the font size. The point size of the font is displayed as you adjust this. You can also click on the arrow buttons to the left and right to fine-tune adjust the amount. Tap on the power icon on the right to toggle visibility of lyrics on and off.

Chords

This slider allows you to the change the size and visibility of chords that appear above or within lyrics. Chords are detected in the song or have been surrounded with square brackets.

Slide to the left or right to decrease or increase the font size. The point size of the font is displayed as you adjust this. You can also click on the arrow buttons to the left and right to fine-tune adjust the amount. Tap on the power icon on the right to toggle visibility of chords on and off.

Line Spacing

This slider is used to adjust the spacing between text in the chord chart. Slide to the left or right to decrease or increase the line spacing. You can use the arrow buttons to the left and right to fine-tune adjust the amount.

Chord Highlight

You can choose the highlight chords in your chord chart using this color picker. Click on the color of the highlight you desire. It will display under the chord in 50% opacity, just like a highlighter. Choosing the white color option removes the highlight.

Chord Color

This section allows you to change the color of the chords as well as their appearance. Click on a color in the color picker to change the color of the chord text. Choosing black uses the default text color which is black or white depending on the selected low light mode.

You can also toggle italic and bold appearance on and off for the chords as needed for extra visibility.

Text Tools Palette

The text tools palette is used to perform operations on the text content of the song. This can help you change text quickly or switch and fix chord formatting.

Search and Replace

This section of the text tools palette is used to search and replace text in the Text Editor. This is useful for replacing words or chords when using bracketed chords. For instance, you can change all instances of [A4] to [Asus4].

To use, type the search value in the first field and the replace value in the second field. Then press the Perform Search/Replace button to perform the operation.

Chord Format

This section includes toggle buttons that allow you to switch between the two supported formats. If there are any square brackets located in the song content, the Bracketed Chords button is selected. Otherwise the Chords Over Lyrics button is selected. Press the opposite button to reformat the text content into the desired chord format.

It is useful to switch the bracketed chords when splitting or combining lines. This is because the chords will travel with the lyrics in this case. You can then switch to chords over lyrics if you would like to position chords in a more visual manner.

Fix Spaces

This section provides a single-use tool for correcting issues that may occur when converting text from a word processor. You may find that chords are pushed to the right and beyond the lyrics they used to reside over. This is due to variable-width fonts that require many more space characters to align chords above lyrics.

Press the Fix Alignment Spaces button to have chords detected and the space between the chords reduced by a specific amount. This usually will align the chords very close to their original positions when viewed in a word processor or printed. From there you can more easily adjust the chord positions.

Song List

The song list appears in the left-most pane of the web app and is used for finding and selecting songs to view and edit. Use one of the following to add, import, or edit songs:

Add Button

The + button in the upper left corner of this pane opens the Add Songs Palette. From here you can create new songs or import songs that are stored on your computer.

Search Bar

The search bar gives you an area to type keywords. Press enter on your computer keyboard to filter the list by those keywords. You can then clear the search field to view all songs again.

Song List

The majority of this pane displays a table of songs. Three columns provide common information for browsing songs including:

  • Icon column displays an icon that was picked from the Organizer Menu. You can sort songs by this attribute by clicking the table header in the column.
  • Song Title displays the name of the song. You can sort the list by song title by clicking on the column header. The song list is sorted by the song title by default.
  • Key displays the key of the song if one is provided. Clicking on the table header above this column will sort the songs by key.

Click on a song to load it into Console. The song's contents will appear in the Song Editor and the song will be previewed in the Preview Pane.

Song Editor

The song editor contains tools and a large text area used to change the text-based content of the song.

The text editor component of this pane allows you to type content using the full-sized keyboard of your computer. As you type, the changes you make are reflected in the Preview Pane on the right. This gives you feedback on what the song will look like to avoid trial and error.

In addition to typing content in the text editor, you can also use palettes accessible from the toolbar to get the song looking just right. The toolbar buttons include:

Metadata

This toolbar button toggles the Metadata Palette on and off. Use this to set information about the song without knowing OnSong or ChordPro tags.

Insert

This toolbar button toggles the Insert Palette on and off. Use this palette to insert chords, section labels, and line formatting into the text editor.

Text Tools

This toolbar button toggles the Text Tools Palette on and off. Use this to change the formatting of the song or perform search and replace functions.

Delete

Click on this toolbar button to delete the song from your library. When you choose this option, you will be prompted prior to the song being deleted.

Convert

When you've imported a convertible file such as PDF or Microsoft Word, this option becomes enabled. Click on this to begin the conversion process on the host device. Once completed, the text editor is updated with the newly converted text.

Song Preview

The song preview pane displays how the song will look inside of OnSong. This uses the HTML 5 canvas tag to draw the song just the way OnSong does. You can scroll this pane to view the entire song. Use the toolbar to toggle features and palettes on and off.

Note: If you are viewing a file that is not text-based, it is up to the web browser if and how the file will be displayed. Most web browsers can view PDF files in a browser window, but other documents such as Microsoft Word will be downloaded to your computer for viewing in a separate application.

Low Light

Click on this button to toggle low light mode on and off. Not only does this show you how the chord chart will look in the preview, but when you save your changes the host device will also switch to low light mode too.

Pages

Click on this button to toggle viewing the chord chart on physical pages. This will divide your song based on the Page Layout options you've set in settings. This can give you an idea of how the chord chart will print.

Lead

When you turn on lead, action you make in Console like changing songs, scrolling and selecting sections also take place on the host device. This allows Console to remotely control another iPad, iPhone or iPod touch.

Follow

When you turn on follow, Console will load the currently viewed song on the host device. In addition, the screen will scroll along with any changes made on the host device. This is handy for knowing the song that is loaded on the device.

Style

This opens and closes the Style Palette, allowing you to style how the song should appear in the preview and on the device.

Chords

This opens and closes the Chords Palette so you can transpose, capo, and change the way chords and diagrams appear on the screen.

View As...

When viewing external files such as a PDF, this will display the PDF in the preview pane. You can switch between that and the text-based version of the song similar to the Use the imported file instead of OnSong switch in the Conversion Toolbar of the Song Editor.

Download

Click on the down arrow to choose a format to download the chord chart in. This will use the host device to create the file so be sure to save your changes first.

Print

Click on the print button to have the host device generate the print-ready PDF file and print it from your computer. This will prompt you to save your changes before printing.

Download Menu

When you click on the down arrow next to the download toolbar button, you can choose one of the following formats to download to your computer.

Note: This uses the host device to generate the content so you will be prompted to save any changes prior to the file being generated.

Drawing

Whether you are practicing or playing on stage, OnSong has many ways to make your music work for you. Sometimes you need to be able to sketch an idea or some instructions on your music. For that, you can use the Drawing Annotation. You get an intuitive drawing bar you can use to write and highlight. It also features a full undo/redo stack with layers.

To get started with drawing in OnSong, use the Drawing Annotation available in the Annotations Menu.

Dropbox

Dropbox is a popular cloud-based storage service that works great with OnSong. You can use Dropbox to move files between all of your devices no matter where you are. Save your PDF, Word, or text-based chord charts to a Dropbox folder on your computer. In a few moments you can import those files using OnSong. You can also export files to Dropbox to have them instantly available on your computer and in the cloud.

It's free to sign up for Dropbox and receive a free 2 gigabytes of data storage. There are also subscription plans to expand your storage as your needs grow. In typical usage, 2 gigabytes of storage is plenty of space for using with OnSong.

Sign Up

To sign up for Dropbox, visit the Dropbox website, sign up, and then install software on your computer. OnSong does not require that you install the app on your device.

Import

You can easily import files from Dropbox using the Dropbox import source. Sign in, browse your Dropbox and choose songs to import. It's that easy!

Export

Use the Share Menu to Export your songs and sets to different file formats. Just use the Location Picker to upload your files to Dropbox.

Sync

You can even synchronize your OnSong library to Dropbox, allowing you to use the same songs and sets on another device.

External Video

OnSong is designed to make full use of a connected video device to extend OnSong beyond mobile devices.

Adapters and Devices

Learn how to connect your device to a video device with a wired video adapter or wireless with AirPlay.

Lyrics Projection

Display lyrics to the chord chart you are playing, all controlled from your device on-stage.

Stage Monitor

Keep your entire team on the same page by turning video monitors into a virtual music stand run from a single device.

Screen Mirroring

If you are creating video tutorials, or want to see the full interface of OnSong on an external device, turn on screen mirroring to use the operating system's built in mirroring mode.

Screen Mirroring

When you connect an external video device to an iOS device, it mirrors the content of your screen directly onto the other video device. This is great for sharing what you see on the screen with others. Use this for giving presentations, or with video capture software to create tutorials.

OnSong takes control of any connected video device for projecting lyrics or displaying music charts on stage. This allows OnSong to use the entire screen, as well as control resolution and orientation. User interface components don't get in the way either.

If you want to prevent OnSong from taking over the display and use the built-in screen mirroring found in iOS, go into Settings Live Settings External Video Screen Mirroring and turn this on and tap Done. When you are done with your presentation or recording a video tutorial, you can turn this back on.

Note: You may need to restart OnSong for this to take effect.

Video Devices

Connecting your device to a projector or HDTV requires some extra equipment. This depends on the device that you have and the application. Pick one of the options below:

AirPlay

Stream video content from your iOS device to an HDTV or projector wirelessly using AirPlay. This requires an AppleTV connected to an HDTV and a reliable WiFi connection. No Internet connection is required.

Digital A/V Adapter

You can hard-wire you device to a video device that supports HDMI connectors. Purchase the adapter from Apple for the device you have.

VGA Adapter

If you have an older monitor system or projector, you may need to resort to an analog VGA connection. Purchase the appropriate adapter for your device.

Note: Devices older than the first generation iPad do not support external video devices. The first generation iPad does not support video over AirPlay.

AirPlay

AirPlay is an Apple technology that can stream audio and video content wirelessly to another device using WiFi. This requires a reliable WiFi network as well as a receiver device. Here's what you'll need:

Apple TV

The preferred method for receiving video content in OnSong is an Apple TV. This puck-sized device connects to a video device using HDMI and requires external AC power. Set it up on your WiFi network and connect it to your TV for high definition video playback.

Enabling AirPlay

Connecting to AirPlay requires an additional step that is as easy as plugging in an adapter. Follow these directions to enable AirPlay on your device and start streaming video.

Enabling AirPlay

Enabling AirPlay is slightly different on devices depending on their iOS version. Follow the instructions below to enable AirPlay video.

iOS 7 and later

Swipe up from the bottom of your screen to access the control center. Tap on the AirPlay button that appears when connected to a WiFi network with an AirPlay device. Next, tap on the device that you would like to connect to. For video-enabled devices like Apple TV, you must then turn on the Mirroring switch that appears. This will send the video of the device to the Apple TV.

iOS 6 and earlier

In iOS 6 and earlier versions, double press on the home button to open the multitasking tray. Swipe to the left to reveal playback controls as well as an AirPlay button. Repeat the steps above to select the device and enable mirroring.

Audio Only

You can also connect in the same way to audio devices. For instance, you can use an AirPort Express as a WiFi access point and to stream audio wirelessly.

Digital A/V Adapter

The digital A/V adapter allows you to connect your device to an HDMI cable and then to a video device like an HDMI splitter, projector, or HDTV.

Lightning Port

Modern iOS devices feature the smaller and reversible Lightning port. Be sure to get the Apple Lightning to Digital A/V Adapter.

30-pin Dock Connector

If you have an older device with a 30-pin adapter, you'll need the Apple Dock Connector Digital A/V Adapter.

Note: Both devices also include an additional port to charge the device while in use. Only the 30-pin model allows you to also synchronize to the device through the USB cable.

VGA Adapter

A VGA adapter allows you to connect your device to a VGA cable and then to a video device such as an analog VGA splitter, projector, or computer monitor.

Lightning Port

Modern iOS devices feature the smaller and reversible Lightning port. Be sure to get the Apple Lightning to VGA Adapter.

30-pin Dock Connector

If you have an older device with a 30-pin adapter, you'll need the Apple Dock Connector VGA Adapter.

Note: Only the Lightning VGA Adapter features an additional port to charge the device while in use.

Files

The Files app in iOS 11 and higher gives you a centralized location to manage documents and data that you store in services like Dropbox or Microsoft OneDrive. This was formally known as storage providers on older iOS versions. This system allows OnSong to import or export to your favorite cloud storage even if it's not available directly inside of OnSong.

Installing Apps

In order to import or export to these services, you need to install apps that support iOS storage providers so they appear in the Files app. There is no definitive list of apps that support this extension, but known apps include:

Importing

To import from another storage provider, go into the Songs Menu » All Songs and then tap on the + button to Add Songs. Tap on Files to open a window that displays that loads the storage provider interface. By default, iCloud Drive is opened. To choose a different storage provider, tap on the icon in the upper left corner. Tap on More to enable the apps that you've installed that are supported.

Exporting

To export, tap on the Share Menu from the menubar and then choose Export. Tap on the folder icon in the lower right corner and choose Files. Choose the file formats you would like to export and then tap on the Export button in the upper right corner. OnSong will again open the storage providers window. Choose a folder to export the files to.

Limitations

There are some limitations to using storage providers.

  1. Keep in mind that once the Files window opens that each interface is controlled by the app you choose. That is why each process of importing and exporting files is a little bit different.
  2. The Files interface may not support importing or exporting multiple files depending on the version of iOS you are using. This is why you can only choose one file to import, and multiple files are exported as a ZIP file. This may be supported by these apps in the future.
  3. You are limited to apps that support the new storage provider extension and apps that you have installed on your device.

Flow

Flow is a feature that allows the basic components of a song (verses, choruses, bridges and more) to be arranged in a particular order. OnSong then displays those parts of the song to create one continuous page. This allows the song to be experienced in a linear fashion by scrolling from the top down.

The system is very flexible and requires you only to label the sections of your song. You can then use an abbreviated version of the flow, or a more verbose version to allow even more options like displaying musical instructions at just the right time in the song.

Flow can be defined either as metadata in the song content, or in the Song Flow field in the Playback Menu. Please see information on the Flow Tag for details on how to express flow.

Foot Pedals

OnSong works great with popular foot pedals to control OnSong without the use of your hands. These solutions can work great for vocalists, drummers, and other instrumentalists that need a creative way operate OnSong without taking away from why they are on stage in the first place.

Bluetooth

The most popular form of foot pedal connects via Bluetooth and is similar to a computer keyboard but for your feet. Companies like AirTurn have created stage-proven devices like the BT-105 Duo, the BT-105 Quad and the new PED that are highly reliable and flexible.

Foot pedals are set up to scroll your song and navigate your sets with a press of your foot. You can also customize the actions for each foot pedal in the Foot Pedal Setup screen. With four-pedal options you can also configure Gears to extend your foot pedals to perform even more actions!

MIDI

OnSong can be configured to work with various MIDI devices like the iRig Blueboard. The setup for MIDI devices is a bit different and does require the purchase of the MIDI Integration in-app purchase. Each pedal would need to be configured separately and does not function out of the box.

Wired

OnSong also works with wired foot pedals like the Griffin Stompbox or BiLiPro Page Turn.

Note: Keep in mind that USB foot pedals need to be able to be powered by the iOS device and require the use of a Camera Connection Kit to be connected to the device. Check with the manufacturer to make sure that the foot pedal works with iOS devices before ordering.

Supported Foot Pedals

The following is a list of foot pedals supported by OnSong.

AirTurn

AirTurn makes some of the premier foot pedals for musical applications. Musicians trust these foot pedals for their ease of use and reliability.

  • PED is the latest member of the AirTurn family and is a cost-effective, all-in-one device that covers most needs.
  • BT-105 Duo is the original design that covers most needs and is flexible for future expansion.
  • BT-105 Quad is just what you need if you need a lot of foot pedals in a convenient package.

BiliPro

BiLiPro develops innovative peripherals for controlling your computer with your feet.

  • Page Turn was originally designed for use persons with physical disabilities, but is useful for wired hands-free scenarios.

IK Multimedia

IK Multimedia is an industry leader in products for making music on mobile platforms.

  • iRig Blueboard is a wireless MIDI foot switch that is useful for a number of operations.

Griffin

Griffin makes great products for your mobile lifestyle.

  • Stompbox gives you real guitar stomp box feel in a single, wired package at an incredibly affordable price.

PageFlip

PageFlip makes two foot pedals to meet the needs to musicians.

  • Cicada is the basic, two-pedal page turner.
  • Firefly provides LED lights to light the way.

Griffin Stompbox

The Griffin Stompbox is a solid, wired foot pedal with a real stomp box pedal feel. In addition to four stomp buttons, it includes a 1/4" input jack for an optional expression pedal.

The Stompbox connects to your iPad or iPhone with a 30-pin dock connector. For newer Lightning port devices, you will need to use a Lightning to 30-pin Adapter.

OnSong lets you choose different actions for each foot pedal using the Foot Pedal Setup Screen. Just be sure to swipe to the Griffin Stompbox screen to enable the Stompbox and configure the buttons and expression pedal.

Gears

What are Gears?

As a musician, you already have enough keys, pedals, buttons, knobs, and strings to worry about. Gears turn one set of foot pedals into many more without all the on-stage clutter. Press one pedal to "shift" into another gear and access more options.

Configuring Gears

Configuring gears can be done in the Foot Pedals Setup screen by tapping on the Gears Icon in the bottom right corner.

Hands-Free

When you're on stage, you already have plenty of strings, buttons, keys, and pedals to be concerned with. Thankfully, you can use OnSong completely hands-free, allowing you to focus on the music.

Sets

To get started, you need to first create a set and place your songs in the order you will perform them. This will allow you to switch between songs without opening the songs menu or touching the screen.

Foot Pedals

Once you have a set, you can tap on the edges of the screen to quickly navigate your song and set. But wouldn't it be nice if you could use your feet instead?

OnSong works with popular foot pedals to create the ideal stage solution. Foot pedals are designed to scroll and move through songs in your set list out of the box. You can configure them further in the Foot Pedal Setup screen.

Autoscroll

Another option is to use autoscroll, which allows you to slowly scroll from the top to the bottom of each chord chart over a specified amount of time. You can also turn on [Settings] Live Settings Live Bar Autoscroll Autoscroll Continually to have OnSong automatically switch to the next songs in the set when autoscroll reaches the bottom.

MIDI Integration

With MIDI integration, you can trigger songs to appear on your device when configured MIDI commands are triggered from MIDI-compatible software. (such as Ableton Live) Likewise, you can also scroll and navigate your sets using MIDI commands. Start your sequence and program OnSong to follow along.

Connected Devices

If you are using multiple devices controlled by one host, or if you are sharing your screen with the stage monitor mode, you can make sure that the rest of your band doesn't have to use their hands either. Here are a few ways you can connect devices:

  • Connect uses WiFi to share your library with others and stream chord charts during a performance.
  • OnCue is similar to OnSong Connect, but has the option of Bluetooth for streaming without a wireless access point.
  • Stage Monitors allows you to turn HDTVs into virtual music stands.

Low Light Mode

One of the advantages to using an iPad on stage is that it is automatically backlit. This means that you don't need to supply additional lighting for paper charts. Because it's backlit, it's also easier to read even though the screen is smaller. You get higher contrast and sharper text.

When To Use

If you play on a dimly lit stage or outdoors, you may quickly come to appreciate this advantage. But using white paper and black text is not ideal for these environments. The bright light can be hard on your eyes. In addition, the ambient light from screens can cause your face to glow white on stage. To make things easier on your eyes and less distracting for your audience, use low light mode.

Limitations

Low light mode will only work for text-based chord charts. Songs that are displayed as PDF, Microsoft Word or other file formats are displayed "as-is". In these cases, low light mode cannot be applied.

Enabling Low Light Mode

Low light mode is enabled either from a foot pedal, a hot corner, or from the settings screen. To enable, go into Settings Display Settings Enable Low Light Mode and switch that on. When you tap Done, your screen will redraw with low light mode enabled.

Now your chord chart and menus will appear with a black background and white text. If you want your menus to retain their white background and black text, you can change this settings in Settings Menu Settings Use Dark Menus in Low Light Mode.

Setting an Action

You can also toggle low light mode on and off using either a foot pedal, hot corner, or MIDI trigger.

Lyrics Projection

Doing more with less is one of the core tenants of OnSong. It keeps you organized on a sleek and mobile device, and provides all the tools you need right when you need them at an incredibly low price. It should come as no surprise that OnSong features lyrics projection too.

Many Uses

While larger churches already have expensive lyrics projection software and equipment, smaller and mobile churches can benefit from lyrics projection in OnSong. For instance, your small group or house church may use OnSong to lead worship and display lyrics on an HDTV.

Music therapists have been using lyrics projection to help their clients sing again. Whether it's to bring people into worship, or to help people heal from disease, lyrics projection is a powerful tool that lets you control lyrics while playing live.

Configuration

You can configure lyrics projection using the External Video Menu. From there you can set up different modes, as well as background colors, images, or even motion videos. There are also other options and settings located in Settings Live Settings External Video Lyrics Projection.

Hands-Free Operation

Once you've connected a video device (HDTV, projector, etc.) to the device running OnSong, you can tap on the sections of lyrics you want to display on the external video device. Another method is to use the hands-free features of OnSong to control lyrics as well.

Arrange your songs from the top down using Flow and then use Autoscroll to have the song scroll from the top to the bottom over a certain amount of time. This will also select the sections as they come into view and display lyrics!

For even more control, use foot pedals. If you are using foot pedals in addition to lyrics projection, OnSong will scroll the song by jumping from section to section. If you are using other pedal models, you can set up OnSong to scroll by section in the Foot Pedal Settings Menu found in the Foot Pedal Setup Screen.

Motion Graphics

You have the option to configure colors, gradients, custom images, and even motion graphics as your background. Images can be imported from your photo library, and motion graphics can be added or even purchased via the Image Media Picker.

Messages

What are Messages?

Communication with your band when playing live can be challenging. Hand signals and vocal cues can be used, but what if you could use colors and text to inform your band where the music is headed next?

Setup

You can create and manage personalized messages using the Messages Menu. You can also trigger messages from this menu, although when playing live, it's more useful to trigger these from a Hot Corner or from Foot Pedals.

Viewing Messages

Messages can be viewed on your device's screen, devices connected with OnSong Connect, or with any external video screens running as Stage Monitors. Messages will appear for about one-third of a second per word. This ensures that the reader has enough time to read longer messages. You can configure messages to appear longer in Settings Display Settings Song Viewer Flash Message.

Sending Messages

You can send messages by triggering a Send Message action in the Action Menu inside of OnSong. You can set actions for Hot Corners or Navigation Zones in Editors Navigation Screen Tab.

You can also set actions for foot pedals in the Foot Pedals Setup screen. From here, you can setup your pedal to trigger the Send Message action in the Action Menu.

Metronome

Playing to a click track is a great way to work on your tempo personally and as a band. OnSong has a built-in metronome that plays to the tempo you set for every song in your library. OnSong has both an audio and visual metronome to work in any scenario.

You can set the tempo and time signature of the metronome for each song in the Playback Menu or by setting Metadata in the Song Editor or with the Metadata Editor.

You can toggle and set the metronome from the Metronome Live Bar Button found in the Live Bar at the lower right corner of the OnSong user interface. You can also toggle the metronome using Foot Pedals.

The metronome has many different configuration options that can be accessed in Settings Live Settings Metronome. Here are some things you can do with the metronome:

Get Musical

Use different metronome sounds like a snare and bass drum to make the metronome sound more like music. Do this in Settings Live Settings Metronome Audio Settings Sound.

Get the Song Started

Forgetting the tempo of a song can be catastrophic to the rest of the song. Play the metronome for a few measures and have it turn off automatically. You can do this with the Stop Metronome option in Settings Live Settings Metronome Audio Settings Behavior.

Click Track with In-Ear Monitors

Whatever you do, don't play your metronome on stage for everyone to hear! However, you could send the audio metronome from OnSong into your sound board or use a mix-in channel on your in-ear monitoring system. With this configuration, you will hear the click and your audience won't.

Visualize the Beat

If you are using Stage Monitors, OnCue, or OnSong Connect you can configure OnSong to flash external displays in time with yours. Configure visual metronome settings in Settings Live Settings Metronome Visual Settings.

MIDI Integration

MIDI or "Musical Instrument Digital Interface" is a powerful digital communications protocol that ushered in the age of electronic music. Even though it was first released in 1984, it's use is still prevalent in modern computing. Apple has built CoreMIDI into iOS, making the iPad and iPhone great tools for musicians on-stage. In addition, MIDI is now being used to communicate between music apps on the device, as well as external devices.

Setting Up MIDI

The first step in using MIDI on an iOS device is connecting the standard MIDI or USB cable to the device. This can be accomplished with:

  • MIDI Adapters are devices that connect to your 30-pin or Lightning port and provide traditional MIDI "DIN-5" connections.
  • USB with Camera Connection Kit allows MIDI devices with a USB port to be connected directly to the iOS device.
  • MIDI over WiFi can also be used as long as you have a computer or host device to create the MIDI network session.

Triggering Actions from MIDI

Once you have a MIDI device connected, you can map MIDI signals to OnSong actions. This can be used to scroll the chord chart, navigate your set, or trigger backing tracks. Any action that can be performed in OnSong can be mapped to MIDI in the MIDI Triggers screen.

*Note: MIDI devices may send signals differently depending on their intended use. For instance, the iRig Blueboard device becomes a latching pedal with control changes. OnSong has advanced MIDI Settings to handle some of these differences.

Sending and Receiving MIDI

OnSong can also be used to send MIDI commands to other MIDI devices when songs are viewed or when sections are selected. In addition, you can have OnSong switch to a song by listening for specific MIDI commands. These are typically set up using Metadata with the Metadata Editor in the Song Editor.

OnCue

OnCue is the name given to wireless sharing in OnSong. This is different than OnSong Connect, in that it uses Apple's wireless sharing frameworks to allow for sharing over Bluetooth. This provides the ability to beam and stream content to devices running OnSong without the use of WiFi.

About

Since OnCue is built on top of Apple's frameworks for wireless, peer-to-peer connectivity, there are a few things to consider as well as some limitations.

Beam

Beaming is the process of sharing the currently viewed song or set with nearby users. Once received, those users will need to navigate and scroll through the song on their own.

Stream

Streaming allows the user who sets up the streaming session to control the connected devices. This will send song content and navigation signals to the connected devices.

Beam

The wireless sharing screen displays nearby devices that are running OnSong. While all devices are checked by default, you can check or uncheck devices to receive the currently loaded song or set.

Tap on the Share button in the upper right. You will be prompted before the set is sent. Recipients will receive a prompt inside of OnSong asking if they would like to receive the set. They can accept or decline the song or set. Transferred songs and sets will appear the same as they do on the source device with styles, transposition, annotations, etc.

You can also set up an OnCue streaming session by toggling the "Enable OnCue wireless streaming" switch on the bottom. This will invite the selected devices to join the wireless streaming session for you to control the display on their devices.

Lastly, the refresh button in the lower right corner will refresh the list of devices by disconnecting you from the ad-hoc network and then reestablish that connection after a brief delay.

When you are all done, tap on the Close button in the upper right corner.

About OnCue

OnCue is built on top of Apple's frameworks to allow wireless, peer-to-peer connectivity over Bluetooth. The following are some tips to get things running for your team as well as a history and future outlook for the technology.

Because these frameworks are limited to iOS devices, and due to the inherit limitations of the technology, OnSong has a technology called OnSong Connect which requires a network connection. OnSong Connect allows for more robust communication as well as support for many more devices.

OnCue Version

Newer versions of OnSong can use newer and more reliable protocols to send OnCue information. If you are using an iOS 7 or higher device, a new version of OnCue is enabled by default. If you are running iOS 6 or earlier, the older version of OnSong is enabled. Be sure to use the version that meets the needs of every device that you need to connect. For instance, if you have an original iPad that runs iOS 5.1.1, you will need to switch all devices to the older OnCue version for interoperability. This can be done in Settings » Menu Settings » Sharing.

Tips

Wireless technology changes at a rapid rate, and iOS has followed and led many of these trends. When the original iPad launched in 2010, only Bluetooth was capable of setting up an ad-hoc network of devices. With each iOS release, Apple began transforming the wireless sharing landscape. Today Apple uses Bluetooth to configure direct WiFi, peer-to-peer functions. WiFi features much higher bandwidth than Bluetooth.

Number of Devices: One major limitation to Apple's frameworks are the number of concurrent devices. While not documented in the original Game Kit Framework, the generally accepted number of peer-to-peer devices is around five maximum. The newer frameworks support a maximum of six devices.

Frequencies: However, some networks are not friendly with these WiFi requests and different versions of iOS handle this connection differently. We recommend that you turn off WiFi and turn on Bluetooth when performing. This is because WiFi frequencies can become overloaded in crowded environments such as a concert. Bluetooth is generally limited to 30 feet and is not as connected to the otherwise crowded WiFi space.

RF Noise: Another consideration is radio frequency noise. Since nearly all consumer electronics (including microwave ovens) operate in the 2.4 Ghz and 5.0 Ghz range, there is the possibility of too many wireless signals being present. This noise makes it difficult for transmissions to complete and reduces overall bandwidth.

Network Engineering: If you are using WiFi or Bluetooth at a performance level, work with a wireless communications engineer to ensure that you don't have competing frequencies. This applies to not just networking equipment, but to wireless microphones and audio reinforcement hardware as well. Many problems can be alleviated with more professional-grade equipment that can seamlessly switch to less cluttered channels.

History

When OnSong launched with the first generation iPad, this was the only way to accomplish wireless networking. Over time, Apple has changed the way this networking works and, as such, effected performance on newer versions of iOS.

The following provides a history of wireless connectivity is these iOS versions.

  • iOS 3.2 was the original operating system for the first iPad. This featured Bluetooth wireless networking using Apple's Game Kit Framework. This framework only used Bluetooth 2.1 EDR for communication.
  • iOS 4.x did not change the underlying Bluetooth communication system and only appeared to make the Game Kit Frameworks and Bluetooth connectivity more stable.
  • iOS 5.x added the ability for iOS to send wireless data over WiFi if Bluetooth is not enabled. The default protocol remained Bluetooth.
  • iOS 6.x switched the priority of wireless protocols, opting to send data over WiFi if available. The issue is that some networks are not capable of relaying this information, and there is no provision for selecting Bluetooth over WiFi connections. This release made wireless communication less reliable, but overall faster for supported networks. Turning off WiFi and turning on Bluetooth resolves the reliability problem.
  • iOS 7.x is when Apple rebuilt wireless sharing with a new protocol and deprecated the original frameworks. This new protocol is not supported on devices running iOS 6 or older. It uses Bluetooth to configure a direct WiFi connection for peer-to-peer communication.
  • iOS 8.x continues the new model of wireless communication using Bluetooth LE to maintain connections with devices.

Stream

OnCue streaming allows one device running OnSong to control multiple devices. This is performed by each device creating and maintaining a peer-to-peer, ad-hoc network using iOS wirelessly sharing protocols.

You can start an OnCue streaming session by either opening the Wireless Sharing Screen and turning on the OnCue switch at the bottom, or by choosing the Start OnCue option in the Share Menu. This will invite users on other devices through a prompt to join the session.

Once enabled, the songs you view and any other actions such as navigation, autoscroll, and song style changes will be sent to the other devices automatically. Depending on your network speed and reliability, this may take a second or two to send. If a follower views a different song in their library, the navigational commands will not take place.

OnCue will send the content as it appears on the leader's device. Followers in the OnCue stream can opt to turn on a setting to allow their version of a song to be used instead. This can be found in Settings Live Settings Live Bar Network Settings.

Both streaming and beaming content in OnSong may experience connection issues due to how wireless sharing is implemented in iOS. Please review the About section to find ways to accomplish a reliable connection.

OnSong Connect

OnSong Connect is a communications layer in OnSong that allows your device to control or to be controlled by other compatible apps on your local network using WiFi. OnSong uses this communications layer to "connect" devices together with a robust network. Within the app, this allows you to share your music by either beaming songs and sets, or by sharing the music on a leader's device with other members of the team.

Beaming

You may want to share your set with your band after practice so they can review the songs before performing them. To do this with OnSong Connect, go into the Share Menu Connect screen.

Output Options

OnSong is built for flexibility. True to that goal is the ability for OnSong to output your songs and sets in the formats you need. By doing this, OnSong can make your life easier by giving you the flexibility to send your songs, sets, or song list in whatever format your team might need.

The Share Menu provides access to a number of methods for outputting your files (such as Exporting or Emailing). These screens have common elements for picking songs, configuring output options, and information about file formats that can be utilized.

File Formats

OnSong supports a number of file formats with which to export songs and sets. The following is a list of supported formats:

Adobe PDF

PDF is a standard file format that is used as a means to create digital paper output. OnSong can export a song or songs in the PDF format. When the "As a single file" option is turned on, a single multipage document is outputted.

OnSong uses the page size, orientation, and margins as provided in Page Layout Settings when exporting PDF files. Only text-based chord charts and other PDF files can be exported the PDF file format. If you have another file type in your set, that will be outputted as just the song title. Songs that use the PDF format will be appended to the document in the page size, orientation, and margins used in the original file. These files do not include annotations or sticky notes.

PDF files include a .pdf file extension.

OnSong

The OnSong file format is usually just the content as it is written in the Song Editor. This is useful for importing into another version of OnSong, or to save in order to make future changes. These files are plain text and have the .onsong file extension.

ChordPro

Choosing this format will export the song content using the ChordPro syntax. This can be used to edit and view the file ChordPro-compatible apps. This file format is text-based and has the .chopro file extension.

OpenSong

Choosing this format will export the song or set in the OpenSong XML file format. This can be used in other OpenSong-compatible applications for lyrics projection or library management. This file format is XML-based and has a .xml file extension.

HTML File

HTML files can be exported to view in web browsers on any platform. OnSong exports the HTML file to closely resemble the chord chart as rendered in OnSong. This does not include annotations. HTML files have a .html file extension.

Text File

This outputs the song content as a plain text file, placing chords on a line above the lyrics. Text files are plain text and include the .txt file extension.

Song List

The song list is different from other file formats in that it does not export the actual chord chart, but rather a list of every song in the set or which has been selected using the Song Picker. This list is in the HTML file format and contains a table with the song title, artist, key, and capo.

The song list is exported as an HTML file that contains a table of the following song attributes: song title, artist, current key, and capo.

OnSong Archive

The OnSong Archive is one the best-kept secrets in OnSong. This file format is binary and can only be read by other versions of OnSong. However, these files contain all the information necessary to display a song or set in another version of OnSong (including styles, settings, annotations, and external files).

The OnSong Archive file format includes the .onsongarchive file extension and can only be opened by the OnSong app.

OnSong Backup

Exporting an OnSong Backup is a must for any user who has spent significant time organizing and curating their song library in OnSong. The OnSong Backup format always stores a single file and always contains everything needed to restore your OnSong library to its original state. This includes user preferences and settings, songs, sets, styles, books, etc.

The OnSong Backup file format includes the .backup file extension.

Output Options Menu

This menu provides options to change how files are outputted from OnSong. It contains the following options:

Lyrics only

When exporting chord charts in various formats, you can turn chords off and only display lyrics. This is useful for printing song books for congregational singing or to send to vocalists.

As a single file

When a set or more than one song is selected to be outputted, OnSong defaults to sending multiple files, one for each song. Enabling this setting will combine the individual files into one, aggregate file. For instance, if the PDF file format is selected and the single file option is selected, one PDF file is generated with multiple pages which contain all outputted songs.

Different file formats handle exporting as a single file differently; outputting in this manner does not make sense for all formats.

Original key

OnSong uses a transposition engine which allows you to set the key of the song independently from the underlying song content. This key is outputted by default. If this option is turned on, the original key in the underlying song content is used instead.

As a ZIP file

When exporting multiple files, it may make sense to export as a ZIP file. This places all individually outputted songs into one file which can be extracted. When emailing multiple songs it is beneficial to turn on this setting since most email servers will block or omit attachments it does not recognize or that could be construed as a security threat. Sending ZIP files will typically work around this limitation.

Song Picker

The song picker menu displays which songs are to be outputted, as well as allowing for you to select more songs if desired.

Most of the picker menu is comprised of your song list. Here you can search and browse for songs. Tap on a song to place or remove a checkmark. Check marked songs will be added to the export list. You can also tap on the Select All or Deselect All buttons at the bottom to do just that.

When you are finished, tap on the Done button to change the songs to be outputted. Tap on the Cancel button to close the picker without changing the song selected for output.

Pitch Pipe

Not all of us have perfect pitch. So what do you do if you need to start a song vocally or perform a song a capella? For that, OnSong features a pitch pipe to play notes that get you started.

Setup

OnSong will play the notes of the key of a song without requiring any setup. For instance, if your song is in Am, the notes A, C, and E are played back in a middle octave.

You can also set notes to play back using the pitch tag in Metadata of the OnSong or ChordPro file formats.

Playing the Pitch

To play the pitch, you need to set a Hot Corner, Navigation Zone or Foot Pedal to initiate the pitch playback.

Using Pitch

While it's common to hear a pitch played from a pitch pipe before an a capella performance, you can also send the output of your device to the mixing channel of your in-ear monitoring system, or send it as a mono channel to a source board. This setup, like the metronome feature, allows you and your team to hear the pitch without the audience hearing it.

Printing

OnSong is designed to reduce or eliminate the use of paper on stage. Not only is this a more cost-effective and environmentally-friendly option, but it also helps to keep you more organized.

However, sometimes it's just easier to print your songs or set list to a sheet of paper for sharing. OnSong has powerful print capabilities that help you stay organized and save paper, too.

To print, select a song or set. Use the Share Menu to open the Print Screen. From there you can print chord charts, song lists, and even multiple pages on a physical piece of paper. OnSong also allows you to send the printout as a PDF.

Scenes

Music is so much more than sound alone. It's the entire experience that you bring between you and your audience. But bigger experiences can be cost prohibitive and require trained and specialized people to run light shows or graphics. But what if the simple act of swiping to the next song or pressing a foot pedal could shift the visual and emotional impact of your music in a moment? That's scenes.

Scenes integrates smart bulbs from companies like Philips and LIFX to create colorful lighting for your stage. Compared to professional lighting equipment, these bulbs are very affordable, easy to install and portable.

Scenes also can integrate with DMX stage lighting fixtures using the ArtNet protocol with a compatible interface from companies like DMXKing.com.

To enable the in-app purchase and start making a scenes, open the Utilities Menu Editors Scenes.

Sets

OnSong is great for keeping your entire chord chart library organized and accessible no matter where you go. But when it comes to playing live, you need to be able to quickly and easily move between songs in your set list. OnSong lets you create sets to be played at specific times and venues.

Creating Sets

You access your sets in the My Sets tab in the Songs Menu. From there you can create folders for organizing sets by band or venue, as well as create new sets. Once the set is created, you can quickly pull songs from your library or books.

Navigating Sets

Simply tap on a set from your list of sets to load it into the song viewer. You can swipe, tap, or use other hands-free methods like foot pedals to move between songs in your set, or to scroll your songs up and down.

Sharing Sets

Sets allow you to organize some songs in your library for use with the band. Once you have the set selected, use the Share Menu to share it with your team using a variety of methods.

Tracking Songs

Sets are created for playing in the moment, but they also form the basis of song tracking in OnSong. Using the date you specify when creating your set, OnSong can determine when you play songs. This can be used to let you know if you've overplayed a song, or use to send song reports to licensing agencies like CCLI.

Archiving Sets

Because you may want to look up and see what you did last week or last month, it's a good idea to archive your sets. You can then access old sets using the archived sets list.

OnSong can also be configured to auto-archive sets so you don't have to worry about doing that manually. This keeps your active sets list nice and organized.

Spotify

Spotify lets you play millions of songs through streaming technology. Now you can link Spotify tracks to your OnSong chord charts.

Stage Monitor

Get rid of paper and make sure everyone is on the same page by using stage monitor mode. Stage monitors use standard HDTV on stands or wedges, turning them into virtual music stands. With one iPad or iPhone, you can control an entire band.

Connecting

You can use either a wired adapter to connect to your screens or use an AppleTV to send video wirelessly using AirPlay. From there, you can use standard video splitters to have more than one screen if necessary.

Note: OnSong recommends using wired adapters to avoid issues with wireless radio interference in production environments. If you are planning to use multiple video screens, be sure to invest in quality HDMI components and powered splitters.

Equipment

Here is a list of supplies that we used in the making of the tutorial video. The cost per station is about $250-$300 depending on screen size and cabling. In addition, each monitor can be used by more than one musician.

Confidence Projector

If your facility has a back-of-house projector, you can also project chord charts in a way that makes them easy to see from the stage. Since most projectors are locked in the landscape orientation and further away, you may want to show one song at a time to make the size larger. You can do this in Settings Live Settings External Video Stage Monitor.

Sticky Notes

OnSong is designed to replace paper, so it's only natural to use metaphors and tools that we've come to rely on with paper charts. Sticky notes allow you to apply notes to a song to remind you of who's starting the song or other hints that help you play.

You can choose a variety of colors for your sticky notes, too. Change the opacity of them to allow your music to show through. You can even position, rotate, and scale them to make them more visible.

Create sticky notes by selecting the Sticky Note option in the Annotations Menu found in the Menubar. This will add a sticky note to your chord chart and will open the Note Editor so you can begin typing.

Tap and drag a sticky note around the page to place it where it belongs. Double-tap to open the Note Editor.

Supported File Formats

OnSong supports a number of file formats making it a great app for any type of music content. Click on a file format to learn more about it and how OnSong displays its contents.

Chord Charts

OnSong works best with text-based chord charts and natively understands these formats.

Converted

These file formats are text-based in nature but not natively understood or edited by OnSong. They are converted when imported into supportable formats.

External Files

All other supported file types can be imported and viewed "as-is" from within OnSong. The song editor also supports conversion of many of these file types to text.

Media Files

OnSong features a media library that can be used for associating graphical assets like images and videos to lyrics projection, or to assign backing tracks to songs. You can import the following file types into your media library.

ZIP Files

OnSong can also import ZIP files that contain one or more supported file formats. This is useful for import more than one file at a time from an external resource or app.

FLAC

FLAC stands for Free Lossless Audio Codec which is an audio coding format for lossless compression of digital audio, and is also the name of the free software project producing the FLAC tools, the reference software package that includes a codec implementation. Digital audio compressed by FLAC's algorithm can typically be reduced to between 50 and 70 percent of its original size and decompress to an identical copy of the original audio data.

FLAC is supported in OnSong on iOS versions that support the codec which appear to be iOS 11 and higher only.

System Exclusive Files

System Exclusive MIDI is a way to send raw data to devices and is used for more complex MIDI configurations. These are normally written as hexadecimal text that begins with the characters "F0". SysEx messages are non-channel specific MIDI that is broadcast so that compatible devices can receive the information and act accordingly.

These files can be started as raw data or hexadecimal text files with the *.sysex or *.syx file extension. When imported, OnSong will automatically create a MIDI Global using the file name as the global name and tag.

Adobe PDF

Adobe PDF files are commonly used as digital versions of paper documents. The PDF format faithfully reproduces the printed page. OnSong can view PDF files, vertically scrolling through multiple pages. OnSong expects each song to be contained in a single PDF file.

While PDF files maintain how a document should look, they can sacrifice meaningful text to do that. For instance, some PDF documents do not contain textural content but rather shapes and images. While this may appear as text to the human eye, it can be very difficult to extract from the document. OnSong attempts to do this when converting to text. If sufficient text cannot be extracted, OnSong will upload the document to an optical character recognition service (OCR) that will attempt to read the document using computer algorithms. This can have varying results depending on the original document.

For more information about PDF files, please visit the Adobe website at http://www.adobe.com/pdf.

Advanced Audio Coding

Advanced Audio Coding (AAC) is an audio coding standard for lossy digital audio compression. Designed to be the successor of the MP3 format, AAC generally achieves better sound quality than MP3 at similar bit rates. This is the native audio format for iOS devices.

When you import audio files directly into OnSong, they are added to your OnSong audio media library where you can link them to chord charts as backing tracks.

Apple Pages

Pages is a word processing program available on the Mac OS X as well as on iPad, iPhone, and iPod touch. You can view Pages documents in OnSong as well as convert them to text.

For more information about Pages, please visit the website at http://www.apple.com/iwork/pages.

Note: Recently Apple has updated their iWork suite which has changed the file format used by Pages and other apps. This change has reversed platform compatibility, making the use of these files much more difficult outside of their native applications. OnSong no longer fully supports viewing or conversion of Pages 5.x files due to changes in the file format.

Audio Interchange File Format

Audio Interchange File Format (AIFF) is an audio file format standard used for storing sound data. AIFF files are typically uncompressed resulting in large file sizes but without lossy compression for higher quality sound output.

When you import audio files directly into OnSong, they are added to your OnSong audio media library where you can link them to chord charts as backing tracks.

ChordPro

The ChordPro file format is a common format used in other software applications. OnSong understands this format natively. OnSong recognizes files with the following file extensions: .chordpro, .chopro, .cho, .crd, .pro

The ChordPro format allows for song information to be expressed in tags delineated by curly braces. This information can be logically divided into metadata tags and inline tags.

Metadata Tags

These are ChordPro tags that you would use in the metadata portion of the song.

  • {title:} or {t:} The title of the song.
  • {subtitle:}, {st:} or {su:} The artist name or any other byline information. You can specify multiple artists by separating names with a semi-colon. - Kim Walker-Smith; Chris Quilala
  • {album:} The name of the album where the song is located.
  • {artist:} or a: The artist name or any other byline information. You can specify multiple artists by separating names with a semi-colon. - Kim Walker-Smith; Chris Quilala
  • {author:} The name of the person who created the chord chart. This is displayed at the bottom of the chord chart and in lyrics projection.
  • {key:} or {k:} The key of the song written as a key with enharmonic preference and an optional "m" to indicate minor. - alphabetic, e.g. Bb or Em
  • {capo:} The capo to set as number of frets - numeric
  • {tempo:} The beats per minute (BPM) - numeric
  • {time:} The time signature - numeric beat over bar e.g. 3/4
  • {duration:} The song length for autoscroll - seconds or mm:ss
  • {book:} The name of the book or books to place the song into. This is a comma-delimited list of book names into which the song will be placed. If the book does not exist, it will be automatically created.
  • {number:} The number of the song - numeric, use for hymns, years, etc. You can sort songs by the number for reference.
  • {flow:} The arrangement of sections - list of section labels. See Flow for details on arranging the flow of a song.
  • {midi:} The MIDI commands to send when the song is viewed. See MIDI Syntax for how to express MIDI commands as text in OnSong.
  • {midi-index:} The MIDI commands that will trigger this song to be opened in the Song Viewer. See MIDI Syntax for how to express MIDI commands as text in OnSong.
  • {pitch:} The notes to play when using the Pitch Pipe feature.
  • {keywords:} or {topic:} The list of tags to use with topic search. See Topics for more information on browsing by topic.
  • {copyright:} or {footer:} Specifies copyright footer text to appear at the bottom of the page or lyrics projection.
  • {ccli:} The CCLI number of the song.
  • {restrictions:} The rights management for the song's comma-delimited list of restrictions. See Restrictions for details on setting restrictions for your song.

Inline Tags

These tags are used within the content of the song and can be used to either define sections or to format parts of the song.

  • {define:} is used to define custom chord diagrams. See Defining Chords for more information.
  • {comment:} or {c:} Defines a comment and appears as a musical instruction.
  • {comment_bold:} or {cb:} Defines text to appear in bold.
  • {comment_italic:} or {ci:} Defines text to appear as italic.
  • {guitar_comment:} or {gc:} Defines a comment that appears as a musical instruction.
  • {start_of_bridge} or {sob} Declares the start of a bridge section.
  • {end_of_bridge} or {eob} Declares the end of a bridge section.
  • {start_of_chorus} or {soc} Declares the start of a chorus section.
  • {end_of_chorus} or {eoc} Declares the end of a chorus section.
  • {start_of_tab} or {sot} Declares the start of tablature which OnSong renders in a monospaced font.
  • {end_of_tab} or {eot} Declares the end of a tablature section.
  • {new_page} or {np} This is used to declare a new page.
  • {new_physical_page} or {npp} This is used to declare a new page.

Formatting Tags

The following tags are used to define the default font and size for lyrics and chords in the chord chart.

  • {textsize:} Defines the size of the lyrics as a numeric value in points.
  • {textfont:} Defines the name of the font to use for lyrics. Must be supported on the platform.
  • {chordsize:} Defines the size of the chords as a numeric value in points.
  • {chordfont:} Defines the name of the font to use for chords. Must be supported on the platform.

Defining Chords

OnSong has the ability to display chord diagrams for chords found in text-based chord charts. By default, OnSong finds the default variation of the chord in the Chord Diagram Library. In some cases you want to use a specific chord variation for a song. To do this, you define a chord using the ChordPro syntax as follows:

{define: E5 base-fret 7 frets 0 1 3 3 x x fingers - 1 2 3 - - key E}

This expression can be divided into the following parts:

  • Define begins the declaration of a new chord diagram.
  • E5 is the name of the chord that is declared. Chords matching this name will use the specified diagram. base-fret declares that the following number will be the the fret on which the chord diagram begins. All frets are relative to this base fret.
  • frets declares that the following will be a space-delimited list of the frets to play. In the example given, 0 means an open string is to be played, 1 and 3 are the first and third fret relative to the base fret and "x" means to not play the that string.
  • fingers declares a space-delimited list of the fingers to use on each string. In this particular example, the - symbol indicates that the strings are not played with fingers. The 1, 2 and 3 indicate the fingers to be used for playing the chord.
  • key is the key in which the chord should be played. Not currently supported.

If the chord definition does not exist in the Chord Diagram Library, it is added and set as the default variation for the song. OnSong applies the chord to the guitar instrument when six strings are defined, the 5-string bass when five strings are defined, and the default instrument when 4 or another number of strings are used.

Flow

Flow is a way to write the sections of a song once and then arrange the song in a top-down format. For instance, you may want the song to play the first verse, chorus, second verse and then repeat the chorus twice. Instead of rewriting the chorus multiple times, you can express this in a flow metatag or temporarily using the Flow field in the Playback Menu.

Expressing Flow

The first step to using flow is to create Sections and label them. You can specify a flow using a metatag in shorthand like this:

{flow: V1 C V2 C C B C C}

You can also write them in a longhand form by writing out the full name of the sections in a comma-delimited list like this:

{flow: Verse 1, Chorus, Verse 2, Chorus, Chorus, Bridge, Chorus, Chorus}

OnSong creates the shorthand version by using the first character of each word in the section name. This means you do not have to use special names for this to work. In the case of a conflict, OnSong will use the first section matching the abbreviation.

Pages and Instructions

You can also use flow to add musical instruction and page breaks in the flow definition instead of in the song content. You can do this by entering flow information that does not match a section label. Because the values you may want to output may contain spaces, you will want to use the comma-delimited method. Here's an example of adding musical instruction and page breaks.

{flow: Verse 1, Chorus, Verse 2, Chorus, (Repeat 2x), ----, Bridge, Chorus, (Repeat 2x)}

This will output the musical instructions (Repeat 2x) under each chorus. The four hyphens will force a page break between the first set of choruses and the bridge.

MIDI Syntax

OnSong uses a text-based syntax for expressing MIDI commands. While you can use the MIDI Events in the Metadata Editor, you can also express MIDI commands in text.

Delimited Values

First and foremost, multiple MIDI commands can be separated by various characters including: a tab character, comma, semi-colon, vertical pipe, or new line. The comma is the most common delimiter. For example:

1.2:0@0, PC1.2:3@0, N67@1, START, SS8

Channel

Each entry may contain an @ symbol. The numeric value after the symbol is the channel on which the command is to be sent. Since channels in MIDI start on zero, channel one would be a zero (0), channel two a one (1), etc.

If no @ symbol is used, the command is sent or received on all channels.

Prefixes

Each entry in the list contains a prefix. This prefix determines what type of MIDI command to send. These include:

  • PC or No Prefix is a program change event.
  • N is a note event
  • CC is a control change event.
  • SS is a song select event.
  • START is a start command.
  • STOP is a stop command.
  • CONTINUE is a continue command.
  • F0 prefixes a SysEx message.

Values

The value of the command appears just before the @ symbol or at the end of the entry if no @ is given. This is the value of the program change, control change, note, or song select based on the prefix. In the case of SysEx entries, the hexadecimal value of the SysEx is provided directly after the F0 prefix which is used as a header to all SysEx commands.

Subvalues

In some cases, additional information is conveyed in the MIDI command as subvalues. For instance, MSB and LSB, as well as velocity of control values can be sent this way. This is expressed through the addition of a colon in the value portion. The subvalue has different context depending on the type of MIDI command sent:

  • Program Change has subvalues aligning with the MSB/LSB of the program change. These values are separated by a period with the MSB on the left and the LSB on the right.
  • Control Change has the value of the control set using this. The number can be between 0 and 127. If omitted, the value of 127 is inferred.
  • Note Event has a subvalue relating to the velocity at which the note should be played. This can be set to a numerical value between 0 and 127.

Examples

Let's start with a simple program change. In this scenario we use program change 8 that also sends an MSB of 4 and an LSB of 2 on channel 1. The example starts with the most complex variation of this and removes the bank select and channel to become more broad:

PC3.1:7@0, 3.1:7@0, 3:7@0, 3:7, 7@0, 7

Control changes are similar except that the left side of the syntax is the control change number and the right side is an optional value. If the value is not provided, 127 is sent instead. We will send Control Change 106 with a value of 64 on channel 3.

CC105:63@2, CC105:63. CC105@2, CC105

Now let's take a look at note events. We want to play C4 on channel 8 at 75% velocity, we would enter the following because OnSong starts counting MIDI C0 as 0 on the MIDI note scale:

N60:95@7, N60@7, N60:95, N60

Again, it is important to remember that as values are removed from the MIDI syntax, the MIDI statement becomes more broad and less specific. For instance, the last version of the note event will send C4 at 100% velocity on all channels.

HTML

The Hypertext Markup Language or HTML is what is used to create web pages that you browse on the Internet. In some cases you may save chord charts as HTML files that can then be imported into OnSong. OnSong can view these files using the built-in viewer and can also convert these files into text. The quality of the conversion depends on how the HTML file was authored. For instance, you may receive navigation or hidden text from the conversion.

JPEG

If you have lots of paper chord charts, you may opt to scan those documents into a digital form. One method you could save files is as a JPEG image. You could also use JPEG images for lyrics projection backgrounds. OnSong can import both file types and determines their use automatically.

About

JPEG images are typically used for photography since the compression algorithm can be used without noticeable loss of quality. However, as the compression is increased, the artifacts may become apparent and the image may blur and lose quality as a result. OnSong can read JPEG files, but it may not display properly depending on size and complexity of the image. OnSong recommends a scan setting of 100 DPI greyscale if you intend to use scanned paper documents in OnSong. Since a chord chart may span more than one page, you may choose to scan as a PDF document.

Scanned Chord Charts

If the image is in a portrait orientation, or if the scan is landscape and the average color of all four corners has an average brightness greater than 93%, then the image is considered a chord chart.

Lyrics Projection Backgrounds

If the image is in the landscape orientation and not consider to be a paper scan, then the image is imported into your image media library. You can then use that background in the External Video Menu using the Background Image Picker toggle button.

Microsoft Word

Microsoft Word is one of the most popular word processing applications available. You may have many chord charts available in that format. OnSong can read, view, and convert both the older DOC file format as well as the newer DOCX format.

To learn more about Microsoft Word, please visit http://office.microsoft.com/word.

Converting

Word processing files can be challenging to convert into text-based chord charts. This is because files are often written in variable-width fonts that make a space character much narrower than other characters. While this is easier on the eye while reading, it can cause the author of the chord chart to use many more spaces to align chords on lines above lyrics. Other word processor specific features (like tabs or text boxes) may also have been used making the alignment of chords difficult because both of these layout tools are not used in text-based file formats.

You will usually need to adjust chords after converting them to text. OnSong provides various tools to assist with this process. Please see the Text Tools Menu for details.

Viewing

Word files are viewed "as-is" using the built-in web viewer of iOS. This means that any issues regarding the viewing of these files is related to how iOS interprets them. For instance, some users have reported formatting or font changes when viewed on an iPad versus Microsoft Word. OnSong has no way to correct these rendering issues as the file format is relatively closed and display of the file is handled by iOS.

Another common issue is found when viewing DOCX files in Word. There appears to be a bug in iOS 7 and higher that may cause a crash when more than one DOCX file is loaded concurrently. OnSong takes steps to limit this behavior and avoid the crash condition.

MIDI Files

MIDI files contain up to 16 channels of MIDI commands and are written in such a way to support playback of those songs on a MIDI-compatible instrument. OnSong supports MIDI files as backing tracks in OnSong which can be linked to chord charts and played. This allows synthesizer apps as well as virtual and MIDI-enabled instruments to playback the MIDI stream. You can also use this to configure more advanced MIDI commands to be sent for configuration when a song loads or when you trigger playback.

When you import audio files directly into OnSong, they are added to your OnSong audio media library where you can link them to chord charts as backing tracks.

MP3

When OnSong imports MP3 files, it actually does a few things. If the MP3 file contains lyrics, it creates a chord chart based on the attributes of the song and its lyrics.

The MP3 file is then importing into the OnSong audio media library and optionally associated with the created chord chart. This allows you to bypass using iTunes to synchronize audio tracks for linking chord charts to backing tracks.

MPEG-4 Audio

The M4A file type is primarily associated with 'MPEG-4 Audio Layer'. Files in .M4A format are actually the audio layer of (non-video) MPEG 4 movies. M4A is slated to become the new standard for audio file compression. This format is also known as Apple Lossless, Apple Lossless Encoder, or ALE. It is a new codec designed to provide lossless encoding in less storage space.

When you import audio files directly into OnSong, they are added to your OnSong audio media library where you can link them to chord charts as backing tracks.

MPEG-4 Video

M4V and MP4 files contain MPEG-4 video streams. OnSong imports video files directly in your OnSong image media library allowing your to set the background image or motion graphics in Lyrics Projection.

Video files should be 720p or 1080p for best quality and support looping for seamless motion backgrounds.

OnSong Archive

The OnSong Archive file format is used internally by OnSong to transfer a song, collections of songs, or an entire set. It includes all the information required to restore this information in another OnSong library including the song content, attachments, styles, settings, transposition, and annotations. This file is intended to be imported and exported from OnSong and cannot be easily read with other software.

The OnSong Archive file format has a file extension of either .archive or .onsongarchive.

OnSong File Format

The OnSong file format is a text file that is written in a way to give a song musical meaning. It typically has a .onsong file extension, although OnSong understands any type of plain text file and can render it as an OnSong-formatted file. This format uses special characters to attribute meaning to different parts of a song.

Apps for Editing Plain Text

The first thing to know is that an OnSong file is a plain text document. This makes it very easy to edit on any platform with included software.

  • On OS X open TextEdit from your Applications folder. TextEdit is a general purpose word processing program that can also edit plain text files. Be sure to switch to plain text by choose Make Plain Text from the Format menu.
  • On Windows open the Notepad application from the Start menu.

To follow along with the rest of this tutorial, download this Example OnSong File and open it in your application of choice.

Sections

The first thing to know about the OnSong file format is that it can be divided into sections. Sections are typically used to divide verses from the chorus or bridge. They can also be used to divide a verse into two separate stanzas for lyrics projection, or to make things easier to read. You can even label sections if desired.

Metadata

Metadata is information about the song which is always contained in the first section. Typically these are provided in name/value pairs separated by a colon, each being placed on its own line. You can also set the title and artist of the song as the first and second lines in the file.

Chords and Lyrics

Chords are placed to align with certain words or phrases. OnSong supports two kinds of chord formatting: Bracketed Chords and Chords Over Lyrics.

ChordPro

While the OnSong format does much of what you need in a chord chart, the ChordPro format has a few other tricks up its sleeve. You can use ChordPro syntax interchangeably for advanced options.

Line Formatting

Want to bold or highlight a line of lyrics? OnSong uses special characters to format your chord chart for harmony parts, or to make things stand out.

Pages

You can now define separate pages in your chord chart which can be used to force page breaks for printing.

Chords and Lyrics

Chords and lyrics represent the content of your song and can be expressed either as bracketed chords or as chords over lyrics. Place this content in sections to divide your song into its logical parts.

Bracketed Chords

With bracketed chords, you place the chords on the same line as the lyrics, but surround the chord with square brackets. Here is an example of this format:

Verse 1:
Amazing [D]Grace, how [G]sweet the [D]sound,
That saved a wretch like [A7]me.
I on[D]ce was lost, but [G]now am [D]found,
Was blind, but [A7]now I [D]see.

Bracketed chords are the preferred method of expressing chords in the OnSong File Format and in the ChordPro File Format.

Chords Over Lyrics

The other way to express chords in lyrics is to place the chords on a line above the lyrics and use space characters to align the chords with lyrics. This is supported since most music found in other formats use this technique. Here is an example of chords over lyrics:

Verse 1:
        D           G        D
Amazing Grace, how sweet the sound,
                         A7
That saved a wretch like me.
  D                  G      D
I once was lost, but now am found,
               A7    D
Was blind, but now I see.

It's important to note that if non-chord words are found on a line of chords, that OnSong will reject that line and not detect the chords. Please move any musical instructions or notes to the following line to avoid this. One exception to this rule is if you surround instructions in parenthesis. This will allow the chord line to be detected. You can also start the line with a period or a back tick character to force the line to be detected as chords like this:

.I Am Chords
`I Am Also

Comments

If you want to create comments in your song that will not appear on the screen, prefix the line with a "#" symbol.

# This line will not appear in the song viewer, only in the song editor.

Line Formatting

Line formatting in OnSong lets you add characters to your lines in the song editor to apply basic formatting in your song viewer.

To do this, choose a song and open the song editor by tapping the pen icon in the menubar. You can then place special characters in front of lines to add formatting like this:

*This line will be bold
/This line will be italicized
!This line will be bold and italicized
&red:This text will be red
𞉀:This text will be a custom color using HTML color codes
>yellow:This line will be highlighted in yellow

If you want to use a custom color code, note that it starts an a # symbol. This is a hexadecimal representation of color used on web pages. Use a color picker website to compose colors and then type the 6 characters into this area in your OnSong document.

You can even also combine these line formatting commands for more complex scenarios.

Color Code

You can use custom colors in line formatting using the HTML color code syntax. This requires a hexadecimal value preceded by a pound sign. This is an example of using a custom color:

>#00C6B3:This line will be highlighted in teal

HTML color codes divide a color into three parts: red, green and blue. Every two characters of the color code represents the amount of color to be applied. Colors are 24 bit which results in more than 16.7 million color combinations which far exceeds the eye's ability to perceive a difference in those colors. Each component is 8 bits which results in a value from 0 through 255.

Hexadecimal encoding uses numbers and the alphabetic letters A through F to represent numbers. A through F represent decimal values 10 through 15. Using this method, 0-255 can be represented in two characters. The first character in the two-character sequence represent 0-15 multiplied by 16. The second character is added to that in the range of 0-15.

In the example above, 00 is simply a red value of 0. That was easy, right? The value C6 is C or the decimal value 12 multiplied by 16 which results in 192 and then 6 is added to that for a final value of 198. Likewise, B3 is the value of B or 11 multiplied by 16 which results in 176 and then the 3 is added to that for 179. Thus, the RGB (red, green, blue) values are 0, 198 and 179.

Now that you know how to do this, you may be happy to know that there are utilities available to help you pick colors and give you that HTML color code without all the mental gymnastics. We recommend colorpicker.com to help you blend colors and use the resulting HTML color code.

Color Names

Line formatting can change the text color or the highlight color. You can use named colors to achieve this. Here is a line of named colors you can use:

Standard Colors

The standard named color can be used.

  • black
  • blue
  • brown
  • clear
  • cyan
  • darkGray
  • gray
  • green
  • lightGray
  • magenta
  • orange
  • pink
  • purple
  • red
  • white
  • yellow

Special Colors

The following are special colors that can be used:

  • onsong is a bright teal color that matches the OnSong brand.
  • paper is the color of the current paper background color.

Metadata

Metatags are a way to provide information about a song and is expressed in a metadata section. Metadata is expressed in the first section of the song before the first blank line or until no more metatags are encountered. Metatags are name/value pairs where the name is on the left and value on the right separated by a colon. Only one metatag can appear per line. Please reference the ChordPro File Format for details on how to express metadata in the ChordPro format.

OnSong automatically assigns the first line of a text file as the title of the song if it is not in the metatag format. In addition, the second line is considered the artist/byline of the song unless a metatag is defined. The following is an example of a typical song metadata section that sets the title and artist as the first and second lines as well as the key and tempo.

Amazing Grace
Daniel Thomas
Key: D
Tempo: 76

Lyrics and chords start here...

Supported Tags

The following tags are supported by OnSong:

  • Title: The title of the song. This can also be expressed on the first line of the song content.
  • Artist: The artist name or any other byline information. This can also be expressed on the second line of the song content. You can specify multiple artists by separating names with a semi-colon. - Kim Walker-Smith; Chris Quilala
  • Author: The name of the person who created the chord chart. This is displayed at the bottom of the chord chart and in lyrics projection.
  • Key: The key of the song written as a key with enharmonic preference and an optional "m" to indicate minor. - alphabetic, e.g. Bb or Em
  • Capo: The capo to set as number of frets. - numeric
  • Tempo: The beats per minute (BPM). - numeric
  • Time: The time signature. - numeric beat over bar e.g. 3/4
  • Duration: The song length for autoscroll. - seconds or mm:ss
  • Book: The name of the book or books to place the song into. This is a comma-delimited list of book names into which the song will be placed. If the book does not exist, it will be automatically created as well.
  • Number: The number of the song - numeric. Use for hymns, years, etc. You can sort songs by the number for reference.
  • Flow: The arrangement of sections. - list of section labels. See Flow for details on arranging the flow of a song.
  • MIDI: The MIDI commands to send when the song is viewed. See MIDI Syntax for how to express MIDI commands as text in OnSong.
  • MIDI-Index: The MIDI commands that will trigger this song to be opened in the Song Viewer. See MIDI Syntax for how to express MIDI commands as text in OnSong.
  • Keywords: or Topic: The list of tags to use with topic search. See Topics for more information on browsing by topic.
  • Copyright: or Footer: The copyright information of the song. This will appear at the bottom of the chord chart and lyrics projection.
  • CCLI: The CCLI number of the song. This will appear at the bottom of the chord chart and lyrics projection.
  • Restrictions: These are restrictions that prevent certain actions from taking place within a song. See Restrictions for details on setting restrictions for your song.
  • Pitch: The note or notes to play when using the Pitch Pipe feature. This is defined as a space-separated list of notes with optional octaves. - e.g. A3 C#4 E5

Note: Metatags are not case sensitive

Flow

Flow is a way to write the sections of a song once and then arrange the song in a top-down format. For instance, you may want the song to play the first verse, chorus, second verse and then repeat the chorus twice. Instead of rewriting the chorus multiple times, you can express this in a flow metatag or temporarily using the Flow field in the Playback Menu.

Expressing Flow

The first step to using flow is to create Sections and label them. You can specify a flow using a metatag in shorthand like this:

Flow: V1 C V2 C C B C C

You can also write them in a longhand form by writing out the full name of the sections in a comma-delimited list like this:

Flow: Verse 1, Chorus, Verse 2, Chorus, Chorus, Bridge, Chorus, Chorus

OnSong creates the shorthand version by using the first character of each word in the section name. This means you do not have to use special names for this to work. In the case of a conflict, OnSong will use the first section matching the abbreviation.

Pages and Instructions

You can also use flow to add musical instruction and page breaks in the flow definition instead of in the song content. You can do this by entering flow information that does not match a section label. Because the values you may want to output may contain spaces, you will want to use the comma-delimited method. Here's an example of adding musical instruction and page breaks.

Flow: Verse 1, Chorus, Verse 2, Chorus, (Repeat 2x), ----, Bridge, Chorus, (Repeat 2x)

This will output the musical instructions (Repeat 2x) under each chorus. The four hyphens will force a page break between the first set of choruses and the bridge.

MIDI Syntax

OnSong uses a text-based syntax for expressing MIDI commands. While you can use the MIDI Events in the Metadata Editor, you can also express MIDI commands in text.

Delimited Values

First and foremost, multiple MIDI commands can be separated by various characters including: a tab character, comma, semi-colon, vertical pipe, or new line. The comma is the most common delimiter. For example:

1.2:0@0, PC1.2:3@0, N67@1, START, SS8

Channel

Each entry may contain an @ symbol. The numeric value after the symbol is the channel on which the command is to be sent. Since channels in MIDI start on zero, channel one would be a zero (0), channel two a one (1), etc.

If no @ symbol is used, the command is sent or received on all channels.

Prefixes

Each entry in the list contains a prefix. This prefix determines what type of MIDI command to send. These include:

  • PC or No Prefix is a program change event.
  • N is a note event
  • CC is a control change event.
  • SS is a song select event.
  • START is a start command.
  • STOP is a stop command.
  • CONTINUE is a continue command.
  • F0 prefixes a SysEx message.

Values

The value of the command appears just before the @ symbol or at the end of the entry if no @ is given. This is the value of the program change, control change, note, or song select based on the prefix. In the case of SysEx entries, the hexadecimal value of the SysEx is provided directly after the F0 prefix which is used as a header to all SysEx commands.

Subvalues

In some cases, additional information is conveyed in the MIDI command as subvalues. For instance, MSB and LSB, as well as velocity of control values can be sent this way. This is expressed through the addition of a colon in the value portion. The subvalue has different context depending on the type of MIDI command sent:

  • Program Change has subvalues aligning with the MSB/LSB of the program change. These values are separated by a period with the MSB on the left and the LSB on the right.
  • Control Change has the value of the control set using this. The number can be between 0 and 127. If omitted, the value of 127 is inferred.
  • Note Event has a subvalue relating to the velocity at which the note should be played. This can be set to a numerical value between 0 and 127.

Examples

Let's start with a simple program change. In this scenario we use program change 8 that also sends an MSB of 4 and an LSB of 2 on channel 1. The example starts with the most complex variation of this and removes the bank select and channel to become more broad:

PC3.1:7@0, 3.1:7@0, 3:7@0, 3:7, 7@0, 7

Control changes are similar except that the left side of the syntax is the control change number and the right side is an optional value. If the value is not provided, 127 is sent instead. We will send Control Change 106 with a value of 64 on channel 3.

CC105:63@2, CC105:63. CC105@2, CC105

Now let's take a look at note events. We want to play C4 on channel 8 at 75% velocity, we would enter the following because OnSong starts counting MIDI C0 as 0 on the MIDI note scale:

N60:95@7, N60@7, N60:95, N60

Again, it is important to remember that as values are removed from the MIDI syntax, the MIDI statement becomes more broad and less specific. For instance, the last version of the note event will send C4 at 100% velocity on all channels.

Restrictions

Restrictions prevent certain actions from being performed on a song. You can list these restrictions by name in a comma-delimited list as a metatag. For instance:

Restrictions: Print, Export, Distribute

The following are actions that can be set as a restriction. To remove restrictions, you can't just remove the metatag. Instead, set it to None. Also, if you want to prevent other users from changing your restrictions, add the Rights restriction as well.

  • None removes restrictions from the metadata section. If selected, all other check marked restrictions are unchecked.
  • Edit prevents the song from being edited.
  • Print prevents the song from being printed.
  • Export prevents OnSong from exporting the file.
  • Share prevents the OnSong user from sharing the file in any manner.
  • Email prevents the song from being transferred via email.
  • Upload prevents the song from being uploaded to a remote server.
  • Project prevents the song from being displayed in lyrics projection.
  • Distribute prevents the song from being distributed to other sources.
  • Rights prevents further rights and restrictions from being set.

Pages

Chord charts in OnSong are outputted in a single page and scrolled from the top to the bottom in a continuous view. When printing the chord chart, it is automatically divided. You can force page breaks for printing, or for scrolling by pages as another method to set scroll markers.

To add a page break, type four hyphens in a row on a single line. For instance:

Verse 1:
This is the end of the first verse.
Just before we start the second one.

----

Verse 2:
This is the second verse now,
And then we are done.

Sections

The OnSong file format allows you to create different sections in your music. These sections are defined by inserting a blank line between lines of text. The first section of the song is considered the metadata section where you place your metatags. This is where you can set the key, tempo, and other attributes of the song. See Metadata for information on setting information about your song.

After the first blank line, each section contains Chords and Lyrics.

Labels

Each section can be labeled with a name. You can label your sections by typing a name on the first line of the section (followed with a colon), and then follow it with a new line. In the song viewer this appears above the lyrics in a bold typeface and can also be used to arrange the Flow of your song. The named section continues until another label is encountered, allowing you to divide a section further into stanzas.

Musical Instructions

You may want to provide musicians with instructions that you don't want to appear in lyrics projection. OnSong allows you to surround text on a line with parenthesis, allowing it to appear in a different color and not be output for lyrics projection. You can adjust the color of musical instructions under Settings Display Settings Song Formatting Instructions.

OpenOffice Text

OpenOffice is a free, open-source office suite available on nearly any operating system. This software includes "Writer" which saves word processing documents as "ODT" files. OnSong can view these files as well as convert them to text.

For more information about OpenOffice, please visit the OpenOffice website.

OpenSong

This format is used by a variety of open source lyrics and music programs. It stores metadata in XML and lyrics/chords as plain text. Chord lines are delineated by a period at the beginning of the line. The file extension is (.xml)

Other

OnSong can display any type of file that iOS can display in the built-in web viewer. We cannot guarantee the usability of these formats beyond that. For instance, you could import a Microsoft PowerPoint presentation which may view slides vertically. This may not be what you expect. Please use a supported file format for better results or a text-based chord chart for best results.

Plain Text

OnSong can import plain text files just as it would OnSong or ChordPro files. In fact, all of these files are treated as the text-based chord chart and editable in the Song Editor. This means that you can write your songs with a .txt file extension and OnSong will recognize the file as either:

OnSong File Format

The OnSong file format is the native text-based chord chart format of OnSong that uses simple text and human-readable syntax to create chord charts.

ChordPro File Format

The ChordPro file format is used by other applications and has a syntax similar to the OnSong file format. Instead of using reader-friendly syntax, it uses curly braces to define "tags". These tags provide information about the song structure.

Portable Network Graphics (PNG)

Portable Network Graphic or PNG files are used to replace older graphic image formats on the web. They are becoming more common in new devices because of their higher quality, lossless compression, and are not encumbered by third-party royalty fees.

About

While OnSong can read PNG files, it may not display properly depending on size and complexity of the image. OnSong recommends a scan setting of 100 DPI greyscale if you intend to use scanned paper documents in OnSong. Since a chord chart may span more than one page, you may choose to scan as a PDF document for better results.

Scanned Chord Charts

If the image is in a portrait orientation, or if the scan is landscape and the average color of all four corners has an average brightness greater than 93%, then the image is considered a chord chart.

Lyrics Projection Backgrounds

If the image is in the landscape orientation and not consider to be a paper scan, then the image is imported into your image media library. You can then use that background in the External Video Menu using the Background Image Picker toggle button.

QuickTime Movie

A powerful multimedia technology with a built-in media player, QuickTime lets you view internet video, HD movie trailers, and personal media in a wide range of file formats. OnSong supports QuickTime video that is supported by iOS and has the .mov file extension.

OnSong imports video files directly in your OnSong image media library allowing your to set the background image or motion graphics in Lyrics Projection. Video files should be 720p or 1080p for best quality and support looping for seamless motion backgrounds.

Rich Text File

The Rich Text Format, or RTF for short, is an interchange format created by Microsoft and understood by many types of word processing applications. OnSong can read, view, and convert RTF files to text.

To learn more about the Rich Text Format, please visit http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Rich_Text_Format.

SongSelect USR

SongSelect USR is a file format used for transferring lyrics in file form. OnSong will import this file format and convert it into the OnSong file format for internal use and editing.

SongShowPlus

SongShowPlus is lyrics projection software for Microsoft Windows. OnSong can read and automatically convert files exported in the SongShowPlus file format.

To learn more about SongShowPlus, please visit their website at http://songshowplus.com.

TIFF

The Tagged Image File Format or TIFF is commonly used in scanning and desktop publishing applications due to it's scope of compression options. OnSong can view TIFF images, but it may not display properly depending on size and complexity of the image. OnSong recommends a scan setting of 100 DPI greyscale if you intend to use scanned paper documents in OnSong. Since a chord chart may span more than one page, you may choose to scan as a PDF document for better results.

Waveform Audio File Format

Waveform Audio File Format (WAVE, or more commonly known as WAV due to its filename extension) is a Microsoft and IBM audio file format standard for storing an audio bitstream on PCs. It is the main format used on Windows systems for raw and typically uncompressed audio.

When you import audio files directly into OnSong, they are added to your OnSong audio media library where you can link them to chord charts as backing tracks.

Synchronization

OnSong is designed to store your library on your device. This allows you to access your songs anywhere you go without the need for an Internet connection. This means if you have multiple devices like an iPad and an iPhone, they both will have separate libraries.

OnSong provides the ability to synchronize your library between devices using a cloud-based storage service like Dropbox. For more details, open the Songs Menu and tap on the + button on the bottom right to view the Add Songs screen. Choose a storage method under the Synchronize section in the list.

Timeline

Timeline enables you to record navigation events and then play them back to give you flexible, hands-free control of your music.

All you need to do is either set a duration of your song for linear autoscrolling, or choose timeline to start recording and scroll through the song just as you want it to in a live scenario. Even tap on sections to project lyrics, send MIDI commands or switch scenes for automated control over your performance.

To configure timeline for autoscroll, see Live Bar » Autoscroll.

Autoscroll now can automates your performance!

Transposition

Let's face facts. Sometimes a song is not performed in a key that is suitable for your vocal range. Or perhaps playing a song in the key that it is written in is too difficult for your guitarist and they don't want to capo. Music is best when it matches with your talent. OnSong provides a powerful transposition engine to make the music match your unique abilities and style.

How It Works

Chord charts can be expressed as text-based documents using the OnSong or ChordPro file formats. These files are designed to give musical meaning to characters in the document. This allows chords to be detected.

Transposition also requires the key of the original song to be known. You can declare a key using Metadata. If the key of the song is unknown, OnSong typically uses the first chord of the song as the key. You can change this behavior in Settings Menu Settings Style Preferences Transpose and Capo Detect Key By.

When transposition occurs, OnSong determines the new key and the enharmonic preference of transposed chords using the enharmonic preference of the new key. You can change this behavior in Settings Display Settings Song Formatting Enharmonic.

Note: Transposition does not work with externally imported documents like Word or PDF because these files are designed to be printed and do not carry information about chords or metadata needed for musicians. The design goals of these types documents are different from OnSong's text-based chord charts. The content written in word processing documents are not in a standardized format and is often proprietary in nature.

How To Transpose

Once you have your song in a text-based document and chords are detected, you can transpose using the Transpose Slider found in the Style Preferences Menu in the Menubar. Just slide the slider to the left or right to adjust the key. You can even tap on the icons to the left and right to fine-tune adjust the key.

If you want the chords to be displayed as they are written in the Song Editor, turn off transposition using the power icon to the right of the Transpose Slider found in the Style Preferences Menu in the Menubar.

Using Different Keys

The notion of dynamic transposition means that you can have one copy of your song and make changes in one place. However, you may need to have the song available in different keys when playing with different bands or at different venues. OnSong can use a different key for the song in a particular set while keeping the original key in the master song list.

To do this, turn on Separate Set/Song Styles when Adding or Renaming sets. This will now store changes made to the song when viewed in the set to the set. For instance you can change the tempo, autoscroll duration, flow, and style preferences and all will be applied to that song in the set.

Universal

OnSong is a universal app which means the same app runs on the iPad, iPhone and iPod touch. The user interface adapts to the device platform that you are using. For instance on an iPad, OnSong will use popover menus to provide access to songs and transposition. On an iPhone, this happens using model screen and navigation. Let's take a look at some of these differences.

Popover Menus versus Navigation Screen

The first thing you'll notice is that things are organized a little differently on smaller screens. The first screen you will see is the Songs Menu which takes up the entire screen. Tap on a song or set to slide over to the song viewer.

Song Viewer Toolbar

Song Editor Changes

Other Tweaks

WorshipReady.com

WorshipReady.com provides handcrafted chord charts for use on a number of platforms including Planning Center, PDF and OnSong. Access to content is through subscription only and limits the number of chord charts you can download per month based on your subscription level.

For more details about this service, or to sign up, please visit http://worshipready.com.

Using WorshipReady.com

You can access WorshipReady.com chord charts by importing them right inside of OnSong. Just sign in, find a chart, and download it right into your OnSong library.

User Interface

OnSong is designed to let you focus on what's important, your music. On a tablet device like the iPad, your music appears first. On handheld devices like the iPhone, the first screen to appear is the Songs Menu. On smaller devices like the iPhone or iPod touch, you'll need to select a song before accessing the main interface due to limited screen real estate.

The OnSong interface is divided into these main areas:

Status Bar

The status bar is provided by the operating system and provides information such as the current time, networking, and battery status.

Menubar

The menubar contains access to all the functions for managing your library and the songs you are viewing.

Song Viewer

Most of the main interface displays the currently active song. There are special regions that overlay the song viewer which provide tools you can use while performing.

Live Bar

In the lower right portion of the screen is the live bar which contains large buttons that can be activated during a live performance. These include autoscrolling, starting and stopping a backing track, starting or stopping the metronome, and toggling ad-hoc networking mode.

Registration Screen

When you open OnSong, the Registration or Getting Started screen is displayed. You can prevent this window from opening in the getting started screen once you have the information you need to make the most out of OnSong.

You may also be prompted to opt into push notifications. OnSong intends to use push notifications to notify our users of an emergency or to pass along time-sensitive information.

Compact Mode

OnSong works best on iPad as it has a much larger screen for viewing your music. But that doesn't mean you can't use an iPhone or iPod Touch. OnSong makes a view changes to adapt to the smaller screen size.

Songs Menu

Just like on the iPad, you access your songs and sets by tapping on the Songs button in the upper left corner. Instead of a popover, the menu will open full screen and be hidden once you select a song.

Heads-Up Display

The title of the song appears in the middle of the top menubar. You can change what is viewed there by swiping right or left, just like on the iPad.

Utilities Menu

Just like on the iPad, the gear icon provides access to the Utilities Menu where you can access editors, tools and settings.

Toolbar

The tools that are normally found in the menubar at the top of the screen are moved to a toolbar at the bottom of the screen. This allows easier access when using OnSong on a handheld device and also makes more room at the top for the heads-up display.

The toolbar removes the Foot Pedal Menu, but that is still available under the Utilities Menu » Editors » Navigation » Pedals. The Messages Menu may also be removed on very small screens.

Song Editor

While most of the menus are the same or similar, the Song Editor makes some more changes due to the compact size.

Toolbar

When using OnSong on iPhone or iPod Touch, access to many menus is moved to the bottom of the screen via a toolbar. The following items can bet accessed:

Share Menu

This icon looks like an up arrow in a box and allows you to share the current song or set in a variety of ways including exporting, emailing, printing, and sharing wirelessly.

External Video Menu

This menu button looks like a computer monitor and lets you configure an external monitor or projector for use with OnSong. Using an Apple Dock Connector to VGA Adapter, Apple Digital AV Adapter, or AirPlay and an AppleTV, you can use OnSong to project lyrics for an audience, or to display chord charts on a monitor on stage.

Playback Menu

This icon looks like a pair of headphones and lets you set an audio track to play along with while viewing the chord sheet. It also lets you configure the metronome tempo and time signature, as well as setting a duration of the song for autoscroll. You can also find new versions of that song through the integrated iTunes search.

Messages Menu

Using this menu, screen taps and foot pedal presses can send messages to your team. Use these to communicate more effectively in live performances.

This button may be removed on smaller screen sizes.

Organizer Menu

The organizer menu is used to place the currently loaded song into a set, book or to mark a song with an icon such as a star. When the song has an icon associated with it, the star icon in the menu bar is enabled.

Song Editor

This icon opens the song editor. The song editor allows you to make changes to the song's chords, lyrics, and metadata as well as tools to assist you in editing songs, or even writing them from scratch.

Annotations Menu

This icon looks like a sticky note and allows you to easily add sticky notes or drawings to your chord chart. These can help remind you of things such as who starts the song or how it is played.

Style Preferences Menu

This icon looks like a series of sliders and allows you to quickly change how your song sheet looks and acts. In this menu you can change font sizes and styles, highlight colors, and transpose/capo the song. You can also turn portions of the song on and off such as the header, lyrics, chords, tablature, and whether the capo should be applied.

Gestures

You can use gestures to quickly show and hide the menubar as well as show the songs menu. These gestures are only available on iPad.

Close Screens

If you've opened a modal screen in OnSong, you can close it by swiping down on the top navigation bar.

Scroll To Top

Depending on the number of songs you have, you may have very long lists. If you want to quickly get to the top of most lists, tap on the title in the navigation bar at the top to be taken to the top of the list.

Show Songs Menu

The songs menubar can be displayed by swiping from the left or right edges of the screen depending on the orientation of the menubar. If the Songs button is on the left, then swipe from the left. If the Songs button is on the right, then swipe from the right. The swipe must originate off of the screen.

Hide Menubar

You can tap in the middle of the screen to toggle the menubar visibility. However, you can also swipe up on the menubar to hide it.

Show Menubar

You can use the overscroll gesture to show the menubar when it is hidden. Pull down on the song viewer as you would when refreshing a list in other apps. This will trigger the menubar to show again.

Live Bar

Playing live uses all of your concentration and usually most of your limbs as well. Triggering events for live performance needs to be easy. The live bar in OnSong is designed to provide large buttons for controlling live performance events, as well as a visual status of each function.

Tapping on a live bar button starts or stops its function. Tapping and holding on a live bar button will open a menu allowing you to configure properties. The following buttons can be contained in the livebar. You can also turn these buttons on or off in the Utilities Menu Editors Navigation Screen Tab. You can also accomplish this in Settings Live Settings Live Bar On-Screen Buttons.

The live bar consists of:

Audio

The audio live bar button is used start, pause or stop backing tracks. Tap and hold to choose a different track, or to link to a custom track from your iTunes Music library.

Autoscroll

Playing live necessitates using all your hands, feet and fingers. But what if your chord chart is longer than the screen can contain? Autoscroll provides a solution by slowly scrolling the chord chart from top to bottom over a duration.

Metronome

Playing with a click track is great for practice, or to get your band started on a song. The metronome in OnSong stores the BPM for each song letting you start at the right tempo every time.

Networking

OnSong can be used to share and stream what's on your screen wirelessly to your team. The networking livebar button lets you turn sharing on and off.

Audio

The audio playback live bar button is flexible to meet the needs of live performers. By default, the button is designed to start and pause a backing track. Double-tapping on the audio live bar button when playing or stopped will cause the song to beginning at the beginning of the track as a repeat function.

OnSong automatically selects a track from your libraries with the same name as the chord chart. This means the only requirement is to have an audio track with the same name of your chord chart in your music library. OnSong searches both your iTunes music library as well as it's internal OnSong audio media library. See Adding Tracks to your iTunes Music Library for details on how to accomplish adding audio tracks to your iTunes music library. Your OnSong audio media library can be completely managed from inside of the app using the OnSong Audio Media Library.

Picking Audio Tracks

If you have multiple tracks available in your libraries and need to choose a different track, or if you need to choose a track with a different name, tap and hold on the audio live bar button to open the Audio Track Picker and choose a different track, or link to a specific track using the Choose Custom Track option.

Configuring Audio Playback

You can configure how OnSong plays backing tracks in settings. For more details on these options, please see Settings Live Settings Live Bar Audio.

iTunes Music Library

OnSong can link chord charts in your OnSong library to audio tracks in your iTunes Music Library on your device. You can browse your iTunes Music Library using the built-in Music app from your device's home screen. Apple provides tools and services to help you get your music onto your device.

History

In the days of the iPod music player as well as the first iPhone devices, you put music on your device using iTunes. iTunes is free software that was required to instantiate and manage your device. Since that time, Apple has moved away from requiring you to connect your device to a Mac or PC, making the iPad and iPhones standalone products.

iTunes

Most users who purchase iPad or iPhone are familiar with iTunes. In fact, the App Store is an extension of the iTunes store which sells apps instead of music, videos, and more. The iTunes application not only acts as media management software, but also as a portal to this large ecosystem of music, TV shows, movies and of course apps.

Misconceptions

That being said, there's a misconception that you need to purchase content from iTunes in order to use it on your iPad or iPhone. You can use iTunes to manage your own audio tracks or tracks from other vendors such as Amazon. However, Apple has made it very easy and convenient to purchase music legally through their iTunes store which is why many believe that is the only way.

Transferring Music

There are a few ways to get music onto your iPad or iPhone. The first and original way is to plug your device into a computer running iTunes. Next, add music in your iTunes library. Remember that you can do this either by purchasing content on the iTunes store, using software that bounces or adds tracks to iTunes (such as GarageBand), or by simply dragging MP3, AAC or other supported file formats into the iTunes window.

iTunes sorts and manages your tracks from any source. You can then use choose your device from the iTunes user interface and synchronize or "Apply" your music to the device. Learn more about adding, importing and converting music using iTunes

Music in the Cloud

With the advent of iCloud, Apple has made getting music to play on your device even easier with iTunes in the Cloud and iTunes Music Match. These services allow you to access your music on your device without having the music physically stored on the device. For most people this is convenient because their music collections are large, not always listened to, and would take up significant space on their device.

While OnSong can play music from iCloud, there may be a delay as the song is streamed and buffered for playback. Make sure that you download music for live performances to your device before playing. That will ensure that network problems do not inhibit your performance and provides for smoother and immediate playback of your audio. Learn more about iTunes in the Cloud

Audio Track Picker

The audio track picker displays all tracks that match the current chord chart by name. In addition, this menu will display a custom track that you've picked. For each track, the album artwork is displayed (if available) as well as the track name and artist.

Audio Playback Settings

Tapping on the wrench icon will open a screen allowing you to change audio playback settings. Tap Done to save changes and close the screen, or tap on Cancel to close the screen without saving changes.

Linking To Matching Audio Tracks

Tap on the audio track you want to associate with the chord chart. By default, OnSong will link the first found track when matched by name. A checkmark will appear next to the track to indicate the currently linked track. If you would like to unlink the track from the chord chart, tap on the checked track to uncheck it. This will result in no audio track being associated with the chord chart.

Linking To Custom Audio Tracks

To choose a track from your iTunes Music Library or OnSong Media Library, tap on the Choose Custom Track row in the menu. This will open the Choose Custom Track menu that allows you to browse for music.

iCloud Music Matching

Please note that tracks found by matching the name of the chord chart to the audio track may include audio tracks found in iCloud. You can remove these as options in Settings Live Settings Live Bar Audio Show Music in iCloud.

Choose Custom Track

If you want to link a custom audio track to your chord chart, you must first decide which library to pull from for playback. OnSong provides access to the following libraries.

iTunes Music Library

This option provides access to shared audio tracks that you can play using the Music app on your device. Linking audio tracks from your iTunes library has some advantages.

  • Tracks that are stored in iTunes in the Cloud or iTunes music match can be accessed using the iTunes music library.
  • Tracks that contain digital rights management may need to be played through the iTunes music library.
  • Tracks are not stored within your OnSong library making the storage requirements of your app and backups less.
  • Tracks are shared between multiple apps and can be played back from the Music app on your device.
  • Tracks can have playback metadata associated with them as configured in iTunes. For instance, you can adjust the output volume as well as start and end time points.
  • While OnSong does support background audio when playing music, if OnSong were to crash for any reason, the audio would stop. When using iTunes music library assets, the song can keep playing even in the event of an unlikely failure.

OnSong Media Library

Choose this option to manage audio files directly inside of OnSong without needing to use iTunes to manage your backing tracks.

The OnSong media library is stored inside of your OnSong library. This lets you import and manage audio tracks without using iTunes, but does require that the audio tracks are stored inside of the OnSong app. This means that your backup files will increase in size to contain the audio files.

Spotify Library

The Spotify Library screen let's you link Spotify tracks to your song in OnSong. You can access saved songs as well as followed artists in Your Music. You can also search the entire Spotify music catalog by song title, artist or album.

Authentication

If you haven't signed in yet, you'll be prompted with a Spotify login screen. Tap the Log In To Spotify button to login with your credentials.

If you don't have a Spotify account, you can create one at spotify.com or by signing in with Facebook on the Login Screen.

Spotify Library

Once you've authenticated into your Spotify account, you'll see the following tabs to access Spotify tracks:

  • Playlists browses for songs in all the playlists that you've created in Spotify.

  • Songs views all of the tracks that you've saved to Your Music under your Spotify account.

  • Artists displays all artists that you are following.

  • Albums shows albums that you have saved to Your Music under your Spotify account.

  • Search allows you to search for tracks by track, artist or album.

Note: You can tap on the close button in the upper right corner to close this screen at anytime.

Albums

The Albums tab lets you quickly browse albums that you've saved to Your Music in Spotify. Tap on an album to view its songs.

Cancel

Tap on the Cancel button in the upper-left corner to close the Spotify Library screen without linking a track.

Logout

Tap on the Logout button to sign out of Spotify, close the Spotify Library screen and start over with the Login Screen.

Viewing Songs

Tap on an album in the list to view a list of the songs contained in the album in the order they appear.

Songs

Once you've tapped on a album, you can view all of the songs in the album to link a song to the active chord chart.

Logout

Tap on the Logout button to sign out of Spotify, close the Spotify Library screen and start over with the Login Screen.

Linking Songs

The list of songs that is displayed and the songs found in the album. The list contains columns for the album artwork, track title, artist name, album name and duration. Tap on a track to link it to the active chord chart.

Artists

The artists tab displays all artists that you are following on Spotify.

Cancel

Tap on the Cancel button in the upper-left corner to close the Spotify Library screen without linking to a track.

Logout

Tap on the Logout button to sign out of Spotify, close the Spotify Library screen and start over with the Login Screen.

Viewing Albums

Tap on an artist row to view a list of albums you can use to browse to a Spotify track.

Albums

Tapping on an artist will reveal every album they have in the Spotify music catalog. Tap on an album to view its songs.

Logout

Tap on the Logout button to sign out of Spotify, close the Spotify Library screen and start over with the Login Screen.

Viewing Songs

Tap on an album in the list to view a list of the songs contained in the album in the order they appear.

Songs

Once you've tapped on a album, you can view all of the songs in the album to link a song to the active chord chart.

Logout

Tap on the Logout button to sign out of Spotify, close the Spotify Library screen and start over with the Login Screen.

Linking Songs

The list of songs that is displayed and the songs found in the album. The list contains columns for the album artwork, track title, artist name, album name and duration. Tap on a track to link it to the active chord chart.

Log In To Spotify

You can log into Spotify using either Facebook or your Spotify username and password.

Facebook

Tapping on the Log In With Facebook button will display the Facebook login screen to let you authenticate using your Facebook account. Once complete, you will be signed into your Facebook-linked Spotify account.

Spotify Login

You can also type in your Spotify username and password in the fields below. Checking the Remember me option will retain your login information in the web page that is used by Spotify to authenticate you. This has no no effect on OnSong unless authentication occurs automatically.

Forgot Username or Password

If yo have forgotten your username or password, tap on the Forgot your username or password link to recover your information.

Note: If you are not a Spotify user and choose to sign in with Facebook, you will automatically be registered and automatically agree to the Spotify Terms and Conditions and Privacy Policy.

Playlists

The playlists tab displays all playlists that you have created on Spotify.

Cancel

Tap on the Cancel button in the upper-left corner to close the Spotify Library screen without linking to a track.

Logout

Tap on the Logout button to sign out of Spotify, close the Spotify Library screen and start over with the Login Screen.

Viewing Songs

Tap on a playlist to view a list of songs in that playlist in the order that they appear.

Playlist Songs

Once you've tapped on a playlist, you can view all of the songs in the playlist to link a song to the active chord chart.

Logout

Tap on the Logout button to sign out of Spotify, close the Spotify Library screen and start over with the Login Screen.

Linking Songs

The list of songs that have been added to the playlist are displayed. The list contains columns for the album artwork, track title, artist name, album name and duration. Tap on a track to link it to the active chord chart.

Search

Use the Search tab to search the entire Spotify music catalog for a track.

Cancel

Tap on the Cancel button in the upper-left corner to close the Spotify Library screen without linking a track.

Search Bar

The search bar in the upper-right corner of the screen lets you enter keywords to search for. In addition, a menu to the right of the search bar allows you to search either the album, artist or track title.

Linking Songs

Once you've performed a search, the results appear in list format. This list contains columns for the album artwork, track title, artist name, album name and duration. Tap on a track to link it to active chord chart.

Songs

The Songs tab lets you quickly browse tracks you've saved to Your Music in Spotify. Once you've found a song, tap on it to link it to the active chord chart.

Cancel

Tap on the Cancel button in the upper-left corner to close the Spotify Library screen without linking a track.

Logout

Tap on the Logout button to sign out of Spotify, close the Spotify Library screen and start over with the Login Screen.

Linking Songs

Songs that you've saved to Your Music appears in list format on this screen. The list contains columns for the album artwork, track title, artist name, album name and duration. Tap on a track to link it to the active chord chart.

Audio Media Library

The OnSong audio media library screen features audio tracks that you've imported.

Adding Tracks

You can add tracks by importing audio track files just like any other file type. You can also import directly inside of the audio media library screen by tapping on the + button in the upper right corner to open the Import Files Menu.

Browsing Tracks

You can browse your tracks by artists, songs and albums with the default view being the songs list.

  • Artists groups your tracks by artist.
  • Songs displays a list of all songs in your OnSong audio media library indexed alphabetically by the track name.
  • Albums groups your tracks by album name if available.

Picking Tracks

You can choose a song to link to a chord chart by tapping on it in the list. This will close the audio media library screen and return you to the audio picker menu.

Managing Tracks

You can delete and edit tracks in the OnSong audio media library by swiping from right to left over the audio track. This will reveal an Edit button to make changes to the track using the Track Editor screen. The Delete button will delete the audio track from your library.

You can also tap and hold on a row containing an audio track to open the Track Editor if you are not running iOS 8.

Reduce File Size

This screen presents available file formats that can be used to downsample media to reduce file size in storage. For instance, if you've imported large WAV files, you can downsample within OnSong to M4A file formats and reduce the size of your OnSong library.

Audio

OnSong provides compression into the M4A file format to reduce the size of audio files.

Video

If you are compressing a video file format, OnSong can encode into a low resolution video using the built in H.264 encoder.

Share

The share menu is the built-in activities menu in iOS/iPadOS which provides access to all available apps and actions.

Apps

Here you some standard apps available to share the media items to:

  • AirDrop the files to another device over peer-to-peer WiFi.
  • Messages to send as an iMessage attachment.
  • Mail to email the attachments.
  • More allows you to pick other apps that have been registered to open these sorts of files.

Actions

You can also select from actions available in the system or through OnSong:

  • Copy will place the content into the clipboard for pasting.
  • Export will open the Export Menu allowing you to export using the OnSong export interface.
  • Add To OnSong will import the files into your OnSong library which would be an odd choice, but you're free to choose!
  • Save To Files allows you to save the reports to storage locations or drives connected to the Files app.

Editing Mode

When you tap on the Select button in the upper right corner of the menubar, you enter selection mode. This will allow you to tap on songs, artists or albums to select each item, placing a checkmark on the left side of each item to indicate it has been selected.

Export

To export, tap on the action button that looks like a square with an up arrow in the upper right corner to open the Export Menu.

Delete

To delete selected tracks, tap on the trash can icon in the upper right corner.

Cancel

If you do not want to export the selected songs, tap on the Cancel button to cancel out of selection mode.

Export Menu

The export menu lets you choose a location where exported content should be saved. If you have more than one file to export, the number of items is displayed in parenthesis in the title.

OnSong supports four general locations with the last option allowing for future expansion to web services that implement standard access protocols.

Dropbox

Dropbox is a file storage service that allows you to place your important documents in the cloud. This means that they are near instantly available on all your devices, making the service a great candidate for backing up your library. Tapping on the Dropbox option allows you to select a folder in your Dropbox where you would like your files exported.

Google Drive

Dropbox is a cloud-based storage service that allows you to store documents in the cloud. This means that they are near instantly available on all your devices, making the service a great candidate for backing up your library or storing files. Tapping on the Google Drive option allows you to select a folder in your Google Drive where you would like your files exported.

iTunes File Sharing

This option allows the user to export to iTunes file sharing. This is a special folder contained inside of the OnSong app which can be accessed through iTunes. This means that the file is stored on your device until it is saved off of the device through the iTunes application on a computer.

Files

iOS has the ability to export files to apps from storage providers that support integration with the iOS Files app. Use this option to select a location and folder where the file should be exported.

Other

Some online storage services have support for open standards, allowing files to be securely stored and retrieved without individual configurations. Use this option if you would like to add an online source that supports Amazon S3, FTP or WebDAV protocols.

Albums

The albums tab in the audio media library groups all tracks by album if available. This allows for faster browsing of larger music libraries. Albums are indexed alphabetically.

The album artwork is displayed on the left followed by the album title and artist name. The number of songs and total album duration in minutes are displayed on the far right side.

Tap on an album to display songs performed on that album in the Album Track List.

Album Track List

The album track list displays the selected album's information above a list of tracks. Album information includes a thumbnail of the album cover artwork, the album name, number of songs and length of time of all tracks.

Each track is displayed in order of track number. The track number is displayed on the left followed by the track name and duration of the track.

Picking Tracks

You can choose a song to link to a chord chart by tapping on it in the list. This will close the audio media library screen and return you to the audio picker menu.

Managing Tracks

You can delete and edit tracks in the OnSong audio media library by swiping from right to left over the audio track. This will reveal an Edit button to make changes to the track using the Audio Track Editor screen. The **Delete* button will delete the audio track from your library.

Artists

The artists tab in the audio media library groups all tracks by artist if available. This allows for faster browsing of larger music libraries. Artists are indexed alphabetically.

The album artwork of the most recent album is displayed on the left followed by the artist's name. The number of albums and songs are displayed on the far right side.

Tap on an artist name to display songs performed by that artist in the Artist Track List.

Artist Track List

The artist track list displays the selected artist's information above a list of tracks. Artist information includes a thumbnail of an album cover artwork, the artist's name, number of albums and total number of songs.

Each track is displayed in order of track number. The track number is displayed on the left followed by the track name and duration of the track.

Picking Tracks

You can choose a song to link to a chord chart by tapping on it in the list. This will close the audio media library screen and return you to the audio picker menu.

Managing Tracks

You can delete and edit tracks in the OnSong audio media library by swiping from right to left over the audio track. This will reveal an Edit button to make changes to the track using the Track Editor screen. The Delete button will delete the audio track from your library.

Import Files

The import files menu provides a list of common import locations with the ability to import audio tracks from those sources. These import screens are similar to those found in the Songs Menu except that only audio files are selectable.

Dropbox

Dropbox is a popular cloud-based storage service that works great for importing documents from your computer.

iTunes File Sharing

iTunes File Sharing allows you to import files from your computer using a USB cable and iTunes software.

Other

The other options lets you import from other remote sources using standard communication protocols.

Songs

The songs tab in the audio media library shows all songs contained in your library. Songs are indexed alphabetically by track name.

Picking Tracks

You can choose a song to link to a chord chart by tapping on it in the list. This will close the audio media library screen and return you to the audio picker menu.

Managing Tracks

You can delete and edit tracks by swiping from right to left over the audio track. This will reveal an Edit button to make changes to the track using the Track Editor screen. The Delete button will delete the audio track from your library.

Track Editor

The track editor is accessed by swiping from right to left over audio tracks and choosing the Edit button. This present you with editable fields. When you are finished making changes, tap on the Done button to save your changes and have audio adjustments gradually implemented in a track being played from the live bar.

Track Information

This is information related to the track metadata.

  • Title is the name of the track, typically the name of the song.
  • Artist is the name of the artist.
  • Album is the name of the album.
  • Copyright is the provided copyright information.

Note: Changes made here is saved in the OnSong audio media library record and does not get written back to the underlying audio file.

Preview

Use this scrubber and play button to listen to the track. This is useful for other adjustment sliders below.

Volume Adjustment

This will adjust the output volume of the track allowing for custom volumes to normalize track volumes. Changes to the volume here are reflected in the audio output if you preview the track, but not to the track if it is being played from the live bar. Tap on the target icon on the right to return to the original value.

Pan Adjustment

This will adjust the pan settings for the track. Changes made here are elected immediately to the track that is being previewed, but not to the track if it is being played from the live bar. Tap on the target icon on the right to return to the original value.

iTunes Music Library

You can choose any available song in your iTunes Music Library to link to a chord chart. When you tap on the "iTunes Music Library" option in the Audio Track Picker, a modal window will appear. This gives you options for browsing your iTunes Music Library. Choose a tab on the bottom to determine how to browse your songs. You can also search songs in the Songs tab.

Once you've found the song you are looking for, tap on it to select it. The song will be added the Audio Track Picker and checkmarked. This links the custom track to the currently viewed chord chart.

If you do not want to pick a song, simply tap on the Cancel button at the top.

Autoscroll

The autoscroll live bar button is used to toggle autoscroll on and off. Autoscroll will automatically navigate through your song. Choose from linear or non-linear autoscrolling to meet your needs.

Tapping on the autoscroll button for the first time displays the Autoscroll Menu you can use to set the duration for linear autoscroll or record the timeline events for non-linear autoscroll.

Toggling Autoscroll

Once autoscroll has been configured, tapping on the autoscroll button starts autoscroll. Tapping on it when running will stop autoscroll. You can resume autoscroll by tapping the button again. Tap and hold on the autoscroll button to open the Autoscroll Menu to adjust parameters.

Linear Autoscroll

If you set a duration and remain on that tab, OnSong will scroll the page from the top to the bottom over the set duration. Tapping on the autoscroll button toggles When autoscroll is running, you can continue to scroll the page. Autoscroll will temporarily pause and then resume from the new scrolled position. Zooming your chord chart also will pause and recalibrate autoscroll.

Because autoscroll scrolls vertically from the top to the bottom of the song content, it may not handle changes or repeated sections in the song. You will want to combine autoscroll with Flow in order to arrange your song in a continuous piece to allow autoscroll to be more effective.

Non-Linear Autoscroll

If you record events using the timeline tab, then OnSong will playback those recorded events over the duration that you have set. In other words, if you set a duration and record a timeline, and then later adjust the duration, the timeframe of playback is adjusted accordingly.

You can continue to scroll and interact with the page, but timeline events will continue to play.

Autoscroll Menu

When you tap on the autoscroll button for the first time, or if you tap and hold on the autoscroll button in the live bar, the autoscroll menu appears. In this menu you can configure either linear or non-linear autoscroll depending on when tab you choose.

Duration

Tapping gone this tab and keeping it selected will cause autoscroll to scroll from the top to the bottom of the song smoothly over the set amount of time.

Timeline

Tapping on this tab and keeping it selection will cause will playback the events that you record within the tab. This allows for non-linear autoscrolling since you can configure it to scroll back and forth to different parts of the song.

Changing Autoscroll Speed

Changing the speed of linear autoscroll is as simple as changing the duration of the song in the duration tab. However, changing the speed of non-linear autoscroll is possible as long as you take some steps:

  1. Set the duration of the song in the Duration tab.
  2. Tap on the Timeline tab and record your timeline.
  3. OnSong records the original duration of the song to the timeline.
  4. Return to the Duration tab and adjust the duration to change the speed of autoscroll.
  5. OnSong will adjust the delay between events to adjust for the difference between the original and new duration.

Change Duration

The duration picker appears in the autoscroll menu as the default selected tab when first tapping on the autoscroll button in the live bar, or when tapping and holding the button to make changes to a song with autoscroll previously configured. You can also access the duration picker from the Metadata Editor found in the Song Editor.

Autoscroll Settings

Tapping on the wrench icon will open a screen allowing you to change autoscroll settings. Tap Done to save changes and close the screen, or tap on Cancel to close the screen without saving changes.

Setting the Duration

Set a time by tapping and dragging your finger to the left and right. This is great for quickly picking a duration. To fine-tune the duration, tap on the left/bottom or right/top sides to decrease or increase the time by one second.

When finished, simply close the menu to have your song duration updated. If you are using autoscroll at the time of the adjustment, it will automatically change speed to adapt to the new duration of the song.

The duration picker allows any duration of time to be set. If you set the duration to zero or less, the duration setting is removed.

Timeline

When the timeline screen is selected, OnSong uses non-linear autoscrolling. This means that you must record navigational events to play back when autoscroll in enabled.

Recording Events

To record events, tap on the Start Recording button at the bottom of the screen. The menu will close so you can begin recording navigation events right away.

Scroll, zoom, select sections and even toggle linear autoscroll using the autoscroll button. Each navigational event will be recorded into the timeline. Tap and hold on the autoscroll button to open the autoscroll menu and stop recording.

Viewing Events

Each event describes what type of action was recorded, followed by the amount of time to wait until playing the next event. You can tap on a timeline event to have it performed.

Editing Events

Tap on the Edit button in the upper right corner to make changes to recorded timeline events.

Clearing Events

Tap on the eraser icon on the lower left corner to clear all timeline events and start over. OnSong will prompt you to confirm clearing events.

Recording Options

Timeline records the most common actions that you perform like changing the scroll position of a song, selected sections, linear autoscroll and more. But in some cases you may not want to record certain actions. The recording options screen lets you toggle those actions on and off when you record.

  • Change Scroll Position determines if swiping or tapping to scroll are recorded. You may choose to disable this if you are recording section selections to perform scrolling instead.
  • Change Section determines if section selections are recorded. You may choose to turn this off if linear autoscroll is handling automatic selection of sections.
  • Send Messages determines if messages should be recorded. You may want to turn this off if you want to handle sending messages manually when played back.
  • Toggle Audio determines if backing tracks being played, paused or stopped are recorded.
  • Toggle Autoscroll determines if linear autoscroll is recorded. You may turn this off if you want autoscroll to record position changes automatically.
  • Toggle Metronome determines if starting or stopping the metronome is recorded. You may disable this if you use the metronome for recording purposes but do not want it recorded in the timeline.
  • Zoom determines if zooming in and out of the document should be recorded to the timeline.

Edit Mode

When you tap on the Edit button in the upper right corner of the screen, you can make changes to events in your timeline.

Deleting Events

Tap on the red minus icon on the left side to reveal a Delete button. Tapping on the delete button will remove that event from the timeline.

You can also delete events from the timeline by swiping from the right to left when not in edit mode.

Reordering Events

You can change the order of events in the timeline by tapping and dragging on the reordering handles on the right side.

Changing Event Timecodes

While recording is the fastest way to set what you want to happen, it may not be accurate enough for your needs. Tap on the row to open the Timecode Editor and change the minute, second or fraction of a second for each event in your timeline.

When you are all done, tap on the Done button to save your changes to the timeline.

Event Editor

The timeline event editor lets you change the aspects of each event. Tap on the Done button in the upper right after making changes to update the event in the timeline.

Timecode

The timecode if the time at which the particular event is performed. You can tap on the time to adjust the timecode using the timecode editor.

Action

You can change the action associated with the timeline event by tapping on this row. Please note that recorded actions are special and may not exist in the same way in the action picker.

Parameters

Different actions may have different named parameters that can be modified. Different actions may have different parameters, or none at all. For instance, momentary actions do not have parameters.

If you choose a variable action, the "amount" parameter will be available which is typically a value between 0-100%.

Changing the timecode will move the timeline event independent of other timeline events unless the timecode you choose is greater than or less than an existing timecode. This will cause those timeline events to push elsewhere on the timeline.

Actions Menu

The actions menu lets you pick an action to perform when an event occurs such as pressing a foot pedal or tapping on the screen.

  • None performs no actions when the input is received.
  • Capo Up increases the capo for the song by one fret.
  • Capo Down decreases the capo for the song by one fret.
  • Scroll Up scrolls the song up. If using a foot pedal, performing this action once the top of a song is reached will navigate to the previous song in the set.
  • Scroll Down scrolls the song down. If using a foot pedal, performing this action once the bottom of a song is reached will navigate to the next song in the set.
  • Next Song navigates to the next song in the set.
  • Previous Song navigates to the previous song in the set.
  • Random Song loads a random song from the currently selected book or set. Use for practicing songs in your library without a pattern.
  • Reset Song scrolls the current song to the top and optionally resets toggled events such as autoscroll, backing tracks, the metronome and section assignments. These can be customized in Settings » Navigation Settings » Actions » Reset Song.
  • Next Slide advances to the next slide when projecting lyrics.
  • Previous Slide advances to the previous slide when projecting lyrics.
  • Next Timeline Event will advanced to the next event as recorded or specified in the the Timeline.
  • Previous Timeline Event will go to the previous event as recorded or specified in the the Timeline.
  • Show/Hide Menubar toggles the menubar on and off for a full screen view.
  • Show Quick Pick displays the Quick Pick screen for quickly searching and loading songs.
  • Show Songs List shows and hides the song menu.
  • Scroll Faster decreases the duration of the song by 30 seconds which causes autoscroll to speed up.
  • Scroll Slower increases the duration of the song by 30 seconds which causes the autoscroll to slow down.
  • Start Audio will start playing a backing track assigned to the currently viewed song.
  • Start Autoscroll will begin autoscrolling the current song.
  • Start Metronome will start the metronome to the tempo assigned to the currently viewed song.
  • Stop Audio will stop the audio track if one is playing.
  • Stop Autoscroll will pause autoscroll whether linear or in a non-linear timeline.
  • Stop Metronome will stop the metronome.
  • Toggle Audio play, pause, or stop the backing track associated to the song.
  • Toggle Autoscroll starts or pauses the autoscroll.
  • Toggle Capo turns the capo on or off.
  • Toggle Low Light Mode turns low light mode on and off. When on, the background of the song is black with white foreground text.
  • Toggle Metronome turns the metronome on and off.
  • Toggle MIDI Clock starts or stops sending MIDI clock events used to synchronize tempo between MIDI devices.
  • Toggle MIDI Start/Stop sends the MIDI start or stop command.
  • Mute Metronome mutes the metronome, allowing it to continue to keep time and optionally blink the menubar. This is great to use for practice to see if the beat can be maintained without click reinforcement.
  • Tap For Tempo is used to change the tempo of the current song. This should not be used on high latency foot pedals like the AirTurn BT-105 since they are designed to forgive accidental foot taps or double entry.
  • Tempo Up increase the tempo of the song by 1 BPM.
  • Tempo Down decreases the tempo of the song by 1 BPM.
  • Transpose Up transposes the song up by one half step including enharmonic variations.
  • Transpose Down transposes the song up down one half step including enharmonic variations.
  • Volume Up increases the master volume of the device by a sixteenth.
  • Volume Down decreases the master volume of the device by a sixteenth.
  • Blackout Lyrics blacks out the lyrics for lyrics projection by hiding lyrics and removing the background.
  • Clear Lyrics shows or hides the lyrics during lyrics projection while retaining the background image or video.
  • Continue Scene will continue the playback of a scene if a step is encountered that has an infinite duration. Use this for more advanced playback without the creation of addition scenes.
  • Play Scene is used to restart playback of the currently loaded scene.
  • Stop Scene is used to stop the playback of the currently playing scene.
  • Toggle Scene Playback can be used to toggle the playback state of the currently loaded scene.
  • Playback Pitch plays the pitch of the song for a cappella groups. This can be configured using metadata.
  • Shift Up shifts to the next gear in the configured gears.
  • Shift Down shifts to the previous gear in the configured gears.
  • Unshift shifts to the first gear in the configured gears.
  • Send Message allows you to select a message to be sent to connected devices.
  • Send MIDI when using the MIDI in-app purchase, this option is available and allows you to define a MIDI command to be sent.
  • Switch Scene can map a specific scene to an action. For instance, set an action to blackout all lights or to bring the house lights up.
  • Switch Section allows you to link an action directly to a named section in your song. For instance, you can link to "Verse 1" or "Chorus".
  • Switch Song allows you to switch to a particular song in your library when triggered.

Timecode Editor

The timecode editor allows you to adjust the timecode, or the exact time when an event will occur.

How Timecodes Work

Timeline events contain an action coupled with a wait time. This means that the timecode is generated based on the placement of the event in the timeline. This also means that you may only be able to reduce to the timecode to a point that it does not conflict with other events in the timeline.

Adjusting the Timecode

To adjust the timecode, slide your finger left or right. You can then fine-tune the timecode by one frame by tapping on the left or right. Timecodes are displayed in minutes, seconds and frames where frames are 1/60th of a second.

MM:SS FF

When you are finished adjusting the timecode, tap on the Back button to return to the timeline editor.

Metronome

The metronome live bar button is used to toggle the metronome on and off. The first time the metronome button is pressed with out a tempo, the Tempo Picker will appear allowing you to select a tempo for the song.

Once a tempo has been set, tapping on the button will start the metronome. Tapping again will stop the metronome. Tap and hold the button to open the tempo picker again to set a different tempo.

For more details on the metronome, refer to the Metronome in Features.

Tempo Picker

The tempo picker is displayed when a tempo is required to play the metronome, when tapping and holding on the metronome live bar button, or when settings the tempo using the Metadata Editor in the Song Editor. It allows you to set the tempo in beats per minute (BPM).

Setting The Time Signature

to change the time signature, tap on the time signature in the upper left corner to display the time signature picker. OnSong uses the 4/4 time signature by default.

Adjusting Metronome Settings

You can change the audio and visual attributes of the metronome directly in the metronome live bar menu by tapping on the wrench icon in the upper right corner. This will open a screen containing metronome settings. You can then tap Done to apply those settings, or tap on Cancel to close the screen without saving changes.

Setting the Tempo

To set the tempo, slide your finger to the left and right to decrease or increase the tempo in broad strokes. Tap on the left/bottom or right/top of the picker to decrease or increase the tempo by one beat per minute.

Alternately, you can tap in the middle of the tempo picker to tap the tempo of the song that is already playing.

Starting and Stopping

Because playing the metronome should be immediate when tapping on the live bar button, tapping and holding the button will cause the metronome to start playing. This is by design since to determine if a tap has been held requires the operating system to wait to determine the type of touch. The tempo picker includes a play/stop button that allows the metronome to be started or stopped. This can be used to stop a playing metronome for settings a new one, or to check the tempo once a BPM has been selected.

Changing Tempo Limits

The tempo can be adjusted between 40 and 200 BPM. If the tempo is set below the minimum BPM, it is set to None, removing the tempo from the song. The minimum and maximum BPM can be adjusted in BPM Settings found in Settings Live Settings Metronome Audio Settings BPM Settings.

Acquiring Tempo from MIDI

If you have enabled the MIDI add-on, you can acquire the tempo by listening to a MIDI clock. The MIDI clock is sent from hardware and software to allow multiple MIDI devices to remain in sync with one another during tempo shifts.

Turn this switch on to set the tempo. When finished, turn the switch off to retain the acquired tempo.

Time Signature Picker

You can change the time signature of the current song by tapping on the time signature button in the upper left corner of the metronome.

Swipe up and down to adjust the number of beats and beats per measure. The time signature will change on a running metronome. You can also tap on the play/stop button to toggle the metronome playback as well.

When you are done selecting the time signature. Tap on menu beneath to hide the picker.

Networking

The networking live bar button is used to toggle wireless networking on and off in OnSong. Wireless networking allows your device to be discovered by other OnSong peers for sharing songs and sets, or remote controlling your device using OnCue. This button does not effect OnSong Connect.

Tap on the networking button to toggle networking off and on. This does not change your WiFi or Bluetooth status, only the visibility of your device on the ad-hoc, peer to peer OnCue network.

Tap and hold on the button to open the Wireless Sharing Screen. From there you can choose peers to share content with as well as set up an OnCue streaming session.

Menubar

The menubar provides access to all the tools you need to to manage your music. It contains the following items:

Songs Menu

This is the main menu for managing your songs. It provides access to your library as well as the ability to import songs and place them in sets. You also can manage books of songs in this menu as well.

Share Menu

This icon looks like an up arrow in a box and allows you to share the current song or set in a variety of ways including exporting, emailing, printing, and sharing wirelessly.

External Video Menu

This menu button looks like a computer monitor and lets you configure an external monitor or projector for use with OnSong. Using an Apple Dock Connector to VGA Adapter, Apple Digital AV Adapter, or AirPlay and an AppleTV, you can use OnSong to project lyrics for an audience, or to display chord charts on a monitor on stage.

Playback Menu

This icon looks like a pair of headphones and lets you set an audio track to play along with while viewing the chord sheet. It also lets you configure the metronome tempo and time signature, as well as setting a duration of the song for autoscroll. You can also find new versions of that song through the integrated iTunes search.

Foot Pedal Setup

This icon looks like foot pedals and helps you set up your foot pedals for hands-free operation.

Heads-Up Display

The center of the menubar prominently displays the name of the song. You can swipe to the left and right to choose a different view including the set, next song or a timer.

Messages Menu

Using this menu, screen taps and foot pedal presses can send messages to your team. Use these to communicate more effectively in live performances.

Star Menu

This icon looks like a star and provides a menu to mark a song as a favorite, or to add/ remove the song from a set.

Song Editor

This icon opens the song editor. The song editor allows you to make changes to the song's chords, lyrics, and metadata as well as tools to assist you in editing songs, or even writing them from scratch.

Annotations Menu

This icon looks like a sticky note and allows you to easily add sticky notes or drawings to your chord chart. These can help remind you of things such as who starts the song or how it is played.

Style Preferences Menu

This icon looks like a series of sliders and allows you to quickly change how your song sheet looks and acts. In this menu you can change font sizes and styles, highlight colors, and transpose/capo the song. You can also turn portions of the song on and off such as the header, lyrics, chords, tablature, and whether the capo should be applied.

Utilities Menu

This icon looks like a gear and provides access to advanced tools, editor, and settings.

Organizer Menu

The organizer menu lets you quickly mark a song with an icon, or place it into books or sets. In just a few taps you can create new books and sets and organize you songs. Let's take a look at the tabs that comprise the organizer.

Icons

Icons are small graphics that appear next to songs within lists. These can be used to abstractly categorize songs. For instance, you may use a star to indicate favorite songs, or a flag to represent songs that need more practice.

Sets

Sets are collections of songs to be played during a specific event. This lets you pull songs and place them in an order of how they should be played. This tab shows the sets that a song is in at a glance. You can also create new sets and place songs within them.

Books

Books are used to organized large collections of songs and are useful for dividing your library by genre, band, leader and more. This tab shows the books that a song is in at a glance. You can also create new books and place songs within them.

Choose Books

The books tab let you quickly see the books in which a song belongs and also place a song into a book without going through the Books menu of the All Songs tab. Let's take a look at how to create books and pick songs within one menu.

Picking Songs

The main portion of this menu displays your books. Tap on an unchecked row to add the currently viewed song to the book. Tap on a checked row to remove a song from the book. It's that easy.

Creating Books

Tap on the + button in the upper-right corner to add a new book. This will open the Add New Book screen inside the menu. You can then make any changes necessary and then tap Done to create your book. After you've added a book, you'll need to tap on it to add the currently viewed song.

Deleting Books

Swipe right to left over a set in the menu to reveal a Delete button. Tap on this button to delete the book. Songs contained in the book will not be deleted.

Choose Icon

Icons are visual cues to help you quickly evaluate songs in your library. For instance, you can use a star to mark a song as a favorite or use a flag to indicate that a song needs more work or practice. OnSong has always let you star a song as a favorite, but now you can use more shapes and colors.

Shape

This area of the icon organizer lets you pick the shape to appear next to a song as it appears in lists within OnSong. Choose from one of the following shapes.

  • None displays no icon next to the song and indicates that the song has not be organized by icons. This is the default setting for songs.
  • Star displays a star next to the song which is typically used to indicate a favorite song. The default color is orange.
  • Flag displays a flag next to the song which is typically used to indicate action must take place with the song. The default color is red.
  • Arrow displays an arrow next to the song which is typically used to indicate general preference for a song. The default color is fuchsia.
  • Dot displays a circle next to the song which is typically used to indicate an unread or bulleted status. The default color is teal.

Color

While each shape has a default color, you can use the color picker to choose a different color, or to build your own colors. Tap on a color to select it. All of the icons listed above will change to the selected color. To switch back to the default colors, tap on the selected color swatch again to deselect it. This color picker features the following colors in its default palette: Red, orange, yellow, green, blue and fuchsia.

Note: Icons also appear when you view songs in a set. If you are currently in a set that supports Separate Song/Set Styles, then the icon shape and color you choose is unique to the song in that set.

Choose Sets

The sets tab let you quickly see the sets in which a song belongs and also place a song in a set without going through the My Sets tab. Let's take a look at how to create and pull sets all with one menu.

Pulling Sets

The main portion of this menu displays your active sets. Tap on an unchecked row to add the currently viewed song to the set. The song will be placed at the end of the set. Tap on a checked row to remove a song from the set. When you remove a song, any copy of that song in the set is removed.

This menu is meant to quickly move songs into a set but does not provide a method for arrange your set. You can rearrange the set in the My Sets tab.

Creating Sets

Tap on the + button in the upper-right corner to add a new set. This will open the New Song Set screen inside the menu. You can make any changes necessary and then tap Done to add the set to your list of active sets. After you've added a new set, you'll need to tap on it to add the currently viewed song.

Archiving Sets

Swipe right to left over a set in the menu to reveal an Archive button. Tap on the Archive button to archive the set. This will remove it from this menu and place it in Archived Sets.

Annotations Menu

Sometimes chords and lyrics are not enough to communicate how to play a song. In that case, the annotations menu can help. Tap on the sticky notes icon in the menu bar to access annotations.

Annotations are notes or drawings that can be placed on the chord chart. OnSong includes the following annotation options in this menu:

Sticky Note

The sticky note annotation allows you to place colored, square notes on the page.

Drawing

The drawing annotation lets you draw on the page using a pen or highlighter.

Clear All

Tapping on this option will remove all annotations from the song page. You are prompted before this takes place since it is not reversible.

Drawing

The drawing annotation lets you draw on the screen. This is an in-app purchase that costs about as much as a pen or pencil. Once you've purchased the drawing annotation, you can draw on the screen using the draw bar.

The draw bar appears in place of the OnSong menu bar and provides tools you can use to draw on the song page. The following are tools from left to right.

Pen Tool

The tool is enabled by default and draws a single, fully opaque line when selected. You can adjust the size of the pen tool using the slider to the right of the drawing tools. If you turn off all tools, you can use gestures to swipe and zoom the drawing area. The default pen tool uses black ink at 3 points in size.

Highlighter Tool

The highlighter tool provides a larger, square drawing tip that applies the color at about 50% opacity. When enabled, you can adjust the size of the highlighter tip using the size slider to the right of the drawing tools. If you turn off all tools, you can use gestures to scroll and zoom the drawing area. The default highlighter tools uses yellow ink at 24 points in size.

Brush Size Slider

This slider control allows you to change the size of the tool. The adjusted range is from 1 pt to 64 pt in size. Keep in mind that one inch is equivalent to 72 points.

Color Picker

This allows you to pick a color for the selected drawing tool. The selected color is remembered for each tool. Color options include black, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, purple, brown and white. Use white to whiteout portions of PDF files or when using low light mode. You can also create and manage a palette of custom colors using the Color Picker.

Undo

The undo tool reverts to the state of the drawing before the last tool, size, and color selections. For instance, if you draw with the pen tool and do not change the tool, size or color, the undo operation will remove all strokes that were made with that tool. By tapping on a color again, changing the size, or deselecting and selecting the tool again, you can create another undo state. Each of these are retained as layers.

Layers

Layers are created each time you change the tool, size, or color. To create a new layer while drawing, just tap on the color of the pen you are using, similar to dipping a pen in an ink well. This will create a new layer.

Layers are useful for drawing annotations and then toggling them on and off for educational purposes, practice, or performance. Tapping on the layers icon will open the Layers Menu, providing tools for toggling layer visibility or editing the layers.

Redo

This tool is the opposite of the undo tool and reverts the state of the drawing back from the undone state. For instance, if you draw a layer and tap the Undo button, the layer is removed from the stack. If you tap on the redo tool, the layer is restored.

Done Checkmark

When you are all done drawing, tap on the checkmark to save your changes and return to the song viewer and menubar.

Ortho

The drawing tool allows you to to use multiple tools to draw on top of your chord charts and sheet music. When you tap on a tool in the drawing bar, it becomes selected. If you tap again, the drawing tool icon toggles between normal drawing mode and ortho mode.

Normal Mode

In normal drawing mode, each tool icon appears without a straight line. In this mode, drawing shapes and curves are respected as if drawing freehand on a document.

Ortho Mode

When the drawing tool is selected, tapping on it again will place the tool into ortho or straight line mode. When enabled, a straight line appears under the tool in the icon. With this enabled, lines are drawn from the point where drawing began to the point where it ends in a straight path.

Ortho Threshold

When drawing in a straight line, it is often preferred that the line is perfectly level on the horizontal or vertical plane. Ortho mode will snap to this if the difference between the starting and ending points of the line are within a few pixels of each other. By default, this is 1.5 times the width of the brush. You can change the threshold by tapping and holding on any tool that supports ortho mode to access the Ortho Threshold Menu.

Note: Each tool remembers its last known mode and that mode is enabled by default when the tool is selected.

Ortho Mode Menu

The threshold menu is used to define at what point a line will be made perfectly horizontal or vertical when using a tool in Ortho Mode.

Threshold

By default, the threshold is set to be 1.5 times the size of the current brush size. For instance, if the highlighter pen is active with a size of 24 points, then the threshold would be set at 36 points. This means that a line can vary up to 36 pixels from start to finish and still be made perfectly horizontal or vertical. If the difference between those points is greater than 36 points, then the line would be diagonal.

If you have selected the pen and set the brush size to something like 3 points, the threshold would likely display as 8 pixels. The reason is that OnSong prevents thresholds of less than 8 pixels unless the threshold multiplier is set to less than 1.0.

The threshold is set for all tools as a multiplier. This means that if you change the threshold when using the pen tool, the threshold will change for the highlighter too. The value of the threshold will appear different in each based on the brush size.

Keep Ortho Mode Selected

By default, ortho mode is cancelled each time you leaving the drawing mode in OnSong to prevent confusion. If you wish to allow ortho mode to remain selected, toggle this switch on.

Layers Menu

Tapping on the layers icon will display the layers menu which contains all the layers of the drawing. You can view each layer and toggle its visibility by tapping on the row to toggle the checkmark. You can also add new layers by tapping on the "+" button in the upper left corner.

Tapping the Edit button in the upper right corner allows you to delete layers or rearrange their order. This can be useful for placing one drawing on top of another. Further, you can tap on the name of the row to give the layer a name. When done editing the layer list, tap the Done button in the upper right corner.

Sticky Note

Tapping on the sticky note option in the annotations menu will immediately place a sticky note on the song page and open the Note Editor. This allows you to type text in the note as well as have control over the appearance of the note on the page.

Once the sticky note is on the page, you can tap and drag to position it. Double tap on the note to open the Note Editor. You can also tap on a note to select it, and then tap on the edit button in the lower right to edit as well. On the lower right corner is a trash can icon. Tapping on this when the note is selected will delete the note from the page.

Notes are positioned relative to the size of the page. This means that if you add significant amounts of text to the song, or use Flow to arrange the song to be longer, the note will likely shift position to accommodate for this change in height.

Note Editor

The sticky note editor offers a large text area with which to compose your note. Just type in this area what you would like your note to say. OnSong will shrink the font size in the note to contain it inside of the sticky note.

The menubar at the top of the editor allows you to not only cancel editing the note and revert your changes, but to also delete it or make changes. Tapping on the trash can icon will delete note immediately without a prompt. Tapping on the letter "A" icon will provide a menu that allows you to customize the appearance of the note. Finally, the Done button will save your changes, close the editor, and redraw the note on the screen.

You can adjust the appearance of sticky notes using the Sticky Note Appearance Menu, or by adjusting default sticky note appearance settings under Settings Menu Settings Sticky Notes.

Note Style Menu

Visual cues are important when annotating your music. Using the sticky note appearance menu, you can customize each note to meet the needs of your performance. This menu is accessed by tapping on the "A" icon in the menubar and includes the following options:

Note Font

Here you can select the font to use when display the note. Options include Marker, Chalkboard, Helvetica, and Courier.

Note Color

Adjusts the color of the note paper which are pastel. You can choose from white, yellow (default), orange, green, blue, purple, pink, grey or clear. You can add and customize colors in the note paper color palette using the color picker.

Text Color

Adjusts the color of text in the note. You can choose from black, red, blue, green, light blue, purple or grey. You can add and customize colors in the text color palette using the color picker.

Opacity

Some notes may overlap chord charts. You can adjust the opacity of the note and text to allow the chord chart to be viewed underneath. This is adjusted using the opacity slider. The default is set to 100% opaque.

Font Size

While OnSong will make the size of the font adequately large, and shrink the font to fit inside of the note, you may want to adjust the font size differently. Use the font size slider to adjust the font size between 32 and 96 points. The default value is 48 points.

Rotation

Sticky notes are applied square on the page. You may want to rotate the note slightly to draw attention to it or to fit it better between parts of your chord chart. Slide to the left and right to rotate the note up to 45 degrees in each direction. You can also rotate the note using two fingers when in the song viewer.

Scale

Notes applied to the page are made the size of a typical sticky note relative to the page width. You can make notes larger or smaller using the scale slider. Adjust the size of the sticky note from 50% to 150% of its normal size. You can also use two fingers to pinch the note to change its scale in the song viewer.

Shape

Use this slider to change the note from being wide to tall. Tap in the middle of the slider to center the value and return to a square note.

Shadow

You can use the slider to adjust the opacity of the shadow that appears under the sticky note.

Tap and drag anywhere in the sliders to adjust the value. Tap or the left or right side of the slider to fine-tune adjust its value.

External Video Menu

The external video menu is used to configure Lyrics Projection, or to toggle into Stage Monitor in OnSong. The menu contains the following options:

Chromecast

In the upper left corner is an icon that allows you to connect to one or more Chromecast devices for wireless lyrics projection. Tap on this button to connect or disconnect to Chromecasts on your network in the Chromecast Picker.

Preview

The top portion of the menu displays a preview of what will appear on the external screen. You can tap on the preview section to flip through lyric sections to preview. This does not display the lyrics on the external device.

To display lyrics on the external device, tap on the lyrics in the song viewer to select the section and display the lyrics on the screen.

Mode Buttons

Five buttons situated below the preview area are used to control the combination of lyrics and background to output to the external screen. In addition, OnSong can be configured for stage monitor mode using the fifth button.

  • Lyrics and Background displays the lyrics on a background color, gradient, image, or video.
  • Background Only clears the lyrics from the screen and leaves the background color, gradient, image, or video.
  • Lyrics Only will remove the background color, gradient, image, and video leaving only the lyrics on the screen.
  • Blackout Mode removes the lyrics and background, displaying only black.
  • Stage Monitor Mode turns on Stage Monitor Mode independently of lyrics projection modes. This mode will always be activated on video devices connected physically to the iOS device via an adapter or devices connected wirelessly using AirPlay such as an AppleTV. This allows lyrics projection settings to continue to be modified for other wireless devices such as Chromecast.

Background Color

In this area you can pick a background color to display. Options include black, blue, purple, red, goldenrod, and grey. But you're not limited to those preset colors. You can also add new colors or customize the color swatches in this palette using the Color Picker.

Background Image Picker

In addition to display colored background, OnSong can also display images and even motion videos behind lyrics. Tap on the icon to the right of the color swatches to open the Image Library Screen. You can also tap and hold this button to open the Image Library Screen without toggling the background image or video off first.

Overlay Toggle

An overlay can be applied on top of the background color, image, or video and defaults to a gradient that fades to black on the bottom. This can improve visibility of lyrics on busy backgrounds.

Tap and hold on this button to open the Overlay Picker to choose a different style of overlay and it's color as well.

Font Size

The size of the font can be adjusted between 24 and 84 points using the font size slider. The default size is 40 points. When the Adjust Lyrics To Fit option is enabled in Lyrics Projection Settings, the font will not be able to be fully increased as the font will be limited to prevent lines from wrapping.

Stroke Width

The stroke is a border around each character in lyrics. The font appears in white text with an outline to separate it from the background. Adjust the stroke width from between 0 and 3 points. Default is 1 point.

Shadow

Behind lyrics appears a blurry shadow to help lift the text off the background. The shadow slider can adjust the opacity of the shadow between 0% and 100%. The default opacity is 50%.

Transition Speed

The transition speed determines how quickly lyrics and background changes take place. The speed of the transition is set in seconds between 0 and 4 seconds. The default is 2.0 seconds. Overly fast transitions may experience a delay in outputted to the external screen, especially on older or wireless hardware.

Automatic Advance Speed

The automatic advance speed is used to cycle through the sliders in a song after a delay. By default, automatic advance is turned off by default. The time to show each slide can be set between 1 and 60 seconds.

Live Video Editor

Live video is an exciting new OnSong Premium feature that makes you the star of the show. Apply effects and use your video live for lyrics projection for engaging live performances. Here's where you can customize your shot for live-streaming to your fans, or live IMAG video.

Preview

This editor gives you a preview of what is or will be displayed as a background layer of lyrics projection. You can tap the Done button to apply the change to the background, or tap the close button to cancel those changes.

Camera

Tap on either the front or back camera to change the angle of the shot used by live video. The default is front camera. Changing the camera is applied to the currently viewed live video.

Chroma Key

Tap on this button to select a color in the background of your video to remove. This places you above any other still or motion backgrounds that you choose. You can change the chroma key filter in the Effects List.

Effects

While you can use the built-in camera feed, you can also apply effects. This gives your listeners (and viewers) a way to see you in the picture when used with lyrics. Tap on the button to open the [Effects List[(effects).

Video Size

In the lower right corner is a video size picker. By default, OnSong will capture the view at 720p resolution. This gives great video processing performance with low power draw. You can increase the resolution for higher quality, but it may use more processing power.

Opacity

This slider lets you alter the opacity of live video as it's composited on your background color, image, or video.

Size and Placement

These two control combine to let you place your video anywhere in the composition. You can choose from centerer or the four corners. If you place the video in a custom location, the last option appears. You can use pinch and drag gestures to place the video where you want, or double tap to scale back to 100%.

Border

If you're using live video with a smaller size, you can set it off from the background with a border. Adjust the size and color with these two controls.

Load Configuration

You can load existing live video configurations by tapping on the download icon on the bottom left. You can also import files with the *.onsonglvc file extension (OnSong Live Video Configuration).

Store Configuration

When you have things just the way you like, you can save your configuration to a file to import again later, or to share with friends. This opens the standard export menu for you to choose an export location.

Effects List

This is where you can start layering different effects on to your live video to make for an engaging experience.

Adding Effects

To add an effect, tap on the + button in the upper-right corner to open the Effects Picker.

Editing Effects

Tap on an effect in the list to open the Effects Editor for that effect. There you can see a preview of just that effect and adjust its parameters.

Reordering Effects

You can change the order of the effects. Since each effect is applied on top of the previous effect, you can get some interesting results!

Removing Effects

Tap on the red - button on the left and confirm the action to delete effects from your list.

Toggling Effects

While you can toggle the visibility of effects by tapping on the effects button that opens this menu, you can also enable or disable effects using the switch on the lower left corner of the screen.

Chooser

When you choose to add an effect to your list, you're presented with a list of built-in effects that you can apply. These may vary based on your operating system.

Browsing Effects

Scroll to find effects in categories such as:

  • Blur
  • Color Adjustment
  • Color Effect
  • Distortion Effect
  • Geometry Adjustment
  • Halftone Effect
  • Sharpen
  • Stylize
  • Tile Effect

Choosing an Effect

Tap on an effect to choose it, add to the effects list with the default parameters, and open the Effects Editor.

More Details

To learn more about each filter, look on the bottom left and turn on the Show details about each effect filter switch to show details about each filter's use.

Effects Editor

The effects editor lets you make changes to an effect that you've applied to your live video. It has the following features:

Preview

When you open the effects editor, OnSong takes a snapshot of your live video feed to let you see the effect of the snapshot on the raw input. You can also see the changes your effect makes in the live video configuration screen as you make them. You can toggle the effect on and off by tapping on the image.

Parameters

Each effect has different parameters that are adjustable. OnSong lets you configure the following kinds of values:

  • Angle displays a slider to choose an angle.
  • Boolean displays a switch for toggling the parameter on and off.
  • Color displays a color builder to create a custom color.
  • Count displays a slider between the minimum and maximum counts.
  • Distance displays a slider from the minimum to the maximum distance.
  • Integer displays a slider from the minimum to the maximum integer amount.
  • Position displays the Vector Editor for altering the X and Y values.
  • 3D Position displays the Vector Editor for altering the X, Y, and Z values.
  • Rectangle displays the Vector Editor for altering the X, Y, width, and height parameters.
  • Scalar displays a slider from the minimum to the maximum scalar amount.

Note that you can tap on the icon to the right of each slider to reset the value to the default setting for the effect.

Chroma Key Editor

Chroma Key lets you remove certain colors for the background, allowing you to layer certain things in front of a still or motion background. When you edit a Chroma Key effect, this special editor is used to let you change the Chroma Key parameters.

Preview

The top are of this editor displays a still image generated when you opened the menu. This lets you see the changes of the effect on the raw video image. You can tap on the preview graphic to toggle the effect on and off.

Hue

This displays a hue picker that lets you find the color in your image to be removed.

Tolerance

The tolerance slider effectively widens the color range that is removed. When you increase the tolerance, you are opening it up to remove colors to the left and right of the selected hue on the color wheel.

Vector Editor

Vectors are used for parameters that have information such as two-dimensional or three-dimensional points.

Preview

This editor shows a preview image captured when the menu is opened and allows you to see the effect of the change on the raw image. You can toggle the effect on and off by tapping on the image.

Position

This is a simple two-dimensional position and displays both X and Y sliders.

3D Position

This is a three-dimensional point and is represented by X, Y, and Z sliders.

Rectangle

This represents a rectangle with sliders for the X, Y, width, and height.

Note that you can tap on the icon to the right of each slider to reset the value to the default setting for the effect.

Background Media Picker

The background media picker is used to manage your image and video assets for use with lyrics projection. You can also import and purchase media to add to your media library from this screen. This media picker also lets you pick a background to use in lyrics projection.

To handle import from multiple locations and services, the media picker has three tabs:

Media Library

The media library lets you manage your local media library and pick images and motion backgrounds to display behind lyrics.

Media Store

The media store has motion backgrounds that you can purchase for use with lyrics projection.

Web Browser

In addition to importing media from your photo library, or purchasing media from the store, you can import media from other media websites.

Media Store

The media store screen is used to browse images and videos available in the OnSong media store.

Filtering

By default, all available assets are displayed in the preview grid. You can filter the assets that are displayed using the filter button in the upper right corner to display the Pick Categories menu.

Previewing

Tap on an asset to preview it in the viewer. This is useful to get an idea of the motion background. Already purchased assets appear with a checkmark in the upper right corner and can also be previewed.

Purchasing

To purchase a motion background, tap on the item to preview it. In the preview screen is a buy button to purchase the item and download it to your OnSong library.

Categories

The pick categories menu is used to narrow the results returned from the media store. This menu is populated by current categories and types of categories and can be changed in the future. Tap to check a category and have assets of that category displayed.

Selecting more categories in a type will restrict the number of results returned. For instance, selecting both Blue and Brown from the Colors category will result in no results being returned.

The following are the types of categories that can be selected.

Artists

This is the name of the person or entity who created the background image.

Colors

This is the general color of the asset.

Styles

This is the style of photography used. For instance, an abstract work may not be immediately discernible or a bokeh style image will feature out of focus light sources.

Media Preview

The media preview screen allows you to view the media asset with an included watermark. Previews are displayed with higher compression rates as well.

OnSong will automatically begin playing motion graphics in a repeating loop.

To purchase the asset, tap on the price in the upper right corner. You will be prompted by the App Store to submit your iTunes information. Motion backgrounds are processed as in-app purchases.

Once the media asset is downloaded to the local library, you can come back into the preview screen to update the asset if there have been any changes, or if there is a problem with the file that was downloaded.

As long as you keep the media asset in your library you will not be required to pay again for the asset. Media is backed up and restored with your OnSong library as well.

If you choose not to purchase the media asset, tap on the back button to return to the media store.

Web Browser

The last tab in the media picker is the web browser. This allows you to access other web resources for media acquisition.

By default, OnSong loads the playbackmedia.com website which provides subscription-based packages for downloading background media assets. This website does have free samples available in the Freebies section of the site.

Type a website in the URL to load a different resource. Use the bookmark icon on the right to load a bookmarked site or to add the current site to the list of bookmarks as well.

Once OnSong detects an importable asset in the web browser, the Import button will be enabled allowing you to add that asset to your local media library. This typically requires the asset to be downloadable on the site. For instance, if you are downloading an image asset, you will need to access the JPEG or PNG file. If you are seeking a motion background, OnSong will require an MP4 or M4V file.

Note: Some web sites are not designed for use on mobile devices. You may need to pinch to zoom to read and interact with some content.

Media Library

The media library tab displays images and videos available in your local OnSong library. From this screen you can import images and video from your photo library, pick media for lyrics projection, and manage your assets.

Importing

You can import images or videos from the photo library on your device. Tap on the + button in the upper right corner to browse your photo library. Pick an image or video to be added into your OnSong media library. You can then select the media as the background or manage the media asset.

Newly imported assets appear with a banner in the upper right corner of the graphic. In addition, motion backgrounds appear with a small white triangle in the lower right to indicate that the asset is playable.

Selecting

To display a background image or video, tap on it in the grid of preview images. This will place a border around the image that is currently active. Tap again to turn off the selected background.

Viewing Details

To view details about the media item, tap and hold on the preview. This will display a popover to perform the view details function. Tapping on this option will open the Media Details menu that provides information about the media assets.

Changing Playback Attributes

Motion backgrounds are video files that typically repeat continuously at 100% playback speed. You can change the parameters for playback by tapping and holding the item. This will display a popover to perform the view details function. Tapping on this option will open the Media Details menu that allows you to change these playback attributes.

Deleting

To delete the media asset, tap and hold on the preview. This will display a popover to perform the delete function. Tapping on the delete option will remove the media asset from your library.

Import Files

The import files menu provides a list of common import locations with the ability to import photos or videos from those sources. These import screens are similar to those found in the Songs Menu except that only video or photo files are selectable.

Dropbox

Dropbox is a popular cloud-based storage service that works great for importing documents from your computer.

Google Drive

Dropbox is a popular cloud-based storage service allows you to store and collaborate with files online.

iTunes File Sharing

iTunes File Sharing allows you to import files from your computer using a USB cable and iTunes software.

Storage Provider

If you are running iOS 8 or higher, use the storage provider option if you need to import from a storage service that supports the storage provider action. When this is selected, the storage provider interface will be presented for you to select a file to import from a third-party service.

Other

The other options lets you import from other remote sources using standard communication protocols.

Photo Library

Tapping on the camera icon will show the built-in image and video picker. You can browse photos and videos located on your device. Tap on a photo or video to choose it for import.

If you do not want to choose a photo or video, tap on the Cancel button to close the menu, or simply tap off of the menu.

Note: Video files may be compressed when selecting video files in this manner. To import uncompressed video files, import them using the file picker by tapping on the + button in the media library screen.

Media Details Menu

The media details menu is used to display:

Properties

This is information specifically about the asset and includes:

  • Media Type is the type of media asset. This can be either Image or Video.
  • Media Title is the title provided by the media source, or in lieu of that, the filename of the imported asset.
  • File Size is the size of the file in human-readable form.
  • Dimensions describes the size of the asset in pixels as width x height.
  • Duration is the length of time that the asset is playable in human-readable form. This is empty for image assets.

Playback

The playback section is available for video assets and provides information on how the video should be played. These attributes include:

  • Repeat is a switch that determines if the video asset repeats from the beginning when the playback is finished. By default, videos will repeat. This can be turned off for videos assets such as countdowns.
  • Playback Rate allows you to adjust how fast or slow the video is played. By default, videos playback at a rate of 100%. This will be the natural speed of the video. You can adjust the playback rate of the video from one of the following options: 0%, 50%, 66%, 80%, 100%, 125%, 150% and 200%

Note: If you set the playback to 0%, the video will appear as a still image.

Reduce File Size

When you import content into OnSong, it may be in an uncompressed state, or may be in a higher resolution than is necessary. This can take up space on your device and cause performance issues. You can use this menu to reduce the size of the media asset, right from within OnSong.

Video files can be reencoded in different resolutions to reduce file size. Choose a size to reduce the asset into and then tap the Convert button to begin encoding. Once completed, the original asset will be replaced with the reduced asset.

Please keep in mind that reducing the resolution of video assets will cause them to appear blurry on higher resolution screens.

Preview Widget

The lyrics projection preview widget is designed to preview what is on the external video screen as well as provide tools for controlling lyrics projection.

The widget has two modes:

Control Mode

When no buttons appear on the preview widget, you can swipe in the widget to choose which section of lyrics to project.

Editing Mode

You can tap on the widget to enter editing mode. This lets you make changes to the widget.

Control Mode

When in control mode, no buttons appear in the widget. You can use the widget in this mode to change sections by swiping.

Right To Left

Moves to the next section of lyrics. For instance, if the chorus is comprised of multiple stanzas, this will move through each stanza in the named section called "Chorus".

Left To Right

Moves to the preview section of lyrics. For instance, if the chorus is comprised of multiple stanzas, this will move back through each stanza in the named section called "Chorus".

Top To Bottom

Moves to the next named section of lyrics. If Verse 1 contains multiple stanzas, these are skipped and moved directly to Verse 2.

Bottom To Top

Moves to the previous named section of lyrics. If Verse 2 contains multiple stanzas, these are skipped and moved directly to Verse 1.

Note: When you swipe, the screen displays the name of the section. After a brief delay, the section is changed. This allows you to choose the section you want to display and then the switch is made accordingly.

Editing Mode

Tap on the preview widget to display buttons for editing the preview widget. When in this mode, you can also drag the widget to another location on the screen or use two fingers to scale the size of the widget. You can also tap on the buttons to perform additional functions clockwise from the upper right corner:

Close Button

In the upper right corner is the close button which can be tapped to close the preview widget.

Toggle Full Screen

Tap on the button in the lower right corner to increase the preview widget to take up the full size of the screen while retaining the aspect ratio. Once the widget is full screen, tapping this again will shrink the widget to its original size.

External Video Settings

You can tap on the gear icon in the lower left corner to view the majority of controls in the External Video Menu except for the preview screen and background mode.

Section Picker Menu

Tap on the button in the upper left to manually choose a section of lyrics to appear on the external screen.

Section Picker

You can use the Pick Section menu to choose a section of lyrics to display. OnSong displays each named section as well as each stanza. You can scroll through each section and tap on one to load those lyrics into lyrics projection.

Chromecast Picker

The Chromecast Picker finds Chromecast devices on your local area network and presents them in a list. While the list if refreshed each time it is viewed, you can tap on the Scan button in the upper right corner to force a five-second scan on the local network for devices.

Connecting

Once devices are located, tap on them to initiate the connection. While connecting, the row will display an activity indicator. Once fully connected, a checkmark appears to the right of the device.

Disconnecting

To disconnect from a connected device, tap on connected devices to disconnect. If you are opening OnSong on a device other than the one that originally initiated a connection, you will first need to connect to the device to take over the session and then disconnect.

Overlay Picker

The overlay picker allows you to create rich lyrics projection backgrounds by combining color, image or video with a semi-translucent overlay. These can be used to enhance readability on standard video content, add a subtle flair to an otherwise boring graphic, or be used with Scenes as a spotlight.

When you are finished making your changes, tap on the Done button in the upper right or cancel your changes by tapping on the Back or Cancel buttons.

Style

Choose one of the built-in overlay styles. Each are displayed with a preview as well as a checkmark next to the currently selected style.

  • None turns the overlay off.
  • Fade fades from fully transparent on top to black on the bottom.
  • Grunge adds concrete-like weathering to your background image or video.
  • Pinstripe adds a thin vignette in combination with vertical pinstripe lines.
  • Rumple simulates wrinkled fabric and turns any background into a cloth.
  • Spotlight can turn a projector into a light for use with Scenes since you can control the background color of your lyrics projection background using sequences.
  • Victorian adds an old wallpaper-like allure to your images.
  • Vignette features a circular fade to the edges to highlight background content.
  • Wintery features icy crystals around the edge of an image, useful when combined with a white overlay color.

Color

While the standard color of overlays are black, you can choose from various greyscale shades in this picker including black, dark gray, gray, light gray and white. If the overlay color has been set to a different color using Scenes. the color will appear to the right of the basic color.

You can also create your own colors by tapping on the + button on the right. If you are interested in creating and managing custom colors, learn more about the Color Picker.

Opacity

The opacity of the overlay can be adjusted from between 0% and 100%. This is applied on top of any opacity defined in a color. For instance, if a color has an opacity of 50%, and the opacity is set to 50%, the resulting opacity of the overlay will be 25%.

Heads-Up Display

The title of the currently viewed songs is displayed prominently in the center of the Menubar. This area is referred to as the Heads-Up Display and can provide information that needs to be readily available.

To choose a different display, simply slide your finger to the left or right. The standard display, the song title, appears on the far left of options. Slide to the right to reveal the following:

Song Title

This is the default heads up display which simply displays the song currently being viewed.

Song and Set/Book

The song title is the primary text with the title of the set being secondary. If no set is selected, the name of the current book appears.

Current Song and Next Song

The current song title is the primary text with the next song in the set displayed below. If no song is next in the set, the phrase "No Upcoming Song" appears instead. If the next song's key is known, it is displayed in parenthesis after the next song's title.

Timer

When performing for a limited amount of time, it's often useful keep track of how long you have played a song or set. The timer heads-up display provide two timers which start when the play button is tapped in the middle, or if an action like autoscroll or backing track playback begins. The timer on the left shows the time spent on the current song which automatically resets when you switch to another song. The timer on the right shows the time spent on the set.

Each timer is independent and can reset at any time. To reset, tap on the time. If you are in timer mode, the time is reset to 0:00. If you are in countdown mode, the time is reset to the duration of the song or set, or to 0:00 is no duration is available.

To change the mode of each timer, tap on it once to reset and then tap again to toggle between timer and countdown modes. The arrow on the edge of the timer will indicate the direction of the count.

Each timer will appear as white text as long as counting is within range. If the time is outside of the desired range, the text will appear red. This happens when the time becomes negative, or when the time exceeds the duration of the song or set.

Audio Playback

This heads-up display provides a play/pause/stop button as well as a playback scrubber that no only displays the current playback position of the audio track, but also allows you to tap or drag to select a different part of the track to play. Since the heads-up display area of the menubar is configured by swiping, be sure to tap and hold before scrubbing to a different playback position.

Tap on the button to the right of the playback scrubber to adjust master volume. If you are using an audio track imported into your OnSong Media Library, you can also customize the playback volume and pan settings for that track.

Tap on the button on the far right to alter audio routing. This will open the built-on Audio Routing menu in iOS.

Memory Utilization

During a live performance it may be important to monitor how many resources OnSong is consuming. This view displays how much memory OnSong is consuming on the left, as well as the amount of free memory on the right. As more memory is used by OnSong, these numbers may increase as other apps are removed from memory.

Quick Pick

Tapping on a song title in the heads-up display area of the menubar will open the Quick Pick screen. This screen is designed to let you quickly find a song in a live scenario, preview, and add it to your existing set for viewing.

Searching

When the Quick Pick screen appears, the keyboard is automatically revealed so you can just start typing.

As you type, OnSong finds matches in your library that contains the title of the song or the artist. Songs that have titles beginning with the search text will appear in dark text. Other results will appear with the search term underlined. Results that start with the term are sorted towards the top of the list.

Viewing

Once you've found a song you'd like to play, tap to pick it. If you are currently viewing a set, the song is automatically added as the next song in the set.

If you are viewing a single song from your OnSong library, tapping on the song will display it in the Song Viewer immediately. In both cases, the Quick Pick screen is automatically dismissed, returning you to the song viewer.

Note: Picking songs will use options from the Quick Pick Options menu. While the song is added as the next song in a set, you can configure OnSong to automatically jump to that song. You can also determine if songs are added temporarily to set.

Previewing

If you're unsure if the song is what you are looking for, tap on the magnifying glass icon on the right side to view a preview first.

Options

Tap on the options icon in the upper-right corner to change change options on how songs are added to the song viewer.

Options

The options menu lets you alter the way songs are added to the song viewer and sets.

  • Save picked song to the set determines if the song is added and saved to the currently loaded set. By default this is turned on to allow you to build a set dynamically.
  • Navigate to the picked song will automatically navigate the song viewer to the newly picked song. By default this is turned off so the song is added as the next song in the set, but not immediately viewable.

Preview

The preview screen lets you determine if the found song is the one you are looking for. This is useful if you are sending chord charts to your team as this will not be sent wirelessly or over a video device.

You can scroll and zoom to get a good idea if this is the song you want to add. If you want to add the song to the Song Viewer, tap on the Add button in the upper-right corner.

If you are currently viewing a song from the All Songs menu, the previewed song will be displayed in the song viewer.

If you've selected a set to view from the My Sets tab, tapping the Add button will add the song as the next song in the set. This allows the current song to remain unchanged and the found song added as the next song in the set.

Note: Adding songs will use options from the Quick Pick Options menu. While the song is added as the next song in a set, you can configure OnSong to automatically jump to that song. You can also determine if songs are added temporarily to set.

Messages Menu

The messages menu allows you to send signals to your band members when using either OnSong Connect or Stage Monitor Mode. These messages flash on the screen with text and color to signal song dynamics without the use of hand signals or musical cues.

Chatting

Tap on the Chat option to type a message to send without creating a preset message. You can send any length chat desired. This will appear in the largest font available for the amount of text. Chats will be sent as grey text.

Sending Messages

To send a message, tap on one in the list of options.

Adding Messages

The ability to send messages quickly is key to efficient communication. OnSong comes with three standard messages, but you can add or edit your messages as well. Tap on the + button to open the New Message Screen.

Editing Mode

Tap on the Edit button in the upper right corner to switch to editing mode. From here you can reorder or modify messages.

Adding New Messages

To create a new message, tap on the + button in the lower right corner of the messages menu. This opens the New Messages screen to create a message.

Fill in the fields detailed below and tap on the Done button to save your message and return to the messages list. Tap Cancel if you wish to discard your changes.

Title

The title is what the message will be called in your messages list. This can be an abbreviated or common name that is different from the message that will be sent. If this field is omitted, the message is used for the title instead.

Message

This is the text to display on the screen to recipients. This can be as long as required to communicate the message. The font size is increased or decreased to fill the screen. Words will appear for approximately a third of a second per word plus the time to animate the flashed message on and off the screen. You can adjust the amount of time messages appear by going into the Utilities Menu Settings Display Settings Song Viewer Flash Message.

Color

This is the color to use when displaying the message in lists as well as the text and flash color on the screen. Color can convey information more quickly than reading. The two options combined can be an effective signaling tool.

Choose a color just by tapping on it. If you'd like to add new colors or customize the message color palette, learn more about the Color Picker feature.

Chatting

Tap on the chat option in the messages menu to open a text prompt where you can type a message.

Use the on-screen keyboard to type your message. When you are ready to send the message, tap on the Send button. If you don't wish to send the message, tap on the Cancel button to close the prompt and on-screen keyboard.

Chat messages will be in grey on the recipient's screens. The words will appear for approximately a third of a second per word plus the time to animate the flashed message on and off the screen. You can adjust the amount of time messages appear by going into the Utilities Menu Settings Display Settings Song Viewer Flash Message.

Editing Mode

Tap on the Edit button in the upper right corner to enter editing mode on the list of messages. This allows you to manage the list.

Deleting Messages

While you can delete a message from the list by swiping right to left and tapping on the Delete button, you can also delete messages by tapping on the red minus circle icon on the left and then tapping on the Delete button that is revealed.

Sorting Messages

You may want to place commonly used messages at the top or bottom of the list. Use the reordering handles on the right to tap and drag the message where you would like it to be in the list. Tap on the Done button to save your changes.

Modifying Messages

You can change a message by tapping on it's name while in editing mode. This will display the Edit Message Screen allowing you to change the message's properties.

Editing Messages

Tapping on the name of the message while in Editing Mode will allow you to change the message's properties.

Title

The title is what the message will be called in your messages list. This can be an abbreviated or common name that is different from the message that will be sent. If this field is omitted, the message is used for the title instead.

Message

This is the text to display on the screen to recipients. This can be as long as required to communicate the message. The font size is increased or decreased to fill the screen. Words will appear for approximately a third of a second per word plus the time to animate the flashed message on and off the screen. You can adjust the amount of time messages appear by going into the Utilities Menu Settings Display Settings Song Viewer Flash Message.

Color

This is the color to use when displaying the message in lists as well as the text and flash color on the screen. Color can convey information more quickly than reading. The two options combined can be an effective signaling tool.

Choose a color just by tapping on it. If you'd like to add new colors or customize the message color palette, learn more about the Color Picker feature.

Sending Messages

When you select a message from the list of options, the Song Viewer will flash with a colored overlay and text. The message stays on the screen long enough to read the message. Messages with more words stay on the screen for a longer period of time. This same behavior will occur on screens connected with Stage Monitor Mode or OnSong Connect.

Since accessing this menu and tapping on a message can require dexterity you don't have while playing an instrument, you can also map Hot Corners, Navigation Zones, and Foot Pedals to send the message as well.

Words will appear for approximately a third of a second per word, plus the time to animate the flashed message on and off the screen. You can adjust the amount of time messages appear by going into the Utilities Menu Settings Display Settings Song Viewer Flash Message.

Playback Menu

The playback menu helps you configure how backing tracks and the metronome operate in OnSong. You can access the Playback Menu by tapping on the headphones icon in the menubar.

The following can be configured with the playback menu:

Current Track

This section of the playback menu lets you choose the linked song to play with the chord chart. If audio tracks are found for the chord chart, they will appear in this area. Swipe to the left or right to choose the track. If no songs are found, or if this control is swiped to the far right, "No Song Selected" appears. You can then tap on the "music stacks" icon to open the Choose Custom Track screen, allowing you to choose a track in your iTunes Music Library.

Instead of swiping, you can also tap on arrow icons that appear in the upper right corner of this control.

Playback Controls

Below the selected track are playback controls including:

  • Play/Pause/Stop button controls the playback state of the audio track. Tap on the play button to start playing the track and then tap pause to stop the track.
  • Time Scrubber is a slider that allows you to position where to play the audio track. You can scrub to a point in the track regardless of the playback status.
  • Time Code shows the current position of the playback point.
  • Repeat Button allows you to set the playback to repeat after the track has completed.

Song Flow

This provides an alternate way to specify the Flow of the song which is not part of the song content. Type abbreviations in order to specify how your song should be arranged. Once you tap outside of the text area, the song will redraw.

Tap on the button to the right to toggle the flow on and off. Turning it off will draw the song as it is written in the song editor. Turning this on will apply the flow to the song.

Metronome

This area of the playback menu allows you to set the tempo of the song, as well as toggle the metronome on and off. Tap on the play icon on the left to turn the metronome on. Tap again to stop the metronome. Use the slider to adjust the tempo. You can tap in the BPM field to the right of the slider to type in the BPM using the keyboard. The last icon in the metronome area allows you to "tap" the tempo instead of using direct entry.

The tempo can be updated when a new audio track is selected that contains tempo metadata.

Song Duration

The duration of the song effects how long the song will scroll when using autoscroll. Use the slider to adjust the duration or tap in the time field on the right to enter the duration in seconds or MM:SS format. You can toggle the metronome using the down arrow button on the far right.

When a new audio track is linked to a song, OnSong will prompt you if you would like to update the duration of the song to match the audio track.

Time Signature

Buttons allow you to choose a time signature for the song which then affects the metronome. Tap on a button to select that time signature. Tap again on the selected button to remove the time signature. If no time signature is selected, 4/4 time is used for playing the metronome.

If you have more complex time signatures not shown in this list, you can set that using the Song Editor.

New Music on iTunes

OnSong automatically locates albums and tracks on iTunes that may match the title of your chord chart. These are displayed as album artwork at the bottom of the playback menu. Tap on an album to view the album and song in iTunes for purchase.

You can turn off these recommendations by going into Settings Menu Settings Playback.

Share

The share menu allows you to share the selected song or songs in the selected set. From here you can export, email, print, and share wirelessly.

Export

Export the current song or set to iTunes file sharing, Dropbox, and other online services.

Email

Send your set as attachments to your team.

Social

Post to Twitter or Facebook and share your set list with your friends and followers.

Print

Output your songs, sets, or books to paper. Choose from chord charts or a song list.

Open

Open exported formats into other apps.

Beam

Beam your songs or sets wirelessly to other OnSong users.

Start OnCue

Allows you to stream your currently viewed song to other users of OnSong. This keeps everyone on the same page.

Connect

Connect to other devices using OnSong's robust Connect protocol over WiFi.

Beam

The wireless sharing screen displays nearby devices that are running OnSong. While all devices are checked by default, you can check or uncheck devices to receive the currently loaded song or set.

Tap on the Share button in the upper right. You will be prompted before the set is sent. Recipients will receive a prompt inside of OnSong asking if they would like to receive the set. They can accept or decline the song or set. Transferred songs and sets will appear the same as they do on the source device with styles, transposition, annotations, etc.

You can also set up an OnCue streaming session by toggling the "Enable OnCue wireless streaming" switch on the bottom. This will invite the selected devices to join the wireless streaming session for you to control the display on their devices.

Lastly, the refresh button in the lower right corner will refresh the list of devices by disconnecting you from the ad-hoc network and then reestablish that connection after a brief delay.

When you are all done, tap on the Close button in the upper right corner.

Email

You can email your currently selected set or song using OnSong. The email screen allows you to choose the format you would like to send as well as options on how the email is to be sent. You can close the window by tapping the Cancel button in the upper left corner.

File Formats

The majority of this screen contains a list of file formats used to email your song or set. Tapping on one of these file formats will open the Email Composition Screen to complete the email message.

Email Composition Screen

When you select a file format to send, OnSong will open the composition screen with the file or files attached. Here you can specify recipients and include a custom message.

Output Options Menu

There are a few options to choose from when emailing your song or set. Tap on the wrench icon in the lower right to toggle these options on and off. You will need to choose these options prior to selecting the file format.

Note: OnSong does not permit songs other than those selected in the song viewer to be selected. This is because email is limited in the file size and the amount of files that can be transferred without being blocked.

Email Template

This screen lets you alter the email template that is used when sharing your songs and sets via email. OnSong Premium members can access advanced email features including:

Song List

This allows you to determine what types of song information are shared in the song list portion of the generated email. By default, OnSong includes the song title, artist, key, tempo, and time signature.

Variables

The subject and description can change depending on the type of information you are emailing. You can change this by choosing the quantity of content being sent:

  • Song is used when you've selected a single song from the Songs Menu.
  • Set is used when you select a set to be emailed.
  • Backup is used if you've chosen to email a backup file.

Format

This section lets you choose to send a text-based email, or an HTML-formatted one. When you select HTML, the song list is sent as a table. You can tap HTML twice to edit the HTML template.

Colors

When you select HTML as the template format, you change the color used to render the song list table. Tapping on each of these options will open the color builder where you can change:

  • Color is the primary color of the table including the header. By default, this is the App Color
  • Highlight Color is the color to be used in alternating rows. By default, this is the border color at 15% opacity.

HTML Template

When you select the HTML template, you can adjust the HTML code that is used to format the email message. While you'll want to know a thing or two about we development before venturing this far, you can insert the following variables by surrounding the name in square brackets:

Subject

The subject of the email that is generated from the variable.

Color

The border color as specified.

HighlightColor

The highlight color as specified.

Description

The value of the generated description variable.

Content

The generated song list.

Song List

This screen lets you determine the song properties that are included in the song list area of the generated email when you share a set. These values may be outputted as bulleted text, or as columns in an HTML-formatted table. The screen features two lists:

Active

These are the song properties that are desired to be outputted in the song list. You use the reordering handles on the right to change the order of the active properties. In addition, you can drag properties you don't want displayed in the song list to the available section.

Available

These are properties that are available to be included in the song list. To add them, drag then to a position in the active list. When you're done, tap on the Done button to save changes.

Properties

The following are all the properties that are available to be placed in the song list.

  • Title is the song title.
  • Artist is the artist.
  • Key is the key or the transposed key depending if transposition is enabled and if the original key should be shared.
  • Tempo is the BPM of the song.
  • Time is the time signature.
  • Icon is the icon assigned to the song.
  • Number is the song number.
  • Author is the name of the person who authored the document.
  • Capo is the capo setting is capo is enabled and if it is not off.
  • Duration is the duration of the song in h:mm:ss format.
  • CCLI is the CCLI song number.
  • Copyright is the copyright attribution.
  • Instrument is the instrument that is used for the song.
  • Keywords are a comma-delimited list of keywords assigned to the song.
  • Flow is the flow assigned to the song.
  • Lyricist is the person who wrote the lyrics.
  • Composer is the person who wrote the music.

Variables

Variables can be set into the email template depending on the context in which the email is generated. For instance, if you've selected a single song to be emailed versus a set. You select the type in the previous screen to adjust these variables:

Subject

This is the email subject. You can use the variables [[Type]] and [[Name]]. The type is either "song", "set", or "backup". The name is the generated name of the shared item such as the name of the song or set.

Description

This variable is entered as the first line of the email to provide context to the song list and attachments.

Reset

This option will reset the variables for the selected type back to the default options.

Contacts

When sending e-mail, OnSong uses the built-in Mail app to compose and send messages and attachments. This allows you to choose contacts and contact groups you already have on your device. While you can send email to groups, there is no way to manage these groups in iOS. This screen lets you create, edit and delete contact groups as well as contacts without leaving OnSong. This menu contains two tabs:

Contacts

This tab lets you view all people in your contacts as well as view their information and make changes.

Groups

This tab lets you view existing groups as well as create new ones or change who belongs in each group.

Once you're done managing your groups, you can access them when choosing who to send your email to in the email composition screen.

Groups

This screen shows all contact groups in the device's contact database. You can add, edit and delete groups.

New Group

Tap on the + button in the upper right corner to create a new group.

Edit Group

Tap on the name of a group to view and edit the individuals who belong to the group.

Delete Group

Swipe right to left over the group row to reveal a delete button. Tap on the delete button to permanently delete the contact group.

Edit

You can add or remove members to the group by tapping on the group in the group list. Members of the group are indicated with a checkmark to the right of the name.

You can tap on each row to add or remove the member from the group accordingly. The number of members in the group are reflected in the title bar to the right of the name of the group.

New

You can create a new group by simply providing a name.

Tap the Create button in the upper right corner to add a new group to the contact database with no members. You can then tap on the group name in the list to add members.

Tap Cancel to go back to the group list without creating a group.

People

This tab shows you all the people found in your contact list. You can scroll through the list of contacts that are indexed by name. You can perform the following actions from this screen.

Add Contact

Tap on the + button in the upper right corner to add a new contact.

View Contact

You can tap on the name of a contact to view the contact. From this screen you can also edit the contact if needed.

Edit Contact

Once you tap on a person in the contact list, you can also edit the contact.

Delete Contact

Swipe right to left over the row to reveal a delete button. Tapping on this button will permanently delete the contact from the database.

Add

You can create a new contact without ever leaving OnSong. This screen will automatically create the new contact on your device so you can access all of the built-in features of iOS like caller ID, sharing and sending information to this person in other apps.

You can set the following fields:

  • Photo
  • First Name
  • Last Name
  • Company
  • Phone Numbers
  • Email Addresses
  • Ringtone
  • Text Tone
  • Web Addresses
  • Physical Addresses
  • Birthday
  • Dates such as an annivesary
  • Related Names
  • Social Profiles
  • Instant Messenger Usernames
  • Notes
  • Other Fields

Note: this screen is managed by iOS and may change appearance depending on the version of iOS you are running.

Edit

You can edit and existing contact without ever leaving OnSong. This screen will update the contact on your device so you can access all of the built-in features of iOS like caller ID, sharing and sending information to this person in other apps.

You can edit the following fields:

  • Photo
  • First Name
  • Last Name
  • Company
  • Phone Numbers
  • Email Addresses
  • Ringtone
  • Text Tone
  • Web Addresses
  • Physical Addresses
  • Birthday
  • Dates such as an annivesary
  • Related Names
  • Social Profiles
  • Instant Messenger Usernames
  • Notes
  • Other Fields

Note: this screen is managed by iOS and may change appearance depending on the version of iOS you are running.

View

When you tap on a person's name in the contact list, you are given information about that contact. You can tap on certain fields to call, email, locate or schedule based on the type of information in the field.

Tap on the Edit button to edit the selected contact.

Fields you can view and edit include:

  • Photo
  • Full Name
  • Nickname
  • Company
  • Phone Numbers
  • Email Addresses
  • Web Addresses
  • Physical Addresses
  • Birthday
  • Dates such as an anniversary
  • Related Names
  • Social Profiles
  • Instant Messenger Usernames
  • Notes
  • Other Fields

Note: this screen is managed by iOS and may change appearance depending on the version of iOS you are running.

Email Composition Screen

The email composition screen is provided by the operating system where you can choose recipients and customize the message. Once a file format is selected, this screen will appear full screen to finish the email.

To

Type in the recipients of the message, or tap on the + button on the right to select contacts from your contacts.

Cc/Bcc

Type in additional recipients to be carbon copied or blind carbon copied. Tap on the + button on the right to select from your contacts.

Subject

OnSong provides a standard subject line declaring what has been attached. You can modify this subject if desired.

Body

Here you can enter text to address your recipients.

Attachments

The files that have been outputted will show as attachments. Files such as PDF that are one page may appear in the body of the email instead of as file icons.

Export

The export screen is used to export the selected song or set in popular file formats. Besides allowing you to choose the file format for export, this screen also allows you to set options, pick specific songs to export, and change your export location. When you are all done, tap on the Export button in the upper right corner to export and optionally upload your files. Tapping on the Cancel button in the upper left corner will close the window.

File Formats

The majority of this screen contains a list of file formats to which you can export your song, set, or chosen collection of songs. Tap on a row to place a checkmark next to the file formats you want to export. OnSong remembers the formats you've picked for next time.

Output Options Menu

There are a few options to choose from when exporting your song or set. Tap on the wrench icon in the lower right to toggle these options on and off.

Song Picker

Tapping on the papers icon in the lower right will open the song picker menu. Here you can change which songs are exported.

Location Picker

Tapping on the folder icon in the lower right will open the location picker. Here you can choose between iTunes file sharing, Dropbox, or other export sources.

Export Menu

The export menu lets you choose a location where exported content should be saved. If you have more than one file to export, the number of items is displayed in parenthesis in the title.

OnSong supports four general locations with the last option allowing for future expansion to web services that implement standard access protocols.

Dropbox

Dropbox is a file storage service that allows you to place your important documents in the cloud. This means that they are near instantly available on all your devices, making the service a great candidate for backing up your library. Tapping on the Dropbox option allows you to select a folder in your Dropbox where you would like your files exported.

Google Drive

Dropbox is a cloud-based storage service that allows you to store documents in the cloud. This means that they are near instantly available on all your devices, making the service a great candidate for backing up your library or storing files. Tapping on the Google Drive option allows you to select a folder in your Google Drive where you would like your files exported.

iTunes File Sharing

This option allows the user to export to iTunes file sharing. This is a special folder contained inside of the OnSong app which can be accessed through iTunes. This means that the file is stored on your device until it is saved off of the device through the iTunes application on a computer.

Files

iOS has the ability to export files to apps from storage providers that support integration with the iOS Files app. Use this option to select a location and folder where the file should be exported.

Other

Some online storage services have support for open standards, allowing files to be securely stored and retrieved without individual configurations. Use this option if you would like to add an online source that supports Amazon S3, FTP or WebDAV protocols.

Song Picker

The song picker menu displays which songs are to be outputted, as well as allowing for you to select more songs if desired.

Most of the picker menu is comprised of your song list. Here you can search and browse for songs. Tap on a song to place or remove a checkmark. Check marked songs will be added to the export list. You can also tap on the Select All or Deselect All buttons at the bottom to do just that.

When you are finished, tap on the Done button to change the songs to be outputted. Tap on the Cancel button to close the picker without changing the song selected for output.

Location Picker

The location picker allows you to change the location where files are to be exported. OnSong supports three general locations with the last option allowing for future expansion to web services that implement standard access protocols.

iTunes File Sharing

This option allows the user to export to iTunes file sharing. This is a special folder contained inside of the OnSong app which can be accessed through iTunes. This means that the file is stored on your device until it is saved off of the device through the iTunes application on a computer.

Dropbox

Dropbox is a file storage service that allows you to place your important documents in the cloud. This means that they are near instantly available on all your devices, making the service a great candidate for backing up your library. Tapping on the Dropbox option allows you to select a folder in your Dropbox where you would like your files exported.

Files

Files lets you export to a service that supports the Files app in iOS 11, formerly known as storage providers in earlier versions of iOS. When this is selected, the Files interface will be presented when you tap on the Export button in the export screen.

Other

Some online storage services have support for open standards, allowing files to be securely stored and retrieved without individual configurations. Use this option if you would like to add an online source that supports Amazon S3, FTP or WebDAV protocols.

Google Drive

Google Drive is a cloud-based storage solution, making it a great way to transfer files between all your devices.

Choosing a Location

When you select to export to Google Drive, OnSong displays the contents of your Google Drive. From here you can choose the folder in which you would like to export your files.

Tap on folders to open them. Once you find a place to export your files, tap on the Choose button in the upper right to select that location and return to the export screen.

Creating Folders

You can create a new folder by tapping on the "+" button in the lower right corner.

Signing Into Google Drive

If this is your first time using Google Drive from within OnSong, you may need to sign in to you account. You can also sign out of Google Drive by tapping on the button in the lower left corner.

Dropbox Location Chooser

Dropbox is a cloud-based storage solution, making it a great way to transfer files between all your devices.

Choosing a Location

When you select to export to Dropbox, OnSong displays the contents of your Dropbox. From here you can choose the folder in which you would like to export your files.

Tap on folders to open them. Once you find a place to export your files, tap on the Choose button in the upper right to select that location and return to the export screen.

Creating Folders

You can create a new folder by tapping on the "+" button in the lower right corner.

Signing Into Dropbox

If this is your first time using Dropbox from within OnSong, you may need to sign in to you account. You can also sign out of Dropbox by tapping on the button in the lower left corner.

File Sharing

iTunes File sharing is designed to move files on and off of your device via the iTunes application.

Connecting Your Device

To use iTunes file sharing, connect your device to your computer with the supplied USB cable. Next, open the iTunes application. iTunes is available as a free download from Apple and is the software used for managing your iOS devices.

Once iTunes is opened, tap on your device in the upper right corner to the left of the iTunes Store button. This will take you to your phone information screen.

Finding File Sharing

Once in this screen, tap on the Apps tab at the top and then scroll down. The File Sharing section is found at the bottom of that screen. Tap on OnSong on the left and then draw or add files on the right using the Add... button at the bottom. Optionally, if OnSong has exported files to this location you can select those files and tap on the Save to... button to save them on your computer.

Remember that you can select multiple files by holding down the SHIFT or CTRL (PC) or command (Mac) keys. You can also delete files in this list by selecting them and pressing the DELETE key on your computer keyboard.

Important

It is important to note that if you export an OnSong Backup file to iTunes File Sharing, you need to save the file to your computer using iTunes. If the backup file is located on your device and the device is lost, stolen, broken, or inaccessible for any reason, you will not be able to retrieve your OnSong library.

Other

You can choose to export to an other source instead of iTunes file sharing or Dropbox.

Choosing

Tap on a source to browse for a folder where the files should be exported into.

Editing

Tap on the Edit button in the upper right corner to enter Editing Mode. Here you can add new sources or edit existing ones.

Choose Export Folder

You can navigate your other import source until you find a suitable location to export into. Once you've found a folder, tap on the Choose button in the upper right corner.

Once you tap on the Choose button, the screen returns to the Export Screen.

You can add a new folder by tapping on the + button in the lower right corner.

Editing

Tap on the Edit button in the sources list to enter editing mode. From there you can tap on a source to make changes to it, or tap on the Add New Source row to create a new source.

Deleting

Tap on the red minus icon to reveal a Delete button. Tapping on this will remove the source.

Editing Source

Tap on the name of the source to open the Source Editor to make changes to the source.

Add New Source

Tap on the bottom row to open the Source Editor to specify information for a new source.

Tap on the Done button when you are done editing the sources to select a source.

Source Editor

When adding a new source or editing an existing one, the source editor is displayed. This lets you specify connection parameters to your network-connected storage service.

Title

Provide a title for your source so you can identify it in the sources list.

Type

Choose the type of service that you will be connecting to. This can be one of the following options:

  • FTP or File Transfer Protocol can connect to older file servers.
  • Amazon S3 or Simple Storage Service is hosted by Amazon as a mechanism for storing content for web services.
  • WebDAV or Web-based Distributed Authoring and Versioning is a file storage standard that allows network connected services to be treated like a local hard drive.

Host or Bucket

This is the web address or IP address of the service. When using Amazon S3, this is the optional bucket to access in S3.

Path

This is the directory to use as the root of the service that is being accessed.

Use SSL

Turn this on if communication should be performed securely.

Authenticate?

Turn this on if authentication is required for the service. The following fields will not be used if authentication is turned off.

Username or Access Key

The username used to authenticate against the service. When using Amazon S3, this is the Access Key for your account.

Password or Secret Key

The password used to authenticate against the service. When using Amazon S3, this is the Secret Key generated for the account.

OnSong Connect

OnSong Connect is a communications layer in OnSong that allows your device to control or to be controlled by other compatible apps on your local network using WiFi. OnSong uses this communications layer to "connect" devices together with a robust network. This allows you to share your music by either beaming songs and sets, or by sharing the music on a leader's device with other members of the team.

The Connect screen contains five tabs that comprise the various levels to connection of devices, as well as tools for customizing how your device participates in OnSong Connect.

Devices

Devices are other iOS devices that are currently running OnSong. You can use this screen connect devices so that they become clients.

Clients

Clients are devices that are currently connected to you. You can disconnect clients on this screen as well as send messages.

Servers

Servers are devices that have opted to control other devices. You can connect to running servers on this screen, or promote your device to a server.

Pairing

There has been some experimental work done in OnSong to allow other devices such as Google Glass to connect via OnSong Connect. This screen provides information for pairing those devices.

Profile

This screen tells others on the OnSong Connect who you are, as well as configures how you would like to view music streamed to you via OnSong Connect.

Clients

The clients tab displays devices that are currently connected to your device.

Client List

The main area of this screen is a list of devices that are currently connected to you. These devices will receive songs and navigational commands from you. Tap on each client to select them and then use the Action Menu to disconnect those clients, or to send them a message.

Action Menu

The action menu allows you to perform actions with the selected set of clients. This is commonly used to disconnect them.

Toolbar

At the bottom of the screen is a toolbar that provides the following actions:

  • Select All will select all devices in the above list except for yourself.
  • Deselect All will remove the marks from all devices in the list.
  • Refresh Button will temporarily shut down OnSong Connect services on the device and then reconnect. This will force devices to be found again.

Action Menu

The action menu allows you to perform actions on the selected clients in your list. This includes:

Disconnect

This disconnects the selected devices from you so you are no longer sending content or navigational commands to them.

Send Start

This sends a start message to the selected clients in your list. This displays the word "Start" on the screen with a green flash and text.

Send Slow

This sends a slow message to the selected clients in your list. This displays the word "Slow" on the screen with a yellow flash and text.

Send Stop

This sends a stop message to the selected clients in your list. This displays the word "Stop" on the screen with a red flash and text.

Send Message

This allows you to send a custom message to the selected clients in your list. Type a message in the prompt and then send. The message is displayed in grey with a grey flash.

Devices

The devices tab displays devices on your local network that have OnSong up and running. When OnSong is running, it broadcasts your availability to be connected to OnSong Connect. This list will also display yourself.

Device List

The device list is the main area of the screen and displays the name of the device, as well as the IP address and port on which OnSong Connect is running on the device. The icon on the left of each device displays its form factor (phone or tablet), as well as an indicator if it's currently a server.

Tap on items in this list to add a checkmark. You can then perform actions on marked items with the Action Menu.

Action Menu

The action menu allows you to perform actions on selected devices. Use this menu to connect to device, or to simply beam your currently loaded content to them.

Toolbar

At the bottom of the screen is a toolbar that provides the following actions:

  • Select All will select all devices in the above list except for yourself.
  • Deselect All will remove the marks from all devices in the list.
  • Refresh Button will temporarily shut down OnSong Connect services on the device and then reconnect. This will force devices to be found again.

Action Menu

When you have devices selected in the Devices tab, tap on the actions menu to either connect or beam content to those devices.

Connect

This option will send an invitation to selected devices to be controlled by your device. Once they accept this invitation, the current song and set are sent to their device for display only. In addition, you can then control their device with yours. Each scroll operation and more are mirrored on their device.

Users can customize how music appears on their device using the Profile tab.

Beam

Beam is different from the connect option in that it sends the currently loaded song or set to the selected devices. This will appear as an invitation to accept the set or song on the user's devices.

Note: Beamed songs and sets are loaned by default. This means that you can view the song temporarily and sets are added to your My Sets list. However, songs are not added to the recipients' library. This is to prevent distribution of copyrighted material without your consent. You can change this in Settings » Menu Settings » Sharing.

Pairing

There has been some experimental work done in OnSong to allow other devices such as Google Glass to connect via OnSong Connect. This screen provides information for pairing those devices.

The majority of the screen is comprised of a giant QR Code. This is like a bar code that holds information about your device.

So what information is shared exactly? Look closely at the top of the screen and you'll notice your web address. This is the endpoint to the OnSong Connect services API. That's all that Google Glass needs to connect.

The OnSong Google Glass app uses the built in camera on the device to scan this code and setup the connection. This is a much faster way than trying to speak the IP address or tap it in on your temple.

We have made this app for Google Glass as a way to experiment and get input from worship leaders and musicians on the use of this type of technology on stage. The general consensus is that it is too expensive and too invasive/noticeable to audiences. We will continue to look into using this as the technology becomes less apparent and more cost-effective.

Profile

The profile tab allows you to configure how you appear on the OnSong local network, as well as how song content is streamed to you. Use this screen to customize the way music appears to you when you receive it from a leader's device.

My Information

This text field allows you to change what you're called on the network. By default this is the same name as your device. Change this to something that's better suited to your musicianship like "Guitar Overlord".

Song Version

OnSong Connect sends the text-based chord chart or external file from the leader's device. However, you may have your own version of the music that you want to use. You can use that version instead.

  • None will not change the song on your device when the leader changes songs. Use this option if you are only using OnSong Connect for other features such as messages.
  • Use my version will use your version of the chord chart if one can be found. OnSong matches based on the song title, number, CCLI number, or provider identifier.
  • Use the shared version will always use the version that is sent from the leader's device. Default.

Custom

Options in this list allow you to change how music appears and other services that are used. When the default option is selected, the shared version's preferences are used. These customization options include:

  • Audio will allow your device's backing track to start or stop based on when the leader initiates or stops their backing track. Default is off.
  • Metronome will allow your device's metronome to start and stop based on the leader toggling the metronome. Default is off. Note: There is latency in starting and stopping the metronome. Starting multiple metronomes are not recommended as they may all start at slightly different times. This is caused by latency inherent in the wireless network of a few milliseconds.
  • Navigation allows you to determine if you want the leader to control page scrolling and zooming. Turn this off if you would rather do that yourself. Default is on.
  • Lyrics allows you to turn lyric display on or off. Turn off if you are a guitarist that don't need no stinking lyrics. Turn it on otherwise. Default is "default" which uses the preference from the shared version.
  • Chords allows you to turn chords on or off. If you are a vocalist, you can choose to turn the chords off for instance. Default is "default" which uses the preference from the shared version.
  • External File will allow you to use or not use the external file of the song if it exists. Pianists may turn this on to receive a lead sheet or score while the rest of the team receives a chord chart. Default is "default" which uses the preference from the shared version.
  • Transpose determines if the song is to be transposed in its declared key or not. You can use this to write a song in a key that can be used for one instrument, and then transposed to another. Default is "default" which uses the preference from the shared version.
  • Capo determines if capo should be applied to the chord chart. Guitarists should turn this on and bassists and pianists can turn it off. Default is "default" which uses the preference from the shared version.
  • Diagrams allow you to determine if chord diagrams are drawn on your chord chart. You're an expert huh? Go ahead and turn it off as you revel in some superiority (not too much). Default is "default" which uses the preference from the shared version.
  • Instrument allows you to choose the instrument that you play. This is used for drawing chords differently from you. We all know you play jazz ukulele, so just set it here. No more guitar chords for you. Default is "default" which uses the preference from the shared version.

Servers

The servers tab will display servers on the OnSong local network including yourself.

Connecting to Servers

Tap on a server in this list to connect yourself. This will open a prompt on the server giving the leader an opportunity to accept the connect or deny it.

Reading the API

If you tap on yourself in this list, a web browser will open with the OnSong Connect API documentation. This can be used to allow developers to create apps that work with OnSong. You can access the API documentation here.

Becoming a Server

At the bottom of the screen is a switch called Share your library with others. Turn this on to become a server yourself. After a brief moment you will be added to the list above.

Recycling

The recycle button in the lower right corner is designed to remove any and all "hooks" that are attached to you. Hooks are how OnSong sends content to clients. This button will also clear the current whitelist of approved devices requiring you to approve connection of those devices.

Press this button to disconnect everything and reset your server. You must then reconnect to clients in the Devices tab.

Open

While some companies lock you into their app, OnSong lets you interact with other apps by offering the ability to open exported files directly in supported apps.

When you choose the Open option, the Open In screen will appear to choose a format. Choose the formats you wish to send to another app. Remember that if you select multiple files, not all will be transferred to another app without also turning on "As ZIP file" in the output options.

Open In Button

The Open In button is disabled until at least one file format is selected. When tapped, a menu will appear displaying apps that support the selected file formats.

File Formats

The majority of this screen contains a list of file formats that will be generated to be opened in another app. Tap on a row to place a checkmark next to the file formats you want to export. OnSong remembers the formats you've picked for next time.

Output Options Menu

There are a few options to choose from when opening your song or set in another app. Tap on the wrench icon in the lower right to toggle these options on and off.

App Picker

OnSong uses the built-in app picker based on the type of file format you've decided to use. This is based on the apps that you have installed on your device. Tap on an app icon to open that app and transfer the file to it.

Note: The app that is being opened must support files being opened with it.

You can also transfer the file using AirDrop to another device if using iOS 7 or higher.

Print

Choosing the share's print option opens the Print Preview Screen. This provides a number of tools to customize the print job before sending it to a printer, or to another app or location. This screen features:

Share Button

This button appears to the right of the print button and allows you to share the songs to another app or system service instead of printing it.

Print Menu

When you are ready to print, tap on the Print button in the upper right. A menu will appear allowing you to select your printer and the number of copies to print.

Print Preview

The majority of the screen is the print preview. OnSong generates a PDF file for the print job and this is displayed in this area. Scroll down through the output.

Print Mode Button

In the lower left corner appears the print mode button (iOS 6 and higher). Tap on this button to toggle between the default mode of printing chord charts and the secondary mode of printing a song list. Print Options change depending on the mode selected.

Font Scale Slider

The bottom center of the print preview screen contains a slider which is used to adjust the size of outputted fonts to better fit the output to pages. Slide this to the left or right to shrink or enlarge the font. You can also tap on the icons on the left and right to adjust the scale by 1%.

Print Options

This menu allows you to configure what to include in the printout, paper size, and margins, as well as multi-page functions to conserve paper by printing many pages on one sheet.

Print Menu

When you tap on the print option, you are presented with a print menu that allows you to choose a printer as well as the number of copies to print.

Printer

Tap on the Select Printer row to choose a printer. This will search for nearby printers on your network. OnSong uses AirPrint to print documents. To determine if your printer is supported by AirPrint, or to find a printer that supports AirPrint, please refer to the About AirPrint support document.

Copies

Use the stepper control to adjust the number of copies you want to output.

Print Button

Tap on the print button to send the print job to the printer.

Share Menu

While the main function of the print preview screen is to print songs and sets to paper, you can also share the print job with other apps, or export to iTunes file sharing or Dropbox. Tapping on the share menu will provide the operating system native sharing menu with the following options:

AirDrop (iOS 7.0 and higher)

You can send your print job to another device running AirDrop. This will wirelessly send a PDF file to the other iPad or iPhone. This does require iOS 7.0 or higher and only works on compatible hardware. When a nearby device is running with AirDrop support, tap on the name of the device to send the generated PDF file to it.

Apps

Apps that can open the PDF file are automatically displayed. This list is controlled by iOS and typically includes the Mail app for send email and the Messages app for sending the content as an iMessage or SMS.

Actions

In addition to sending the PDF to apps, you can also perform additional actions. This list includes:

  • Copy to copy the file into the clipboard for pasting in another app.
  • Print to open the print menu to pick a printer and print copies.
  • Export to send the PDF file to either iTunes file sharing or Dropbox.

Export Activity Screen

When you choose the export action in the share menu, you are prompted for where you would like to export your file. The file that is generated is named after the song, set, or book that has been exported with a PDF file extension. If you export a list, the word "List" is appended to the end of the file name.

iTunes File Sharing

Tapping on the iTunes file sharing option will export the file to a folder on your device. This can be accessed via a computer running iTunes connected to your device with the supplied USB charge and sync cable.

Dropbox

Tapping on the Dropbox option will allow you to select the folder where you can export the files.

File Sharing

iTunes File sharing is designed to move files on and off of your device via the iTunes application.

Connecting Your Device

To use iTunes file sharing, connect your device to your computer with the supplied USB cable. Next, open the iTunes application. iTunes is available as a free download from Apple and is the software used for managing your iOS devices.

Once iTunes is opened, tap on your device in the upper right corner to the left of the iTunes Store button. This will take you to your phone information screen.

Finding File Sharing

Once in this screen, tap on the Apps tab at the top and then scroll down. The File Sharing section is found at the bottom of that screen. Tap on OnSong on the left and then draw or add files on the right using the Add... button at the bottom. Optionally, if OnSong has exported files to this location you can select those files and tap on the Save to... button to save them on your computer.

Remember that you can select multiple files by holding down the SHIFT or CTRL (PC) or command (Mac) keys. You can also delete files in this list by selecting them and pressing the DELETE key on your computer keyboard.

Important

It is important to note that if you export an OnSong Backup file to iTunes File Sharing, you need to save the file to your computer using iTunes. If the backup file is located on your device and the device is lost, stolen, broken, or inaccessible for any reason, you will not be able to retrieve your OnSong library.

Dropbox

Choosing the Dropbox option for sharing a printout will prompt you for an export location. Navigate to the folder where you would like the PDF file exported and tap on the Export button in the upper right corner.

Linking to Dropbox

If you are not signed into Dropbox, OnSong will automatically begin linking to your Dropbox account. If you have the Dropbox app installed on your device, you will be directed to the Dropbox app to authorize access to the OnSong app. If you do not have the Dropbox app installed, another screen appears which is a web-based authorization form provided by Dropbox. The entire authorization process is handled by Dropbox and no information is passed to the OnSong app.

Signing Out

If you need to sign out of Dropbox for any reason, tap on the Sign Out button in the lower left corner. You will then be prompted to sign into Dropbox or authorize your account again.

Creating Folders

If you would like to export the PDF file to a new folder, tap on the + button in the lower right corner to create a new folder. Once created you will need to select the folder and tap on the Export button.

Options Menu

The print options menu allows you to define what is to be printed and how it is to be printed. This menu is comprised of three tabs to help organize these options:

Output Options

This tab allows you to choose what is printed including what songs are included in the output, any alterations to the output, as well as extras to be included or omitted from the printed version.

Page Layout

OnSong uses the default paper size as used to draw the chord charts on the screen. You can change the paper size and margins using the page layout tab.

Multipage

You can reduce the amount of paper you print, or create less clutter for musicians using printed music by using multipage. This will print multiple pages on a single physical sheet of paper.

Multipage

Multipage allows you to print more than one page per physical sheet of paper. Not only does this conserve paper and make printing faster, but it can also reduce clutter in circumstances where additional paper would be unusable.

The multipage menu allows you to configure the properties of the page that is outputted. Values set in the Page Layout Menu are used for drawing each page on the multipage sheet. Options are arranged into the following sections:

Multipage

To turn on multipage, you will need to select how many pages to draw on a single, physical sheet. OnSong uses printing press jargon of "n-up" to indicate how many pages are placed on a sheet.

The orientation of the physical sheet is determined by the quantity of pages and the page orientation set in the Page Layout Menu. For instance, if you select 2-Up and the portrait orientation is used, then OnSong will output both pages on a single, landscape sheet. If the pages are defined as being in the landscape orientation, then two pages are printed on a single physical page in the portrait orientation.

Options include:

  • Off is equivalent to 1-up in that the page is printed directly to the printer. Default.
  • 2-Up places two pages adjacent to each other on a single page.
  • 4-Up places four pages in a grid on a single page.
  • 8-Up places eight pages in a grid on a single page.
  • 16-Up places sixteen pages in a grid on a single page.

Paper Size

This is the size of the physical paper to print other pages upon and can be different than the paper size set in the Page Layout. The paper size found in Page Layout is used by default. Options include:

  • Letter (8.5" x 11")
  • Legal (8.5" x 14")
  • Tabloid (11" x 17")
  • A5 (148mm x 210mm)
  • A4 (210mm x 297mm)
  • A3 (297mm x 420mm)

Margins

Margins can be set individually for the top, left, bottom, and right margins. Margins are set to those found in Page Layout by default. Options include:

  • 0"
  • 1/8"
  • 1/4"
  • 3/8"
  • 1/2"
  • 5/8"
  • 3/4"
  • 7/8"
  • 1"
  • 1-1/8"
  • 1-1/4"
  • 1-3/8"
  • 1-1/2"

Gutter

The gutter is printing press jargon for the space between columns. In this screen, you can place space between each of the pages drawn on the physical sheet of paper. Options include:

  • 0" places pages adjacent to each other. Default.
  • 1/8"
  • 1/4"
  • 3/8"
  • 1/2"
  • 5/8"
  • 3/4"
  • 7/8"
  • 1"
  • 1-1/8"
  • 1-1/4"
  • 1-3/8"
  • 1-1/2"

*Note: OnSong automatically draws an outline around each outputted page to indicate it's bounds on the physical sheet or paper.

Output Options

The output options tab defines what is outputted on the printout. It has the following options:

Print

Here you determine how many songs are to be printed. If you have a set selected in OnSong, the set is automatically selected to be printed. If you have selected a single song from your library, then only that song will be selected. You can also print an entire book.

  • Song displays the current song title. When it is selected, it will either 1) output the song's chord chart or 2) place the single song in your song list (which isn't too useful). This is selected by default when you have chosen to print chord charts and a single song is selected.
  • Set displays the current set title. When selected, it will output every song in the currently selected set. If you are outputting a song list, then the songs in that set are outputted in the list in the order they appear in the set. This option is selected when you are viewing a set in OnSong.
  • Book will output every song in the book. This option is selected by default if you have chosen to print a song list and only have one song selected. If you choose the option when printing chord charts, you will receive an alert, since generating many song chord charts to print can take a long time.

Output Options

This section of the menu allows you to toggle two options on and off that affect chord chart printing.

  • Lyrics only can be used to omit chords from the print out. This is useful for sing-a-long sheets or if printing lyrics for a vocalist.
  • Original key will remove the transposition that was applied to the song, displaying the key in which the song was written.
  • Song flow determines if the song flow tag should be used to affect printing. If enabled, the song is printed in the arrangement specified by flow attributes.

Extras

This section of the menu allows you to toggle certain options on and off for what to include on the page. This changes depending if you are outputting chord charts or a song list.

Song List Extras

When printing a song list, the extras section is used to determine what columns should be outputted in the song list table. These columns are presented in the order they will appear in the song list table output.

  • Number is the number assigned to the song using the number metadata.
  • CCLI Song # will output the song's CCLI song number as declared in metadata.
  • Title will output the song title.
  • Artist will output the name of the artist.
  • Key will output the key of the song. To output the original key of the song, use the original key option in output options.
  • Capo will output the capo amount.
  • Tempo will output the tempo as BPM.
  • Time will output the time signature.
  • Duration will output the time duration of the song.

Chord Chart Extras

When printing chord charts, the extras section is used to determine what information is outputted in the footer. This includes:

Include Page Numbers

When this is enabled, the page numbers are outputted in the lower right corner of the page. This is enabled by default.

Include Song Title

When this is enabled, the song title of the song is outputted in the footer of each page. This is outputted in the lower left corner of the page.

Include Artist Name

When this is enabled, the artist name of the song is outputted in the footer of each page. This is outputted in the lower left corner of the page.

Page Layout

The page layout menu allows you to adjust the type and dimensions of the paper you print on. Options are divided into the following sections:

Paper Orientation

This is the orientation of the paper and includes the following options:

  • Portrait aligns the paper to be taller than it is wide. Default.
  • Landscape aligns the paper to be wider than it is tall.

Paper Size

This is the standard size of the paper to print. The default value is defined in settings for how to render the page on-screen. Options include:

  • Letter (8.5" x 11") - Default
  • Legal (8.5" x 14")
  • Tabloid (11" x 17")
  • A5 (148mm x 210mm)
  • A4 (210mm x 297mm)
  • A3 (297mm x 420mm)

Margins

Margins can be set individually for the top, left, bottom, and right margins. Margins assume the default values as defined in settings for the page rendering on-screen. Options include:

  • 0"
  • 1/8"
  • 1/4"
  • 3/8"
  • 1/2"
  • 5/8"
  • 3/4" Default.
  • 7/8"
  • 1"
  • 1-1/8"
  • 1-1/4"
  • 1-3/8"
  • 1-1/2"

Social

You can promote your set list using OnSong by socially sharing your set list on Facebook or Twitter. When you choose social for sharing, you are prompted to choose a social network. Tap on one of the options to open a panel for completing the tweet or post.

Facebook

Use Facebook to post on your timeline.

Twitter

Use Twitter to tweet your setlist to your followers.

SMS

Send a list of song titles in your set with iMessage or SMS. If you do not have text messaging or iMessage enabled on your device, this option will appear greyed out and you will not be able to send share via SMS.

Copy

If you need to share your song list in other social apps, tap on the copy option to have the web address of the shareable web site copied into your clipboard. You can then paste the URL into another app.

Broadcast Picker

This screen is opened by the operating system and allows you to choose a video conferencing app to use for sharing your screen. Additionally, you can send your screen to the Photos app for recording the session as a video.

Recording Status

The top portion of this interface displays a recording button. When screen sharing/recording starts, this shows a countdown. Tap on the picker interface to close the picker.

App List

In the middle of this interface is a list of mostly video conferencing apps installed on your device that are compatible with screen sharing. Choose an app to use. This app will be remembered so you only have to choose it once.

Start/Stop Broadcast

To begin broadcasting/recording, tap on the Start Broadcast button. Alternately, if you open this screen again, this button will display Stop Broadcasting which can be tapped to stop the broadcast.

Microphone Off/On

Use this button to determine if your microphone should be enabled. Since you are most likely already using the microphone in the other app, you may not want to enable this. If you are recording the video and would like to narrate, turn this on.

Tap anywhere in the system broadcast picker to close the screen.

Twitter

Choosing the Twitter option will open a panel to allow you to post to your Twitter timeline. The titles of songs in your set will be written in the tweet details. OnSong will also include a link to a custom website on onsongapp.com to provide additional details about the set.

You can optionally choose your current location. When you are finished, tap on the Post button in the upper right to send the tweet. You can also tap on the Cancel button to close the panel without posting.

Facebook

Choosing the Facebook option will open a panel to allow you to post to your Facebook timeline. The titles of songs in your set will be written in the post details. OnSong will also include a link to a custom website on onsongapp.com to provide additional details about the set.

You can optionally choose your current location and the audience to address with the Facebook post. When you are finished, tap on the Post button in the upper right to send the post. You can also tap on the Cancel button to close the panel without posting.

SMS

Choosing the SMS option will open a panel to allow you to send the song titles in the currently selected set to SMS or iMessage recipients. OnSong will also include a link to a custom website on onsongapp.com to provide additional details about the set.

Add recipients in the To field. When you are finished, tap on the Send button to the right of the generated text to send it to the recipients. You can also tap on the Cancel button to close the panel without sending.

Song Editor

The song editor allows you to make changes to text-based chord charts. This screen features the following user interface components to help you create and edit your chord charts:

Menubar

The menubar contains tools for helping you edit your chord chart. In addition, you can save your changes by tapping on the Done button, or discard any changes you've made using the Cancel button.

Text Editor

The majority of the screen is consumed by the text editor. This displays the content of your song file for editing. Tap into the text editor to make changes using the on-screen keyboard and quick chord bar.

Quick Chord Bar

The quick chord bar appears above the keyboard and provides buttons to quickly insert chords or symbols into your chord chart.

On-Screen Keyboard

When the cursor is placed into the text editor, the on-screen keyboard appears. This section will discuss intricacies of the on-screen keyboard you may find helpful.

Conversion Toolbar (not shown)

When editing a song that was imported using a non-text file format, the conversion toolbar appears under the on-screen keyboard to provide the ability to convert the file into text.

Compact Mode

When using OnSong on iPhone, iPod Touch, or when running OnSong in a split screen, the song editor is altered displaying less menubar buttons while offering the same functionality. The menubar contains:

Done Button

Tapping on the done button will prompt you to save any changes you have made. You can choose to save or discard those changes. This is different from the iPad version which has both a Done and Cancel button.

Undo Button

The undo button will undo the last action that was recorded in the Text Editor undo history.

Redo Button

Counter to the undo button is the redo button which adds actions performed in the Text Editor back after being undone.

Action Menu

All other functions of editing the song are moved into the action menu which can be accessed by tapping on the button to the far right of the menubar.

Conversion Toolbar

The conversion toolbar that is shown at the bottom of the editor on the iPad version is omitted from the compact version due to already limited screen real estate. It's function is replicated in the Action Menu.

Action Menu

The menubar functions of the iPad version of the song editor are accessible in this menu:

Edit Metadata

The metadata editor gives you fields to complete in order to set the metadata content of the song.

Change Book

This menu lets you add the song to books without adding metadata.

Extract Text/Revert From Text

This button will either extract the text of the imported file and overwrite the contents of the text editor, or revert to the last known version of the song contents before extraction took place.

Use Extracted Text/Use Imported File

This option is used to toggle between displaying the imported file in the song viewer, or using the extracted text instead. This options is automatically toggled during the extraction process.

Rewrite Into Key

This menu allows you to rewrite the current song content into a different key for easier editing.

Text Tools

This button will open the text tools menu which gives you tools to perform on the text content of the song like search and replace, or changing the chord format of the text.

Delete

Tapping on the red delete option will delete the song. This will prompt you before deleting the song in case you accidentally tap on the button.

Cancel

This button closes the action menu.

Extracting text and switching between the imported and text-based versions of the song are only available on songs containing imported files and whether that file contains extractable text.

Conversion Toolbar

The conversion toolbar appears at the bottom of the screen when you first open the song editor. This will only appear for songs that have originated from imported files. This bar includes two components:

Convert File

When you have a file where conversion is supported, the convert file button appears. Tapping on this button will begin the conversion process. Once completed, a Revert File button will appear here to switch back to the text content prior to the conversion.

Use the imported file instead of OnSong

This switch allows you to toggle between the text-based version of the song and the external file that was imported. This can be useful during the conversion process or to maintain two distinct versions of a song.

Extract Text

OnSong can extract text from nearly any file type that it can import. The following extraction methods are supported by OnSong.

Adobe PDF Text (.pdf)

Extracts text content from PDF files and uses positioning to determine line breaks. PDF files are designed to accurately replicate the printed page and may not contact textual content. This may result in the PDF file being submitted for OCR or optical character recognition.

Apple Pages (.pages)

Older versions of Pages can be converted. Newer versions are not currently supported due to changes in the file format. If you need to convert newer Pages files, please export as a plain-text file from the word processing application.

HTML Files (.html)

This method extracts text and strips HTML tags from web-viewable files like HTML.

OpenOffice Text (.odt)

OpenOffice files can be converted into text despite some versions of iOS not being able to view the original files.

Optical Character Recognition (.pdf, .jpg, .png, .tiff, etc)

If a file is an image, OnSong can submit it for optical character recognition. The quality of the output does depend on the image file. For instance, handwriting will produce poor results.

Microsoft Word (.doc and .docx)

Extracts text content from all versions of Microsoft Word.

RTF Files (.rtf, .rtfd)

RTF is a basic file format for word processing. OnSong can extract text content from these as well.

Note: Conversion is the process of converting a particular file type into text. Source files rarely have content in a form that matches perfectly with the OnSong or ChordPro file formats. You will need to adjust the content after conversion for best results in OnSong.

Use the imported file instead of OnSong

When you import an external file such as a PDF or Microsoft Word document, the file is attached to the song and is viewed by default. One of the features of OnSong is that it can convert your imported files into text. This results in two versions of the song content. This switch can be used to toggle between the externally linked file and then text-based chord chart.

Let's follow some possible scenarios on why or how this switch can be used:

Converting to Text-Based Chord Charts

Typically the conversion process in OnSong will extract the text of the external file. This means that you will need to make changes to the resulting content to work in OnSong. Because of this, you may want to switch back to the originally imported file to give yourself time to make adjustments. Let's take a look at the possible scenario:

  1. You import a PDF file to use it in your set, but you want to be able to transpose and format the song.
  2. To convert to text, you open the song editor and tap on the convert file button. Then you click done.
  3. When viewing the song, you find that chords are not aligned properly but you don't have time to fix it now.
  4. You open the song editor again and then turn this option on and tap Done.
  5. Now you can view the originally imported file, but continue to make adjustments in the song editor between sets.

Lead Sheets and Chord Charts

Another way to use this feature is to import a lead sheet as a PDF that includes musical score. While this can be viewed inside of OnSong, many of the features of OnSong regarding chord charts is lost. You can copy and paste the chord chart into the song editor to have both a chord chart and lead sheet version of the song. This scenario could look like this:

  1. You import a lead sheet as a PDF file to be used by a pianist.
  2. Next, you tap into the song editor and write a text-based chord chart in the text editor.
  3. You can now use this function to view either the text-based chord chart for guitarists and other musicians, or the lead sheet for the pianist.

When using Stage Monitor Mode or OnSong Connect you can set your profile to receive either the external file, or the chord chart as needed along with other transpositional adjustments.

Menubar

The menubar provides the tools you need to create the perfect chord chart. Lets review each button and tool to see how the song editor works:

Cancel

If you opened the song editor to view the song, or have made changes you don't want to keep, tap on the Cancel button to close the editor without saving changes.

Delete Button

The trash can icon gives you the ability to delete the song. This will prompt you before deleting the song in case you accidentally tap on the icon.

Place In Book

This menu lets you add the song to books without adding metadata.

Text Tools

This menu gives you tools to perform on the text content of the song like search and replace, or changing the chord format of the text.

Metadata Editor

The metadata editor gives you fields to complete in order to set the metadata content of the song.

Song Title

The title of the song appears in the middle of the menubar to remind you of what song you are editing.

Undo

The undo button will undo the last action that was recorded in the Text Editor undo history.

Redo

Counter to the undo button is the redo button which adds actions performed in the Text Editor back after being undone.

Rewrite Into Key

This menu allows you to rewrite the current song content into a different key for easier editing.

Chord Builder

The chord builder helps you create chords using chord pickers. You can insert the chord into the text and add chords when the keyboard is not visible.

Done

The Done button saves any changes you've made to the chord chart and redraws the chord chart when the song editor is hidden.

Preview

The preview widget can be toggled on and off in the song editor to preview how the song will appear when changes are saved.

Toggling

You can toggle the preview widget on and off by using the "eyeball" icon in the menubar, or by tapping on the x button in the widget when in editing mode.

Positioning

You can tap on the widget to enter editing mode. In this mode, buttons appear for changing the preview settings. You can also move the widget or dock it on the side of the screen. You can also use two fingers to change the size of the preview widget.

Style Preferences

Tap on the button in the upper-left corner of the widget to open the Style Preferences Menu for changing the style of the preview widget.

Opacity

Tap on the gear button in the lower left corner to open a menu containing the opacity slider. This will allow the song content to appear under the preview, if desired.

Changing the position or style of the preview will be used each time you open the song editor. Changes made to styles are not applied to the song and only effect the preview.

Chord Builder

The chord builder allows you to build chords using basic pickers. In addition, existing chords found in the song are displayed in the bottom of the menu.

Once the chord has been selected, tap on the Insert button in the upper right to add the chord to your song at the position of the text cursor in the song editor.

When building a chord, you can select from three pickers:

Root

This is the root of the chord. Options include: C, C#, Db, D, D#, Eb, E, F, F#, Gb, G, G#, Ab, A, A#, Bb, B, Cb.

Variation

This is the variation of the chord and effect what notes are to played for the chord. Options include: maj, m, 2, suss, sus, sus4, 5, 6, 6add9, 7, 7sus4, m6, m7, maj7, 9, m8, maj9, 9dim, add9, flat9, 11, m11, 13, m13, maj13, aug, dim, flat5, 7#5, 6/9, m7#5, maj7#5, 7b5, m7b5, maj7b5, 7sus2, dim7, 7#9, 7#9add5, 7b9, 7#11, 7b9b13, 7b9/13, 7#9#13.

Bass Note

Options include: C, C#, Db, D, D#, Eb, E, F, F#, Gb, G, G#, Ab, A, A#, Bb, B, Cb.

Note: The pin icon in the upper left corner can be used to keep the chord builder menu open while you move the cursor to a different position in the text editor. Tap again to unpin the menu and close it.

Metadata Editor

The metadata editor provides fields that generate tags in the song's metadata section. Filling out these fields and closing the menu will rewrite the metadata in text editor.

Song Information

The song information section contains common information used to index the song.

  • Title is the title of the song.
  • Artist is the artist or byline of the song.
  • Number is a number assigned to the song that can be used to sort songs.
  • Keywords are a comma-delimited list of keywords used to focus the By Topic tab of the Songs Menu.

Musical Attributes

This section contains musical attributes of how the song is to be performed.

  • Key is the key in which the song is written. The song can be transposed using the Style Preferences Menu.
  • Capo is the fret on which a capo should be applied. This can be changed using the Style Preferences Menu without changing the underlying song content.
  • Tempo is the tempo to set for the song content. This opens the Tempo Picker to set the tempo.
  • Time Signature sets the time signature in the song's metadata.

Scroll and Flow

Using autoscroll requires a time duration to scroll the song, as well as the ability expand the content to scroll top to bottom.

  • Duration is the length of time of the song. You can enter this either as a number of seconds, or in an MM:SS or HH:MM:SS format.
  • Flow takes the section labels of a song and outputs those sections from the top to the bottom of the page.

Rights Management

Attribution and protection of songs is important. Use fields in this section to keep track of rights.

  • Copyright is the text to be outputted at the bottom of the page and lyrics projection.
  • CCLI Song # is the CCLI song number. These are used for tracking and reporting use of the song for lyrics distribution.
  • Restrictions can be set to limit what other users can do with the song.

Books

Tapping on this field will allow you to choose books into which this song can be placed. This will output the names of the books as a metadata tag.

MIDI

If you have the MIDI in-app purchase, you can set MIDI to be sent when the song is viewed, or OnSong can listen for specific MIDI commands to automatically load the song in the viewer.

  • Send allows you to send MIDI commands when the song is viewed.
  • Receive configures various MIDI commands to listen for. When one of the commands is received, OnSong will load the song. If the song is in the current set, the first instance of the song will be loaded. Otherwise the song will be loaded from the library. If the song is already being viewed, it will return to the top of the song.

Choose Scene

This interface displays all of the scenes that are associated with your library. You can tap on a scene to select it. When finished, tap the Back button to review changes made to the song's metadata tags.

Adding Scenes

You can add scenes dynamically from this screen using either the Lighting Console and then saving the changes you've made to your lights as a scene.

Alternately, you can create a scene by tapping on the + button in the lower-right corner.

Choose Books

The choose books screen is used to set the books tag in the metadata section of the song. Tap on books to select or deselect books to be placed in metadata.

Tap on the Cancel button to prevent the changes to be outputted to the metadata tag. Tap on the Back button to return to the metadata editor.

Choose Capo

The choose capo menu allows you to choose a capo to be set in the metadata section of the song. You can choose either None to remove the capo from metadata, or a number from 1 to 11 to set the capo position.

Choose Key

The choose key menu lets you to pick a different key to set as metadata in the song's metadata. This will be the declared key of the song in which it is written.

At the bottom of the menu is a toolbar that allows you to toggle between major and minor keys.

Note: When you pick a key, the song is not rewritten into that key. Only the metadata is changed. To change the key in which the song is written, use the Rewrite Into Key Menu.

Choose Tempo

The tempo picker allows you to set the tempo in beats per minute (BPM).

Setting Tempo

To set the tempo, slide your finger to the left and right to decrease or increase the tempo in broad strokes. Tap on the left and right of the picker to decrease or increase the tempo by one beat per minute.

Alternately, you can tap in the middle of the tempo picker to tap the tempo of the song that is already playing.

Playing the Metronome

The tempo picker includes a play/stop button that allows the metronome to be started or stopped. This can be used to stop a playing metronome for settings a new one, or to check the tempo once a BPM has been selected.

Acquiring from MIDI Clock

If you are using the MIDI Integration in-app purchase, you can also acquire the current tempo from the received MIDI clock. To do this, turn on the switch to begin listing.

Advanced Settings

The tempo can be adjusted between 40 and 200 BPM. If the tempo is set below the minimum BPM, it is set to None, removing the tempo from the song. The minimum and maximum BPM can be adjusted in BPM Settings found in Settings Live Settings Metronome Audio Settings.

Choose Time Signature

The choose time signature menu lets you pick a standard time signature from the list of options. Tap on a time signature to have it set in the metadata. Choosing the None option will remove the time signature tag from the metadata option.

Note: If you need to use a time signature not displayed in the list, you can enter the time signature manually into the text editor.

MIDI Events

Whether you are sending MIDI commands when loading a song, or listening for MIDI to load a song directly in the song viewer, the MIDI Events list is used to display MIDI commands to send or listen for.

Adding

To add a MIDI command to the event list, tap on the + button in the lower right corner to open the MIDI Editor to add new commands.

Acquiring

Instead of manually creating MIDI commands using the MIDI editor, you can turn on the Listen for MIDI events switch to have OnSong listen for incoming commands from a MIDI device.

Deleting

To delete a MIDI command from the list, swipe right to left over an item in the list to reveal a Delete button. Tap to delete the item from the list.

Editing

You can edit an item in the list by tapping on it to open the MIDI Editor.

Reordering

You can reorder the MIDI event list by tapping on the Edit button in the upper right corner. This places the list in editing mode. In this mode you can tap and drag the reordering handles on the right to change the order that MIDI events are sent. You can also tap on the red minus icon on the left to delete MIDI events.

MIDI Editor

The MIDI editor allows you to create or edit a MIDI event. This lets you specify the type of MIDI event to send or receive, as well as the optional channel, value, and other parameters pertaining to the selected MIDI event.

OnSong supports a number of types of MIDI events. Pick one of these types to learn how to configure it for you needs.

Control

This is a control change (or CC) which is typically sent from a foot pedal, knob, or slider. You can pick a channel and value to send for the control change event.

Program

This is a program change (or PC) event which is used for selecting different sounds or modules on a device. You must pick a channel as well as the program. Optionally you can choose bank select information.

Note

This is used for playing notes on a MIDI instrument. You must pick a channel as well as the note value.

Start, Continue and Stop

These are used to control MIDI playback of a track or sequence and do not have any additional properties.

Song Select

This is used for picking a specific song to be queued.

SysEx

This is used for sending more advanced messages to and from MIDI devices. These are often times manufacturer specific.

Global

MIDI Globals allow you to create lists of MIDI to send as presets. This screen allows you to add globals into your list of MIDI to be sent. It's as simple as selecting the MIDI global you want to be sent. You can combine MIDI globals with other MIDI events.

Type

Select the Global type to choose the MIDI Global from the globals you've created in the MIDI Global Editor.

Global

Select a MIDI global from the list to add it within the MIDI to send for your selection. This will open a list of your MIDI Globals, or allow you to create global.

Choose MIDI Global

This will display a list of existing MIDI globals to choose from. Tap on the MIDI global that you would like to add to your list of MIDI events to send.

Selecting

Tap on the row of the MIDI global you want to select to send.

Edit Mode

Tap on the Edit button in the upper right corner to enable editing mode. This will also allow you to tap on the name of the MIDI global to open it in the MIDI Global Editor.

Adding Globals

Tap on the + button in the lower right corner to add a new MIDI global to the list and select it.

Changing Settings

You can change how OnSong handles MIDI features through the MIDI Settings Menu. This allows you to perform additional functions such as listening for chords or playing chords back through your MIDI instrument.

MIDI Delay

The delay screen allows you to set a delay within a list of MIDI events. This can be useful if connected MIDI devices require time to complete one task before sending another. You can choose values from None to 3 seconds in 100 millisecond intervals.

NRPN

Some instruments make use of NRPN MIDI events or Non-Registered Parameter Numbers to perform certain functions that are outside of the scope of standard MIDI. Typically these need to be coded with specific MIDI control changes sent at specific times. OnSong simplifies sending NRPN MIDI events by allowing you to configure the event in one step.

Channel

Select the channel on which to send the NRPN commands. By default this is set to All Channels.

Parameter

NRPN MIDI events are divided into parameters and values. Both of these have a coarse parameter and a fine parameter which permits values greater than 127 to be sent. Here you can set the Coarse Parameter or MSB (Most Significant Bit) and then Fine Parameter or LSB (Least Significant Bit). This will send the CC#98 and CC#99.

Value

NRPN MIDI events are divided into parameters and values. Both of these have a coarse parameter and a fine parameter which permits values greater than 127 to be sent. Here you can set the Coarse Value or MSB (Most Significant Bit) and then Fine Value or LSB (Least Significant Bit). This will send the CC#6 and CC#38.

Song Select

The Song Select command is sent on all channels and is used to load a new song on devices which support this MIDI event. Choose a value in the song section between 0 and 127 to be sent.

SysEx

Certain MIDI equipment can perform more advanced tasks by receiving system-exclusive or "SysEx" commands. These are specific bytes of information that can be sent using the command MIDI connection.

In OnSong, you choose the SysEx command and then tap on the value row to set the value of the SysEx. This is entered using a text-entry screen in the menu, allowing you to view and type the SysEx values. Values are typically entered as hexadecimal numbers referring to bytes to be sent over MIDI.

Note: You will need to contact the manufacturer of your MIDI equipment to determine what should be written in these fields. The nature of SysEx deems that these are system-exclusive commands and not in the common MIDI command lexicon.

Control Change

Control changes in MIDI are sent from pedals, knobs, and sliders, and are used to control the dynamics of music. They can also be used for general messaging to apps such as OnSong.

Type

To setup a control change in the MIDI editor, choose Control in the type section.

Channel

The channel determines which MIDI channel the control change is sent or received on. By default, OnSong will receive or send on all channels. Use the plus and minus buttons to choose a specific channel if necessary.

Control

Pick a control to send or receive by tapping on the None option. OnSong will display a list of control values 0 through 127 with known controls named in the list.

Value

When you are sending a control change, you can also choose the value to send from 0 to 127. This can be adjusted with the slider or by tapping on the "i" icon to pick a value from a distinct list.

Note Events

Note events in MIDI are used to play an instrument by sending note on and off commands. They can also be used for general messaging to apps such as OnSong.

Type

To setup a note event in the MIDI editor, choose Note in the type section.

Channel

The channel determines which MIDI channel the note event is sent or received on. By default, OnSong will receive or send on all channels. Use the plus and minus buttons to choose a specific channel if necessary.

Note

Pick a note to send or receive by tapping on the None option. OnSong will display a list of notes including their numeric representation in MIDI (0-127), as well as the letter, enharmonic preference, and octave of the sound.

Velocity

When sending note events, the velocity of the note can also be sent. By default this is set to 127. You can use the slider to adjust the velocity between 0-127. You can also tap on the "i" icon to choose a discreet value from a list of options from 0 through 127.

Note that OnSong does not send nor receive MIDI note off commands.

Program Change

Program changes in MIDI are typically sent and received to handle changes to the instrument's sound or module. They can also be used for general messaging to apps such as OnSong.

Type

To setup a program change in the MIDI editor, choose Program in the type section.

Channel

The channel determines which MIDI channel the program change is sent or received on. By default, OnSong will receive or send on all channels. Use the plus and minus buttons to choose a specific channel if necessary.

Program

Pick a program to send or receive by tapping on the None option. OnSong will display a list of program changes. These are listed as programs 0 through 127 with their General MIDI sound to the right.

Bank

When sending program changes, OnSong can also send a bank select. This is sent as either or both MSB and LSB. MSB stands for "Most Significant Bit" and LSB stands for "Least Significant Bit". Together they provide more options for MIDI hardware and software which supports it. Each bank select bit can have values of 0 through 127 or none.

The bank select is sent previous to the program change with OnSong. The delaying of the sent MIDI is to allow the device to process the bank select requests before handling the program change request.

Sequence Commands

Start, continue, or stop commands are used to control MIDI playback on a sequencer. These commands have no parameters as they are sent out on all channels automatically.

Restrictions

Restrictions prevent certain actions from being performed on a song. When set in metadata and imported, these attributes are retained if the rights restriction is set.

The following are restrictions that can be set:

  • None removes restrictions from the metadata section. If selected, all other check marked restrictions are unchecked.
  • Edit prevents the song from being edited.
  • Print prevents the song from being printed.
  • Export prevents OnSong from exporting the file.
  • Share prevents the OnSong user from sharing the file in any manner.
  • Email prevents the song from being transferred via email.
  • Upload prevents the song from being uploaded to a remote server.
  • Project prevents the song from being displayed in lyrics projection.
  • Distribute prevents the song from being distributed to other sources.
  • Rights prevents further rights and restrictions from being set.

Place In Book

The place in book menu allows you to select books you would like the song present in.

Selecting Books

Tap on the book name to add or remove it from that book. Changes are not saved until you tap the Done button in the song editor to save your changes.

Adding Books

Tap on the + button in the upper right corner to add a new book and assign the song to it without leaving the song editor.

Rewrite Into Key

The rewrite into key screen allows you to transpose the song's content as viewed in the song editor.

Tap on the piano icon in the song editor menubar to choose a different key. Keys are displayed in either major or minor to match the mode of the current key of the song. Tap on the key to convert the song. This will change the declared key of the song as well as the chords of the song into that key.

Rewriting the key of a song can be very helpful, eliminating the need to try and transpose an entire song in your head.

Note: Keep in mind that you can transpose a song into any key without affecting the underlying song content or how the song was written. You are encouraged to use the transpose slider in the Style Preferences Menu instead.

Text Tools

The text tools menu provides tools for making changes to the text of the song. It features the following sections:

Search and Replace

A common task in text editing is to find one piece of text and replace it with another. For instance, if you are using square brackets and want to replace any instance of a chord with another chord, you would type [Am/C] in the search field and [Am7] in the replace field and then tap on the Perform Search and Replace button to make the change.

Chord Format

OnSong supports two types of chord formats and this section allows you to toggle between the styles:

  • Bracketed Chords are chords surrounded in square brackets and placed within lyrics for positioning.
  • Chords Over Lyrics are chords typed above lyrics with spaces used to align the chords above the proper words and phrases.

Fix Spaces

Chord charts written in word processing programs such as Microsoft Word may have issues when converted to text. This is caused by the file being written in a variable-width font which requires many more spaces to be used to align chords with lyrics due to the space character being narrower than other characters.

The fix alignment spaces button can help bring chords into alignment by shrinking the amount of space between chords an average amount. You may still need to tweak spaces slightly for best results.

Song Template

When you create a new song in OnSong, the song editor is opened with a standard template song. You can change this template by creating your own template as a regular song file. Toggle this switch on to make it the template for new songs.

You can have a blank song editor by turning off templates under the Utilities Menu Settings Menu Settings Song Editor Use Template Song.

Regular Expressions

Regular expressions are a common method used for processing text files and allows complex pattern matching. In addition to this, values within the regular expression search pattern can then be used in the replace syntax to allow for the results to be transformed. Keep in mind that Regular Expressions look complex, but follow a standard definition across nearly all computer platforms. You can learn more about regular expressions here.

Let's break down an example of a regular expression used to find all bracketed chords in a song. We would type something like this into the OnSong search field:

/\[(.*?)\]/i

Denoting Patterns

First, we use the forward slashes to denote the regular expression. This means that this contains two pieces of information, the regular expression and the modifiers. In this example we have [(.*?)] as the regular expression pattern and i as the modifier.

Escaping Text

Regular expressions are a large topic in and of itself, but it involves typing specific characters to match specific characters. In the example above, the first backslash character is used to "escape" the character that follows. This is because square brackets have a special meaning in regular expressions to find ranges of characters. We add backslash in front of these so they are treated like ordinary characters.

Match Groups

You'll see that what's contained in the square brackets is surrounded in parenthesis. Parenthesis in regular expressions are used to denote groups. We place the main pattern parenthesis because we are going to use that match in our replace field.

Pattern

Inside of the parenthesis, we have a period .. This denotes a character of any kind. This is because we want to find square brackets that contains something. Next, we see an asterisk *****. This tells the pattern that we want to find zero or more of the preceding match. In this case, we want to find any number of characters. The question mark ? in this context creates what is called a "non-greedy search". In essence we don't want to find everything between brackets because this would gobble up our whole song! We just want to find things until we get to an ending bracket.

Modifers

These are placed after the forward slashes and changes how the regular expression matching behaves. Each character represents a different modifier. You can combine these as needed:

  • i makes the search case-insensitive. Any part of the pattern that involves character case will basically be ignored.
  • x allows whitespaces and comments to be included in the regular expression.
  • s allows the "." dot pattern match to also match line separators. By default, regular expressions are matched line by line.
  • m determines how the "^" and "$" pattern match characters perform. By default, these represent the start and end of the input, but setting this modifier will allow them to match the start and end of each line.
  • w determines the method used for evaluating word boundaries. If set, OnSong will determine words based on Unicode UAX 29 text boundaries.

In summary, this will find anything between two square brackets in a non-greedy fashion, and make that match available for replacement.

Replacement

You could use simple text-based replacement for your search. For instance, to remove all chords from a song, use the above pattern and replace with nothing. However, you can also use the match group you've made to sound the chords with something else. For instance, you could type the following into the OnSong replace field:

<$!>

This would take the pattern that was matched between the brackets and place it within angle brackets instead.

Bracketed Chords

Bracketed chords are the standard method used in the OnSong File Format as well as in the ChordPro File Format. In fact, OnSong uses the bracketed chord format internally to render the chord charts to the screen or for print.

In the bracketed chord format, chords are surrounded by square brackets and placed within and on the same line as lyrics. The following is an example of bracketed chords:

A[D]mazing grace, how [G]sweet the [D]sound
That saved a wretch like [A7]me

This format can accurately place chords next to lyrics no matter what font it is written in. In addition, this format saves vertical space on the screen as well as file size due to its compact nature. It is also an optimal format for combining shorter lines into longer ones, or vice versa since the chords move with lyrics without requiring adjustments.

Keep in mind that this format is just for defining where chords should be placed. When drawn on the screen, the chords can be viewed above the lyrics. In addition, changing the font of the chord chart will not impact the placement of chords relative to lyrics unlike word processing programs.

Chords Over Lyrics

Chords over lyrics are a common way to write chord charts. This method involves writing lyrics on one line and writing chords on the line above the lyrics. Chords are then aligned with lyrics using spaces. Here is an example of the chords over lyrics chord format:

 G                 G         D     
Amazing grace, how sweet the sound
                         A7
That saved a wretch like me

You'll see that many spaces are used to align chords over the proper syllables in the lyrics. This format only works well if a fixed-width font is used. If a variable-width font is used, then various quantities of spaces characters are required to align chords due to the variation in space character widths for different fonts.

This format has the advantage of being more visually equal to the final output. However, there are a number of pitfalls that you may run into using this format:

  • Variable-Width Fonts can cause issues when creating in or importing text from a word processing program like Microsoft Word. It is common in many chord charts and can cause problems when converting into text and viewed in a fixed-width font like in song editor.
  • Tabs are sometimes used to avoid the issue of variable-width fonts in word processing programs. This is complex enough to set up tab stops in word processor programs, but text editors have no knowledge of the formatting information created in the word processor program. OnSong renders tabs as a preset number of spaces which can cause alignment issues.
  • Duplicative Entry occurs every time you make a change to lyrics or chord line. This requires you to frequently adjust spaces on the chord line.
  • Chord Detection becomes an issue because it may be difficult to determine the difference between a chord line and a lyrics line. For instance, if a line contains only "Am", is that a word or a chord? OnSong will only detect chords if the line only contains chords. Exceptions to this are certain characters like . / | \ or if you surround notes in parenthesis.

Hint: Use the Chord Format section in the Text Tools Menu to toggle between both chord formats when making changes.

On-Screen Keyboard

When editing the content of your song, the on-screen keyboard will appear. This allows you to type on the screen. There are a few things that may affect this operation.

Foot Pedals

Some wireless foot pedals such as the AirTurn BT-105 are actually Bluetooth computer keyboards with a limited number of keys. When iOS encounters a Bluetooth keyboard, it automatically hides the on-screen keyboard. You can use both the foot pedals and on-screen keyboard at the same time by "ejecting" the keyboard on the foot pedal. On The AirTurn BT-105, this is done by pushing the red button on the module. If you are using another brand, please contact your pedal manufacturer for details on how to enable the on-screen keyboard.

Wireless Keyboards

If you are using a wireless Bluetooth keyboard with your device, the on-screen keyboard will also not appear. If you are using an Apple-branded keyboard, you can eject it using the up arrow in the upper right corner of the keyboard. This button was traditionally used to eject a CD-ROM, but will eject the keyboard allowing the on-screen keyboard to appear.

Splitting the Keyboard

You can tap and drag the button in the lower right corner of the keyboard on the iPad to move the location of the keyboard as well as split the keyboard for thumb typing. When used in this manner, the arrow keys in the Text Editor as well as the Quick Chord Bar may no longer appear or function normally.

Quick Chord Bar

The quick chord bar appears above the On-Screen Keyboard and provides fast access to chords that are in your song for easy insertion in the text editor.

Move the text cursor in the Text Editor to where you would like the chord to be placed. If you are using bracketed chords, place the text cursor in the lyrics where you would like the chord to be placed. If you are using chords over lyrics, place the cursor where you would like the chord placed above the lyrics. Tap on the chord you would like to insert.

Chords are detected within the content of the song and are displayed in the order they appear in the song. Each chord is displayed once. You can change the order in which the chords appear by changing Sort Chord Buttons option in Settings Menu Settings Song Editor. You can sort more popular chords to the front or sort chord buttons alphabetically.

To the far right are additional buttons for inserting symbols. This will save you some steps moving between keyboard modes. By default, these include the following:

  • [] inserts square brackets at the location of the text cursor and then moves the text cursor between the two brackets. This allows you to add letters between between the brackets to create chords.
  • # inserts a symbol used to indicate sharps.
  • b inserts a symbol used to indicate flats.
  • / inserts a slash for split bass chords.

You can change the additional symbols that appear here using the Additional Symbols field in Settings Menu Settings Song Editor.

If there are too many chords or symbols in the quick chord bar, you can swipe to the left or right. You can also tap on the arrow buttons that appear on the left and right when more content exists beyond the current view.

If you do not want the quick chord bar to appear, you can disable it using the Quick Chord Bar switch under Settings Menu Settings Song Editor.

Line Formatting

The line formatting menu allows you to apply line formatting syntax in the Song Editor through a user interface. This menu lets you tap to toggle line formatting on and off such as:

Background Color

Tap on a color swatch to apply highlighting to the line. Tap on the same color again or choose the transparent color at the beginning of the swatches to remove it from the line.

Text Color

Tap on a color switch to change the color of the text for the line. Tap on the same color again or choose the transparent color at the beginning of the swatches to remove it from the line.

Bold

Tap on the bold button to apply the bold line formatting to the line.

Italic

Tap on the italic button to apply the italic formatting to the line.

Chord Builder

The chord builder allows you to build chords. This will insert created chords into the song as well as add them to the Quick Chord Bar

Once the chord has been selected, tap on the Insert button in the upper right to add the chord to your song at the position of the text cursor in the song editor.

When building a chord, you can select from three pickers:

Root

This is the root of the chord. Options include: C, C#, Db, D, D#, Eb, E, F, F#, Gb, G, G#, Ab, A, A#, Bb, B, Cb.

Variation

This is the variation of the chord and effect what notes are to played for the chord. Options include: maj, m, 2, suss, sus, sus4, 5, 6, 6add9, 7, 7sus4, m6, m7, maj7, 9, m8, maj9, 9dim, add9, flat9, 11, m11, 13, m13, maj13, aug, dim, flat5, 7#5, 6/9, m7#5, maj7#5, 7b5, m7b5, maj7b5, 7sus2, dim7, 7#9, 7#9add5, 7b9, 7#11, 7b9b13, 7b9/13, 7#9#13.

Bass Note

Options include: C, C#, Db, D, D#, Eb, E, F, F#, Gb, G, G#, Ab, A, A#, Bb, B, Cb.

Text Editor

The text editor is the main focus of the song editor since it's where you type the contents of your song. The font is set to a fixed-width font to aid in the entry of text-based chord charts. For information about how to write chord charts in OnSong, see the OnSong File Format and ChordPro File Format.

Arrow Keys

Beyond the standard text entry area, OnSong also provides four-way arrow keys just above the on-screen keyboard on the right. Use these to move the text cursor as you would on a traditional computer keyboard for more accurate and fast placement. You can turn off these arrow keys under Settings Menu Settings Song Editor Enable Arrow Keys.

Songs Menu

The songs menu is the main way that you access your OnSong library. It contains all of your songs and sets, as well as providing other ways to organize your song library too.

The songs menu provides the following tabs for different ways to search, browse, and manage your songs.

All Songs

This tab provides access to your master list of songs. You can search, sort, and browse songs by books.

By Artist

This tab allows you to browse your songs by artist.

By Key

This tab organizes your song by key. Choose a key to view songs in that key.

By Topic

When you create topics, you can load songs for a specific genre, theme, or whatever organization method makes sense to you. Use this tab to manage topics and browse songs.

My Sets

When you play a gig, pick songs for a set list to play on that day and venue. This tab provides access to your sets and the option to create new ones.

Sets

The Sets tab provides access to your set lists. Sets are collections of songs that are pulled for a specific event at a specific venue. For instance, if you are playing a gig on a Friday night at the pub, you can create a set. If you are playing a worship service on a Sunday morning, create a set.

Folders

If you are playing for a long period of time, you may also divide the time into multiple sets. Sets can be arranged into Folders to organize them by venue, event, or band.

Active

Active sets are the ones you are concerned about in the present time. These are recent or upcoming gigs or events. When you have a number of older sets, OnSong may prompt you to Auto-Archive your sets. This helps keep your list tidy so you can quickly access your current sets at the event.

Archived

Archived sets are sets that you have already played. This allows you to look back in history to see what songs were performed. This information is not only used for Song Reporting, but also sorting your songs by popularity or by when they were last played.

Remote

Similar to the remote button on the All Songs tab, this provides access to sets created in a remote repository.

Sorting Sets

Sets can be sorted in a variety of ways that may sense to the user. The current sort method is displayed with an icon to the right side of the text. Sort methods that support ascending/descending order can be toggled bay selecting the same method again.

Sort methods include:

  • Title sorts the list of sets in ascending (default) or descending alphabetic order.
  • Date sorts the list of set based on the date each set is to be played in descending (default) or ascending order.
  • Custom sorts the sets based on a custom sort order. This can be changed by tapping on the Edit button to place the list of sets into Editing Mode.
  • Created sorts the list of sets in the order that the set was created in ascending or descending order.
  • Modified sorts the list of sets in the order that the set was last modified in ascending or descending order.
  • Quantity sorts the list of sets based on the number of songs contained within the set in ascending or descending order.
  • Cancel closes the sort menu without apply any changes to the sorting of the list of sets.

Active Sets

Active sets are your primary set lists. These should contain recent and upcoming sets to provide quick access to what you are playing next.

Getting Your Bearings

To view your active sets, tap on the Active button in the segmented control at the bottom of the My Sets tab. Your active sets appear above.

Viewing Sets

Set lists appear in this list with either the date of the performance, or an optional title. The second line displays the number of songs in the set, the date of the set, and the duration of the set. This is the total duration of each of the songs in the set. If a song does not have a duration set, the standard time of five minutes is used. Tap on the set list row to view songs.

Adding Sets

You can create new sets by tapping on the + button in the lower right corner. This will open the New Song Set screen to enter the date and optional title and folders for the set.

Editing Mode

You can perform additional actions on your sets by entering editing mode. This will allow you to change the order of sets when custom sorting and perform additional actions on a set.

Sorting Sets

Tap on the sort button in the lower left corner to change the sort order to:

  • Alphabetical sorts the list of sets in alphabetic order. Default.
  • Chronological sorts the list of set based on the date each set is to be played in descending order.
  • Custom sorts the sets based on a custom sort order. This can be changed by tapping on the Edit button to place the list of sets into Editing Mode.

Archived Sets

Archived sets are sets that you have already played. This segment of the set list is not only used to store old sets for reference, but is also useful for sorting songs and song reporting.

Viewing Sets

Set lists appear here with either the date of the performance or an optional title. The second line displays the number of songs in the set, the date of the set, and the duration of the set. This is the total duration of each of the songs in the set. If a song does not have a duration set, the standard time of five minutes is used. Tap on the set list row to view songs.

Adding Sets

You can create new sets by tapping on the + button in the lower right corner. This will open the New Song Set screen where you can enter the date and optional title and folders for the set.

Editing Mode

You can perform additional actions on your sets by entering the editing mode. This will allow you to change the order of sets with custom sorting, as well as perform additional actions on a set.

Sorting Sets

Tap on the sort button in the lower left corner to change the sort order to:

  • Alphabetical sorts the list of sets in alphabetic order. Default.
  • Chronological sorts the list of a set based on the date each set is to be played in descending order.
  • Custom sorts the sets based on a custom sort order. This can be changed by tapping on the Edit button to place the list of sets into Editing Mode.

Auto-Archive Sets

As a busy musician, you may begin to accumulate a lot of sets in your active set list. You can go through the process of manually archiving each set by going into the Editing Mode and choosing Archive Set from the Action Menu. But another option is to turn on and configure auto-archiving of sets.

When you have a number of older sets in your list of active sets, OnSong will prompt you to auto-archive your sets. This makes the sets accessible in the future through the Archived list of sets, but cleans up the Active list of sets for faster access at the venue.

If you do choose to auto-archive sets, the timeframe of one month is automatically selected and older sets are moved to the Archived list. You can turn off auto-archiving of sets or configure the timeframe to keep sets active under the Utilities Menu Settings Menu Settings Songs.

Edit Song Set

The primary function of the edit song set screen is to rename the set. You can change the following:

Date

Tap on this field to change the date on which you are planning to play the set. This is used for tracking when songs are played to provide you information for song reporting, when it was last played, or popularity information.

Title

This is an optional field that can be changed to a more descriptive name for the set. When entered, this will be used when displaying the name of the set instead of the date.

Folders

Tapping on this field will display the Choose Folder Screen, allowing you to choose one or more folders in which the set should be placed.

Separate Set/Song Styles

Sets contain songs from your master library. But what if you want to change the key of a song in a set without effecting the song in your master list? You can use separate set/song styles. This will allow you to style and transpose songs in the set without affecting the master song library.

  • Default uses the settings that you have configured under the Utilities Menu Settings Menu Settings Songs.
  • Off saves any changes you make to the song within the set to your master library. This will not effect other sets that have Separate Set/Song Styles turned on.
  • On saves any changes made to the set and not to the master library or any other set.

Audio Playback Continuity

If you are using backing tracks in your set, this setting allows you to play through all the backing tracks like a playlist. The default setting can be found in Settings » Live Settings » Audio Playback.

  • Off requires that each audio track be played with user interaction or a trigger.
  • On allows audio tracks to play through all songs in a set without user interaction.
  • Repeat allows audio tracks in a set to be played back continuously. Once the last audio track in the set is played, the first audio track in the set will be started.

Choose Folder

You can place newly created or existing sets into one or more folders. Tap on the folder or folders you wish to place your set into and then tap Back. When the set is saved, it will be placed in the selected folders.

You can also add a folder directly from this screen by tapping on the + button in the upper right corner. Type in a name of the folder and then select the folder to add the set to it.

Editing Mode

Entering the editing mode when viewing your list of sets allows you to:

Deleting Sets

While you can delete sets by swiping from the right to left over each set and tapping on the Delete button, you can also delete sets by tapping on the red minus icon when in editing mode. Tapping on the revealed Delete button deletes the set from your list.

Sorting Sets

When the sort button is set to custom sorting, you can enter editing mode to sort the sets in an order that works for you. Tap and hold on the reordering handle on the right to drag the set into position. Tap the Done button in the upper right to save your changes.

Perform Actions

Tapping on the name of the set while in editing mode will display the Action Menu that allows you to perform other tasks on the selected set.

When you are finished, tap on the Done button in the upper right to leave editing mode and to save any changes to the custom sort order of sets.

Action Menu

The action menu can be accessed by by tapping on the name of a set while in Editing Mode. This allows you to perform the following actions on the selected set:

Delete Set

This action will delete the set. Songs are not deleted from the master library.

Archive/Unarchive Set

This action will move the currently selected set to the Archived list when viewing the Active list. Likewise, this option will be called Unarchive Set when the action menu is viewed in the Archived and will move the set back into the Active list.

Shuffle Set

This action will change the custom sort order of the set to randomize the order of songs. This is useful for practice.

Edit Set

This action will open the Edit Song Set screen to allow you to change the date, title, and other attributes of the set.

Duplicate Set

If you have a set you want to copy in order to make a few tweaks, use this action. The set will be duplicated so you can make additional changes without making a set from scratch.

Add Set To Folder

This action will provide an interface to allow you to choose which folders the selected set should be placed in.

Add Songs To Book

This action will place all the songs contained in the selected set into a book that you choose.

Cancel

This closes the action menu without performing an action.

Choose Book

You can add the songs contained in a set to a book. To do this, tap on the name of the set while in Editing Mode and choose Add Songs to Book.

In this screen you can tap on a book to have songs in the selected set added to the book.

You can create a new book by tapping on the + button on the right. Provide a name for the new book in the Add New Book Screen.

Add New Book

The add new book screen allows you to type in the name of the book to be added to your list of books. Type a name and then tap on the Done button in the upper-right corner. If you don't wish to create the book, tap on the Cancel button in the upper-left corner.

When you return to the book list, you will find the newly added book.

Choose Folder

You can place newly created or existing sets into one or more folders. Tap on the folder or folders you wish to place your set into and then tap Back. When the set is saved, it will be placed in the selected folders.

You can also add a folder directly from this screen by tapping on the + button in the upper right corner. Type in a name of the folder and then select the folder to add the set to it.

Folders

Folders are used to organize your sets. For instance, you may want to keep track of all the sets you've played at a specific venue so that you don't play the same songs. You may also want to track your sets based on the bands in which you play. Lastly, you may be playing a festival with multiple sets throughout the day. Whatever the need, folders let you organize your sets into collections.

Getting Your Bearings

The folders screen is located at the root of the My Sets navigation. You may need to tap the button in the upper left corner of the My Sets menu to reach the folders screen. Once there, you can tap on the All Sets collection, or tap on the name of a folder to view its sets.

Viewing Sets in Folders

Tap on the name of a folder to view sets contained within. You'll notice that each folder contains the quantity of sets contained in the folder. Note that this is the total number of sets whether they are active or archived.

Sorting Folders

You can sort folders alphabetically or in a custom order. Tap on the sort button in the lower left corner to change the sort method. When you are viewing folders in the custom order, tap on the Edit button in the upper right to enter Editing Mode. You can then use the reordering handles to arrange your folders. Tap Done to save the folder order.

Adding Folders

Adding folders is as easy as tapping on the + button in the lower right corner. From there you can type in the name of the folder and tap Done. Tapping the Cancel button will not create the folder.

Editing Folders

While in Editing Mode, you can tap on the name of a folder to open an Action Menu, allowing you to choose from advanced actions.

Editing Mode

Tapping on the Edit button in the upper right corner of the folders menu places it into editing mode. This allows for the following:

Custom Sorting

When the custom sort method is selected using the sort button in the lower left corner, entering editing mode allows you to change the position of folders in the list. Tap and drag on the reordering handle on the right side of each row. When finished, tap on the Done button in the upper right corner to save the position of the folders.

Deleting Folders

You can delete folders from the list at anytime by swiping right to left over the folder and tapping the Delete button that is revealed. You can also tap on the red minus circle on the left side of the row when in editing mode and then tap on the Delete button. Deleting the folder does not delete the sets, only the folder.

Perform Actions

Additional actions can be performed on folders. To do this, tap on the name of the folder in the list while in editing mode to open the Action Menu. From there you can select additional actions to perform.

Action Menu

When tapping on a folder while in Editing Mode, you can perform additional actions on the selected folder. These include:

Delete Folder

Choosing this option will delete the folder without a prompt because no sets are deleted in the process.

Pick Sets

When you create a folder, it is empty. You can add sets by selecting the folder and creating sets. You can also use this option to choose sets to add to the folder from the start or at any time in the future.

Rename Folder

This provides the ability for you to change the name of a folder in the future.

Cancel

Don't perform any action and close the menu.

Pick Sets

When you choose the pick sets action, you are provided a list of sets that can be added to the folder. Tap on a row to place a checkmark next to each set you wish to be added. You can also remove the checkmark to have the set not appear in the folder.

When you are finished, tap on the Done button in the upper right to add or remove the sets from the folder. Tap on the Folders button in the upper left to return the folders list without making changes.

Rename Folder

To rename a folder, tap on it while in Editing Mode and choose the rename folder option. This will prompt you with the current folder name and give you the ability to change to a different name.

When you are finished making the name change, tap on the Done button in the upper right to save the changes. If you don't want to save the changes, tap on the Cancel button in the upper left corner.

New Song Set

Creating a new set is really easy. Tap Done to create a set that you will play today. You can change the date if you need as well. Here's some other information you can change about the set you are adding:

Date

Tap on this field to select the date on which you are planning to play the set. This is used for tracking when songs are played, giving you information for song reporting, when it was last played, or popularity information.

Title

This is an optional field that can be set to a more descriptive name for the set. When entered, this will be used when displaying the name of the set instead of the date.

Folders

Tapping on this field will display the Choose Folder Screen, allowing you to choose one or more folders in which the set should be placed. If you've already selected a folder, the set you are creating is automatically added to that one without requiring you to choose additional folders. Optional.

Separate Set/Song Styles

Sets contain songs from your master library. But what if you want to change the key of a song in a set without affecting the song in your master list? You can use separate set/song styles. This will allow you to style and transpose songs in the set without affecting the master song library.

  • Default uses the settings that you have configured under the Utilities Menu Settings Menu Settings Songs.
  • Off saves any changes you make to the song within the set to your master library. This will not affect other sets that have Separate Set/Song Styles turned on.
  • On saves any changes made to the set and not to the master library or any other set.

Audio Playback Continuity

If you are using backing tracks in your set, this setting allows you to play through all the backing tracks like a playlist. The default setting can be found in Settings Live Settings Audio Playback.

  • Off requires that each audio track be played with user interaction or a trigger.
  • On allows audio tracks to play through all songs in a set without user interaction.
  • Repeat allows audio tracks in a set to be played back continuously. Once the last audio track in the set is played, the first audio track in the set will be started.

Choose Folder

You can place newly created or existing sets into one or more folders. Tap on the folder or folders you wish to place your set into and then tap Back. When the set is saved, it will be placed in the selected folders.

You can also add a folder directly from this screen by tapping on the + button in the upper right corner. Type in a name of the folder and then select the folder to add the set to it.

Remote Sets

Remote sets are set lists that you have created in a remote repository such as Rockin' With The Cross or ChordVault. The service that appears in this screen is different depending on what service you have selected in the Remote Songs section under the Utilities Menu Settings Menu Settings Songs.

Viewing Sets

You can view remote sets by tapping on them like any other set. This will allow you to view the set without adding it to your library.

Downloading Sets

You can tap on the cloud download icon on the right to download the set and its songs into your OnSong library. This will allow you to play the set on the device without requiring an Internet connection.

Account Information

You can tap on the key icon in the upper right corner to view information about your current account status.

Note: Sorting and adding sets is not supported in this view and have been disabled.

View Songs In Set

Tapping on a set will view the songs in the set. Songs will be displayed in the order you pick them, or can be arranged in the order in which they ought to be played. Tap on a song to jump to that song in the song viewer. Sets can also be navigated in the song viewer by swiping left or right, using foot pedals, or by tapping on the edges of the screen.

If you don't have any songs, you'll need to add some first!

Pulling Songs

Sets do not contain any songs by default. To pull songs from your songs library for your set, tap on the + button in the lower right corner.

Editing Mode

Editing mode can be entered by tapping on the Edit button in the upper right corner of the screen. In this mode, you can delete songs, rearrange them for your performance, or tap on the name of the song in the set to open the Action Menu. This allows you to perform additional actions on songs in your set.

Sorting Songs

Songs in your set can be sorted in a variety of ways. Tap on the sort button in the lower left corner to toggle between:

  • Custom sorting allows you to place songs in the set in the order they will be played. Songs are added to the set in the order they were pulled, but can also be rearranged by placing the set into Editing Mode. Default.
  • Alphabetical sorting displays the songs sorted by their song title.
  • Random sorting can be selected to randomize the songs each time it is selected. This is great for practicing.

Moments

Moments let you add other events to your set list, turning it into a run sheet for event management. Moments can be added to an existing set by tapping on the compose button next to the + button in the lower right corner.

When you add a moment with a duration, you are prompted to set a start time for your set. This will result in scheduled times being displayed to the right of each item in the set. This time is calculated from the duration of the moment of the song.

Adding Moments

To add a moment, tap on the compose button in the lower right corner to choose from a list of preset moments.

Editing Moments

Once you select a present moment, or if you tap on a moment when in editing mode, you can change your moment including its title, icon, color, and duration.

Add Moment

This menu lets you add the following items to your set.

Songs

This option lets you pull songs into your sets. This will let you choose from your books, or pick songs directly.

Moments

There are preset moments that you can add to your set. Choosing once of these options will automatically fill out the moment's title and icon and open the Moment Editor where you an set a color or duration for the moment.

Presets include:

  • Announcement for reminding you to let your audience know about upcoming happenings.
  • Break is used if the band is taking some time.
  • Donation can be used for passing the collection plate.
  • Drama is used for when a skit of theatrical production should occur.
  • Note can be used to instruct you or your team about something that should be done.
  • Media is used to display video or presentations.
  • Message indicates that someone will give instruction, sermon, or speech.
  • Reading is used for when someone will read a poem or scripture.

Edit Moment

Once you pick a moment, or choose to edit a moment in your set, you are presented with the moment editor. Tapping done will add or update the moment in your set list.

Here's what you can edit:

Title

Change the title of the moment to reflect what will be done during that time slot.

Icon

Lets you change the icon associated with the moment.

Color

Lets you assign a color to the icon using a Color Picker

Duration

This field lets you determine if the moment is assigned a duration and if so, provides a time picker for that purpose.

If you assign a duration to a moment and your set does not have a starting time, you will be prompted to do so. When a set has a starting time, it will display times of items on the right side of the list.

Sorting Songs

Songs in a set are typically placed in a custom order according to when you would like to play the song in the set at an event or gig. The currently selected sort order is marked with an icon that indicates its selection, or the order of the sort. You can change the sort method to the following options:

  • Custom sorting allows you to place songs in the set in the order they will be played. Songs are added to the set in the order they were pulled, but can also be rearranged by placing the set into Editing Mode. Default.
  • Title sorts songs in the set alphabetically in ascending or descending order. sorting displays the songs sorted by their song title.
  • Number sorts songs in the set by song number in ascending or descending order.
  • Icon sorts songs by the icon assigned to the song or to the song in the set.
  • Random sorting can be selected to randomize the songs each time it is selected. This great for practicing.
  • Cancel closes the sort menu without applying the sort.

Editing Mode

When viewing songs in your set, tap on the Edit button in the upper right corner to enter editing mode. When enabled, you have the option of:

Sorting Songs

Songs are added to your set in the order that they are pulled. Go into editing mode to rearrange them in the order you will perform. Use the reordering handles on the right to tap and drag the song into the proper position.

Note: If you are not using custom sorting when you reorder rows, you will be prompted if you would like to enter custom ordering.

Removing Songs

While you you can remove songs from the set by swiping over each row from right to left and tapping on Remove button, you can do the same while in editing mode by tapping on the red minus circle on the left. Songs are removed from the set but are not deleted from your master library.

Editing Songs

Tapping on the name of a song will open the Action Menu, allowing you to perform advanced actions on songs in relation to the set. This can be used to duplicate songs in a set.

Action Menu

The action menu provides the ability to perform other tasks with songs placed in a set.

Delete Song

This action will delete the song from your master song library after prompting you to the action.

Remove Song

This action will remove the song from the set list.

Edit Song

This action will open the Song Editor, allowing you to edit the song in place without viewing it.

Duplicate Song

This action will duplicate the song in the set, allowing you to play the same song twice.

Cancel

Closes the action menu with no action performed.

Pulling Songs

When you create a set, you'll need to add songs to it. To add songs, tap on the + button in the lower right corner to pull songs.

Choose Book

If you have books of songs in your library, you will first be prompted to choose a book. This step ensures that you are selecting songs appropriate for the venue, event, or band with which you are playing. If you don't have any books, this step is skipped and you are taken to the All Songs collection automatically.

Selecting Songs

To add songs to a set, tap on it in the list to place a checkmark on the right. Continue tapping songs you want to add to your set. The order in which you select the songs in this screen will be the initial order that they appear in the set.

You can also remove songs from your set in the same way by unchecking the song in this list.

When you are all done selecting songs, tap on the Done button in the upper right to have those songs added to your set.

Searching

You can also search for songs in this view using the search bar. This works similar to the search bar in the All Songs Menu and filters the songs based on the keywords entered. This does not affect the currently check marked songs.

Sorting

You can also sort the song list using the same sort methods used in other areas of the songs menu.

Handling Duplicates

You may be play a number of sets for a specific event and don't want to replay or overplay a specific song. OnSong will evaluate songs that you've already added to sets on the same day and mark those songs in a faded grey color in the pick list. You can still pick the song to be added to the set, but this provides a visual check and balance.

Choose Book

If you have any books created in your library, you'll first be prompted to choose a book from which songs will be pulled. This is handy since books are designed to help you organize for different bands or events.

The books screen is divided into two sections:

Collections

Collections are ways that organize your song that cannot be deleted. You can choose from All Songs in your library, or unbound songs which are songs that have not been placed in a book.

Books

Books that you have created appear here. You can pick the book used to limit the songs you pick by tapping on a book.

The number of songs contained in each book or collection is displayed on the right side.

Sorting Songs

Tapping on the sort button lets the song list by sorted in the following ways:

  • Title sorts the list by the song title in ascending order. Sorting ignores "The" prefixed words if Settings » Menu Settings » Songs Remove "The" is turned on. Default.
  • Artist sorts the list of songs by the name of the artist associated with the song in ascending order.
  • Added sorts the list of songs by placing newly imported songs at the top of the list.
  • Starred sorts the list of songs by placing favorited or starred songs at the top of the list.
  • Number sorts the list of songs by song number as declared in metadata in the Song Editor.
  • Last Played sorts the list of songs by placing the last played songs at the top of the list. This is determined by the date/time of the set in which songs are added. The date on which the song was last played is listed in each row if known.
  • Most Popular sorts songs that have been played more at the top of the list. This is useful for determining if songs have been overplayed. The number of times the song has been played is displayed in each row if applicable. This information is provided by songs being added to sets.

If you don't want to change the sort order, tap on the Cancel button.

All Songs

The all songs menu is used to manage your song library. From here you can choose songs to view. Let's take a look at the actions you would typically perform in this screen:

Adding Songs

Creating and importing your songs is a central task in OnSong. Tap on the + button in the lower right corner to open the Add Songs screen.

Browsing Songs

Songs are displayed as rows in this menu. You can scroll through songs by flicking your finger. When more than 30 songs exist in the list, an alphabetic index appears on the right side. Tapping on a letter on the right will scroll to that section of the song list. The list is also contains section dividers to aid in the location within the list.

Each row contains a star to indicate the song's favorite status, the song title, artist, and key of the song. Tap on a song to view it in the Song Viewer.

Note: Tapping on the title in the songs menu will scroll the list to the top.

Editing Mode

Tap on the Edit button in the upper right corner to enter editing mode. You can use this to perform additional actions on songs without first viewing them.

Organizing with Books

Books are used to organize your song library into logical partitions (such as Christmas songs or songs for specific band). Tap on the Books button in the upper left corner to create and manage your books.

Searching

The search bar can be used to search the current list of songs. Tap into the search bar and type a keyword. OnSong searches the song title, song number and content.

Sorting Songs

Tap on the sort button in the lower left corner of the screen to choose how you would like to sort. This opens the sort menu. The button indicates the current sort method using an icon.

Toggling Locations

The segmented control at the bottom of the list is used to toggle between viewing your local library, or browsing a cloud-based chord repository.

Context Menu

You can quickly perform actions on songs using the context menu. This will appear when you tap and hold on a song in any song list. The menu that appears can perform the following functions.

  • Delete deletes the selected song(s) after displaying a prompt.
  • Duplicate will make a copy of the selected song(s) so that each can have different content.
  • Edit opens the Song Editor to edit the selected song.
  • Mark provides a submenu which allows you to mark the selected song(s).
  • Add To... provides a submenu for adding the selected song(s) to books or sets.
  • Share provides a submenu for sharing the selected song(s) in various ways.

Add Submenu

This submenu of the song context menu provides ways to add the selected song(s) to books and sets.

  • Book opens the Book Picker that lets you choose a book to place the songs into, or create new books.
  • Current Set allows you to add the song(s) to the last viewed set. This will place the songs at the end of the currently selected set. If a set hasn't been explicitly selected, OnSong will select the set that is scheduled closest to the current date.
  • New Set adds the song(s) to a new set marked with today's date right from this menu.
  • Choose Set opens the Set Picker allowing you to choose a set to add the song(s) to.

Mark Submenu

This submenu of the songs context menu allows you to quickly mark songs with icons.

  • None removes the icons from the selected song(s).
  • Star marks the selected song(s) with a gold star.
  • Flag marks the selected song(s) with a red flag.
  • Arrow marks the selected song(s) with a purple arrow.
  • Dot marks the selected song(s) with a teal dot.
  • Checkmark marks the selected song(s) with a blue checkmark.
  • Heart marks the selected song(s) with a red heart.
  • Custom marks the selected song(s) with a custom icon by opening the Icon Chooser.

Icon Chooser

Icons are visual cues to help you quickly evaluate songs in your library. For instance, you can use a star to mark a song as a favorite or use a flag to indicate that a song needs more work or practice. OnSong has always let you star a song as a favorite, but now you can use more shapes and colors.

Shape

This area of the icon organizer lets you pick the shape to appear next to a song as it appears in lists within OnSong. Choose from one of the following shapes.

  • None displays no icon next to the song and indicates that the song has not be organized by icons. This is the default setting for songs.
  • Star displays a star next to the song which is typically used to indicate a favorite song. The default color is orange.
  • Flag displays a flag next to the song which is typically used to indicate action must take place with the song. The default color is red.
  • Arrow displays an arrow next to the song which is typically used to indicate general preference for a song. The default color is fuchsia.
  • Dot displays a circle next to the song which is typically used to indicate an unread or bulleted status. The default color is teal.
  • Checkmark displays a checkmark next to the song which is typically used to indicate completeness. The default color is blue.
  • Heart displays a heart next to the song which is typically used to indicate songs that are favorites or liked. The default color is red.

Color

While each shape has a default color, you can use the color picker to choose a different color, or to build your own colors. Tap on a color to select it. All of the icons listed above will change to the selected color. To switch back to the default colors, tap on the selected color swatch again to deselect it. This color picker features the following colors in its default palette: Red, orange, yellow, green, blue and fuchsia.

Note: Icons also appear when you view songs in a set. If you are currently in a set that supports Separate Song/Set Styles, then the icon shape and color you choose is unique to the song in that set.

Share Submenu

The share submenu lets you share the selected song(s) in the following ways:

  • Email opens the Email Screen where you can select the format to share via the iOS/iPadOS email composition screen.
  • Export opens the Export Screen where you can select the format and export location.
  • Open opens the Open Screen where you can select the format to share by opening other apps.
  • Print opens the Print Preview Screen to configure output options, preview, and print the selected song(s).

Add Songs

There are a variety of ways to import songs into your OnSong library. Choose one from the following options available:

Add

This section gives you the ability to create songs inside of OnSong, or to add existing songs into a book.

  • New Song opens the Song Editor with a template song loaded. Write your song and tap on the Done button to add a newly written song to your library.
  • Existing Songs opens the Pick Songs menu to allow you to select songs to add to the selected book.

Import

Most songs you add to your OnSong library are done through an import process. From this section, you can browse services such as:

  • Dropbox is a popular cloud-based storage service that works great for importing documents from your computer.
  • Internet is a source of chord charts for many musicians. OnSong can search a website for available chord charts.
  • iTunes File Sharing allows you to import files from your computer using a USB cable and iTunes software.
  • Planning Center is a popular church management service that lets you organize music for your team.
  • Rockin' With The Cross provides access to its entire catalog of thousands of worship chord charts for a low monthly rate.
  • SongSelect is a service from CCLI that provides PDF-based chord charts and text-based lyrics.
  • Files allows you to import files from services that are integrated into the Files app, formerly known as storage providers in earlier versions of iOS.
  • WorshipReady.com handcrafts worship chord charts in the OnSong file format. These are available through various subscription tiers depending on the number of chord charts you need each month.
  • Other lets you import from other remote sources using standard communication protocols.

You can also add other import sources that are not in this list by entering Editing Mode and then adding import sources. You can add the following:

  • ChordVault promises to revolutionize the way music is licensed from publishers.
  • LTC Asaph is a provider of worship chord charts for French-speaking congregations.

Synchronize

You can synchronize your OnSong library with an online service to allow you to keep your music in sync with all your devices.

  • Dropbox synchronizes your OnSong library to a synchronization folder stored in Dropbox.
  • Other synchronizes your OnSong library to a synchronization folder stored on a remote server.

Export

While we agree that it's strange to have export features inside of an add songs screen, these are included as a way to export the contents of books. For instance, if you select a book, tapping on one of these options will automatically select all the songs in that book and open the Export or Email screens from the Share Menu.

Files

Apps like Dropbox, Google Drive, and Microsoft OneDrive can extend their services to be available in other apps through the iOS Files app. On older devices, this was known as storage providers. You can access all your files found on the services you use through Files.

Selecting "Files" from the Add Songs menu opens the Files iOS interface. By default, this may choose the Recents tab at the bottom showing you recent files. Tap on the Browse tab to view all of your files. Select the storage location to browse on the left, or view content by tags.

Once you select a location, the folders and files contained in that location are displayed on the right. You can search or browse for files. Files that are supported for import are available for selection. If you wish to select more than one file, tap on the Select button in the upper-right corner and then select the files you want to import.

The Files interface is managed by iOS and storage providers. If you need support with this interface, please contact Apple or the storage provider for assistance.

Import from Google Drive

Google Drive is a greatly to import files that you share and work on collaboratively online. Choose the Google Drive option in the Add Songs screen to browse your Google Drive files.

Authorization

You will need to authorize OnSong to access Google Drive the first time you attempt to access it. This will either open a web-based authentication screen from inside of OnSong. Once your account is linked, you can use Google Drive without signing in again unless your account become unlinked for some reason.

You can always sign out of Google Drive at anytime by tapping on the Sign Out button at the bottom of the screen.

Browsing

Once you are signed in, you can navigate your entire Google Drive contents. Tap on folders to navigate to more files.

Selecting

Tap on files to check and uncheck them for import. You can also use the Select All and Deselect All buttons on the bottom of the screen to select or deselect everything in the currently viewed folder. If you select a backup file, OnSong will prompt you that importing a backup will overwrite your current library before continuing. If confirmed, only the backup file is imported and the library is restored.

Importing

Once you have some files checked, tap on the Import button in the upper right corner to begin the import process. If you have selected to import a file that was already imported, OnSong will have you choose an action to take on the duplicate file. When importing begins, the progress is displayed as a percentage in the upper right corner. Once the import process is completed, you are returned to the All Songs screen.

Sorting

You can change the sort order of the files and folders to make selecting them for import easier. Tap on the sort icon in the lower left corner to bring up the following options:

  • Name sorts files and folders by file name in ascending alphabetic order.
  • Size sorts larger files to the top of the list.
  • Modified sorts files that were most recently modified to the top of the list

Note: Tapping on the same sort option twice will reverse the sort order.

Signing Out

If you've signed into the wrong Google Drive account, or if you want to sign out of Google Drive for security reasons, tap on the door icon in the lower right corner. This will deauthorize OnSong from Google Drive and return you to the Add Songs screen.

Authorizing Google Drive

Whenever you first use Google Drive in OnSong, you will need to first authorize OnSong to access your Google Drive content. This is handled completely by Google Drive, so no information is passed to OnSong in any way.

Getting Google Drive

Google Drive is a popular cloud-based storage service that offers 15 GB of free storage with options for more storage through paid subscriptions. 15 GB is more than enough space for chord charts and OnSong backups. Sign up at http://drive.google.com.

Authorization

Before you can use your Google Drive with OnSong, you need to sign in with your Google account and authorize OnSong. Enter your Google account email address and password. This will authenticate you with Google Drive and authorize OnSong to access your drive contents.

The login and authorization process is handled completely by Google and no credentials are sent to OnSong at any time. OnSong requests access to your entire Google Drive to allow you to import and export files from any folder.

WorshipPlanning.com

WorshipPlanning.com makes it easy to plan and prepare worship services. You can access your WorshipPlanning account to import individual songs or entire worship events into OnSong.

Sign In

The first time you access this screen, you'll need to sign in. Enter your credentials to view songs and events.

Search Songs

Tap on this option to browse and search songs that you've imported into your WorshipPlanning.com account.

Browse Events

Tap on this option to browse events you've scheduled in WorshipPlanning.com. You can then choose an event to import it as a set into OnSong.

Signing Out

The name of the organization that you are signed in as appears on the left. You can use the Sign Out link at the bottom to sign out of WorshipPlanning.com at any time.

Browse Events

This screen shows you a list of events that have been created on WorshipPlanning.com. By default, you're displayed upcoming events with the next event at the top of the list. Turn on the Include past events switch at the bottom to view all events in reverse chronological order.

Search Events

Use the search bar at the top of the events list to search for events by typing keywords.

Viewing Events

Tap on an event in the list to view the songs contained in the event. From this screen you can import the event into OnSong as a set. You can also preview the files that will be imported and choose a different version of the song file if multiple attachments have been specified.

View Event

When you select an event, OnSong will display the songs in that event in the order that they have been arranged. Tap on a song in this list to preview it.

Importing The Event

Tap on the Import button in the upper right corner of the screen to begin the import process. This will create a set, as well as download and add the listed songs to it. After the import process is completed, the set will be loaded and viewed in the songs menu.

Previewing Songs

OnSong will automatically select the attachment that works best with OnSong. You can tap on a row in this list to preview the song. In addition, you can use this screen to choose a different version of the song.

Import Associated Backing Track

When importing songs, you can also import associated backing tracks. If this switch is enabled, the backing track will be imported into the OnSong Media Library and linked to the chord chart.

Search Songs

While you would normally import events from WorshipPlanning.com, you can also import individual songs from the song library.

Search Bar

The search bar allows you to search the songs in your WorshipPlanning.com library. Type in the search bar and tap on the Search button to begin the search. This will filter the songs in this menu for import based on their title.

Song List

Tap on the songs to place a checkmark next to the items you would like to import. Tap again to remove the checkmark and not import the song. This will be one of the song's attachments based on a list of priorities. To change the version of the song that is imported, preview it first. Tap on the Import button to begin the import.

Previewing Songs

Tap on the magnifying glass icon on the left of the row to view the version of the song that will be imported. You can use this screen to choose a different version to import.

Import Associated Backing Track

When importing songs, you can also import associated backing tracks. If this switch is enabled, the backing track will be imported into the OnSong Media Library and linked to the chord chart.

Sign In

To import songs and events from WorshipPlanning.com, you first need to sign in. OnSong will present you with a sign in screen where you can enter your email address as well as your password. Tap on the Login button to sign into WorshipPlanning.

If you don't have a WorshipPlanning.com account, tap on the Signup button to get the web address needed to sign up. Due to App Store policies, OnSong cannot provide a direct link to signup screens for subscriptions. To sign up, go to http://worshipplanning.com.

Song Preview

The song preview screen allows you to view the version of the song that will be imported. This will either display the attachment as-is in a song viewer, or display the chord chart with the default styles that you've set in Settings Menu Settings Style Preferences.

Choosing Versions

If you are happy with the version of the file that will be downloaded, tap on the Done button and continue the download. Otherwise, tap on the Versions button to choose a different attachment to preview. This also changes the version of the song that will be imported.

Import associated backing track

This option appears if one or more audio files are associated with the song. If turned on, the song is downloaded and automatically linked to the import song. If more than one audio track is available, tap on the Choose button to pick the track to link to the imported chord chart or sheet music.

Import Priority

OnSong will automatically attempt to choose the version of the song that works best for importing. This is performed in the following order:

  1. Chord Charts are text-based chord charts and are preferred over attachments.
  2. OnSong Archive files contain all the information of the song including annotations, styles, and transposition settings.
  3. OnSong Files are text files in the OnSong file format.
  4. ChordPro Files are text files in the ChordPro file format.
  5. Plain Text can be either OnSong or ChordPro formatted, although regular text files also display well.
  6. Adobe PDF are PDF files created from other software and are viewed "as-is".
  7. Microsoft Word files display "as-is" as well.
  8. Other Files include files that are not audio.
  9. Media Files are not imported, but associated audio files can be imported along with chord charts if configured in the bottom toolbar.

Choose Version

WorshipPlanning.com allows you to have many different versions of a song using file attachments as well as text-based chord charts. You will need to choose the version of the song that you want to use in OnSong.

Tap on the Versions button in the upper right corner of the song preview. From there you can tap on the version of the song you would like to display in the preview screen. This also changes the version of the song that will be imported.

Duplicate Files

When you import files into OnSong, the filename with which you originally imported the file is retained in the library. This filename is used to uniquely identify the file.

When you are browsing files to import, these files may appear to be faded out to indicate that the file had already been imported. When you attempt to import one or more files with the same original filename, OnSong will recognize these conflicts and give you one of the following options:

Update

This option will update the original file with the new version. For instance, if you've imported a PDF file and made changes to that file, importing it again with the Update option will save the new file over the old file and display it in OnSong.

Duplicate

This option can be used to create a new version of the song with the same file name. This allows you to import songs with the same file name but as different songs.

Skip

This option will skip over files that had already been imported. This is handy for preventing updates to existing files but still allows you to import multiple files that may be new.

Cancel

Cancels the import process, allowing you to change the selection of files.

Editing Mode

Tap on the Edit button in the upper right corner of the Add Songs Screen to enter editing mode. From here you can add new import sources, remove and rename sources, and even arrange them in a way that makes sense for you. Only the import section of this screen is editable while in editing mode.

Adding

While OnSong has a number of import sources to start, you can add new import sources by tapping on the Add Import Source row at the bottom of the import sources list. From here you can add import sources to the list.

Rearranging

You can change the order of import sources by tapping and dragging the reordering handles on the right side of each row. Once you have the list arranged as you like, tap on the Done button to save your changes.

Removing

Tap on the red minus circle on the left to reveal the Remove button. Tap on that to confirm removal. When you remove an item from the import sources list, it will be added to the list of import sources that can be added. This means you never truly lose access to removed import sources.

Renaming

Tap on the name of the import source while in editing mode to enter a new name for the option using a text input prompt.

Add Import Source

This screen allows you to add import sources that are not currently in your import sources list. To add one, tap on it in the screen. This will then return you to the Add Songs screen in Editing Mode so you can rearrange the new import source where you would like.

Note: Import sources are added to the bottom of the list automatically.

Import from Dropbox

It's easy to import your song files from Dropbox. Dropbox is the easiest way to create, edit, and store your files on a computer, and then access them on your mobile device or any other device you own. Choose the Dropbox option in the Add Songs screen to browse your Dropbox.

Authorization

You will need to authorize OnSong to access your Dropbox the first time you attempt to access it. This will either open a web-based authentication screen from inside of OnSong, or redirect you to the Dropbox app on your device if installed. Once your account is linked, you can use Dropbox without signing in again unless your account become unlinked for some reason, or if you access Dropbox in OnSong from another device.

You can always sign out of Dropbox at anytime by tapping on the Sign Out button at the bottom of the screen.

Browsing

Once you are signed in, you can navigate your entire Dropbox. Tap on folders to navigate to more files.

Selecting

Tap on files to check and uncheck them for import. You can also use the Select All and Deselect All buttons on the bottom of the screen to select or deselect everything in the currently viewed folder. If you select a backup file, OnSong will prompt you that importing a backup will overwrite your current library before continuing. If confirmed, only the backup file is imported and the library is restored.

Importing

Once you have some files checked, tap on the Import button in the upper right corner to begin the import process. If you have selected to import a file that was already imported, OnSong will have you choose an action to take on the duplicate file. When importing begins, the progress is displayed as a percentage in the upper right corner. Once the import process is completed, you are returned to the All Songs screen.

Authorizing Dropbox

Whenever you first use Dropbox in OnSong, you will need to first authorize OnSong to access your Dropbox contents. This is handled completely by the Dropbox SDK, so no information is passed to OnSong along the way. Dropbox may show a different screen depending on what you have installed on your device.

Getting Dropbox

Dropbox is a popular cloud-based storage service that offers 2 GB of free storage for signing up. You can pay a subscription if you need to store more information. 2 GB is more than enough space for chord charts and OnSong backups. Sign up at http://dropbox.com.

App Authorization

If you have the Dropbox app installed on your device, you will be redirected to that device to complete the authorization process. Check the account you are using and switch accounts if necessary. Once you are sure that the proper account is selected, tap on the Allow button to authorize OnSong to access your Dropbox and to return to the OnSong app.

Web Authorization

If you do not have Dropbox installed, Dropbox displays a web-based authentication screen. Enter the email address you use to sign into Dropbox along with your password and tap the Sign In button. This will authenticate you with Dropbox and authorize OnSong to access your Dropbox.

Note: Both authorization methods are handled completely by Dropbox and no credentials are sent to OnSong at any time. OnSong requests access to your entire Dropbox to allow you to import and export files from any folder.

Import From Internet

OnSong is designed to allow you to import content from the services that you depend on. Earlier versions of OnSong could search one Internet site at a time from within the app. This was limiting and also prevented users from checking the terms of use on imported content. The new Add To OnSong extension provides a powerful tool for importing all your content into OnSong with just a tap of a button in Safari.

Add To OnSong Extension

OnSong now makes use of the Add To OnSong Safari extension that lets you import files and content from a website. This reduces technical issues when importing and also allows you to read over the website's terms of use before importing content into OnSong.

In addition to importing chord charts and lyrics, the Add To OnSong extension can also import any supported file format.

Direct Searching

Searching the Internet from within OnSong is unavailable by default and requires search parameters to be configured in Settings Import Settings Internet Settings to enable it for use. You can content your web-based content provider to request an OnSong settings file that configures these parameters for you, or encourage them to integrate with OnSong using our robust developer tools.

If you have OnSong configured to a web site with sufficient parameters, you can search for content within OnSong.

Note: OnSong does not distribute content and does not license you to do so. You take full responsibility for ensuring that you are using all content in accordance with the terms of use. Content available for free on the Internet does not mean that it can be used freely.

Direct Searching

If you have a website configured in Settings Import Settings Internet Settings, OnSong provides an interface for searching for songs without leaving the app.

Make certain that you have agreed to the terms of use of any website where you acquire content and that you have sufficient license to use the content you are importing.

Searching

Type in keywords in the search field and tap on the Search button on the keyboard. This will locate songs using the Bing search engine.

Previewing

Since songs on the Internet are usually of poor quality, you will want to preview the song prior to importing it into your library. Tap on the magnifying glass icon on the left side to open a preview of the song. This will help you decide if the chord chart will be useful.

Importing

To import a song from the search results, tap on the song to place a checkmark next to it and then tap on the Import button. The status of the import will appear in the upper right corner. Once completed, you will be returned to the All Songs screen with the newly imported songs.

Note: Songs found on the Internet are typically made available for personal or educational uses only. Be sure that you have the legal right to use the chord charts you are accessing and acquire any licenses you need for performance or recording.

Preview

Previewing a song that is found on the Internet is important since most content found on the Internet is of poor quality and user-generated. Tapping on the magnifying glass icon in the list of search results will open the preview screen.

Once open, you can view the chord chart with default formatting. You can configure default formatting options for songs in Settings Menu Settings Style Preferences.

Tap on the Close button to close the preview window and return to the search results.

You can also import the song directly from the preview screen by tapping on the Import button that appears in the upper right corner.

Remember that you can change the style or key of the song after imported into your library by using the Style Preferences Menu. You can also make changes to the song content using the Song Editor.

Import from LTC Asaph

LTC Asaph is a chord chart service for accessing worship music for French-speaking congregations. If you don't have an account, you can sign up here.

Sign In

The first time you access this import screen, you'll need to sign into your LTC Asaph account.

Search

You will need to perform a search to find songs by title.

Preview

Tap on the magnifying glass icon on the left side to see a preview of the song prior to importing it. Make sure it's the song you want before importing it into your library.

Note: Previews are limited to partial lyrics only and do not include chords. The final version does include chords.

Importing

Tap on the songs that you want to import to place a checkmark on the right side. Once you've selected songs to import, tap on the Import button in the upper right side of the screen. The progress of the import will be displayed. Once finished you will be returned to the All Songs screen.

Signing Out

You can use the Sign Out link at the bottom to sign out of LTC Asaph at any time.

Sign In

To import chord charts from LTC Asaph, you first need to sign in. OnSong will present you with a sign in screen where you can enter your User ID as well as your password. Tap on the Login button to sign into LTC Asaph.

If you don't have an LTC Asaph account, tap on the Signup button to get the web address needed to sign up. Due to App Store policies, OnSong cannot provide a direct link to signup screens for subscriptions. To sign up, go to http://onsongapp.com/ltc

Import from Rockin' With The Cross

Rockin' With The Cross is the longest running, Christian chord chart library on the Internet. You can search and import chord charts right inside of OnSong. If you don't have an account you can learn more about Rockin' With The Cross and sign up today!

Sign In

The first time you access this import screen, you'll need to sign into your active Rockin' With The Cross account.

Search and Browse

By default, the top 25 songs are listed on the screen. Use the search bar to search songs by title. You can also use the buttons below the search bar to search by artist, lyrics, and album as well.

Preview

Tap on the magnifying glass icon on the left side to see a preview of the song prior to importing it. Make sure it's the song you want before importing it into your library.

Note: Previews are limited to partial lyrics only and do not include chords. The final version does include chords.

Importing

Tap on the songs that you want to import to place a checkmark on the right side. If you've already imported a song, it will appear greyed out. You can still import the song but will be prompted to update, duplicate or skip before importing.

Once you've selected songs to import, tap on the Import button in the upper right side of the screen. The progress of the import will be displayed. Once finished you will be returned to the All Songs screen.

Signing Out

You can use the Sign Out link at the bottom to sign out of Rockin' With The Cross at any time.

Note: While these chord charts are downloaded to your OnSong library, access is granted only if you have an active subscription with Rockin' With The Cross. This is due to the subscription-based licensing structure that has been negotiated with publishers and copyright holders. If you have Netflix or cable TV, you are familiar with this concept. You get all the content you can consume for a low monthly bill.

If your subscription lapses, OnSong does provide a grace period for you to correct your billing information. If you are traveling abroad or won't have access to an Internet connection, we recommend prepaying for a year subscription to avoid any disruption in service.

Subscription-based chord charts are not for everyone. While this model provides on-demand access to every available chord chart at any time, some musicians prefer to keep the chord chart regardless of their subscription status. You can do this with other services such as WorshipReady.com or PraiseCharts which offer their content for a few dollars per song instead.

Sign In

To import chord charts from Rockin' With The Cross, you first need to sign in. OnSong will present you with a sign in screen where you can enter your User ID as well as your password. Tap on the Login button to sign into Rockin' With The Cross.

If you don't have a Rockin' With The Cross account, tap on the Signup button to get the web address needed to sign up. Due to App Store policies, OnSong cannot provide a direct link to signup screens for subscriptions. To sign up, go to http://onsongapp.com/rwtc/signup

Import using File Sharing

iTunes file sharing is a way to move files on and off of your device using a computer running iTunes and a USB charging/syncing cable. Once files are added to OnSong using iTunes file sharing, you can import those files in this screen.

Adding Files

The first step in this process is to add files onto your device using iTunes file sharing. This is done using the iTunes application running on a Mac or PC.

Selecting Files

You can browse the contents of your iTunes file sharing location using the import menu. Tap on songs to place a checkmark next to the song to mark it for import. Tap again to remove the checkmark. You can also tap on the Select All or Deselect All buttons at the bottom to select or deselect all of the files in the folder.

Importing

Once you have some files checked, tap on the Import button in the upper right corner to begin the import process. If you have selected to import a file that was already imported, OnSong will have you choose an action to take on the duplicate file. When the import process is completed, you are returned to All Songs screen.

File Sharing

iTunes File sharing is designed to move files on and off of your device via the iTunes application.

Connecting Your Device

To use iTunes file sharing, connect your device to your computer with the supplied USB cable. Next, open the iTunes application. iTunes is available as a free download from Apple and is the software used for managing your iOS devices.

Once iTunes is opened, tap on your device in the upper right corner to the left of the iTunes Store button. This will take you to your phone information screen.

Finding File Sharing

Once in this screen, tap on the Apps tab at the top and then scroll down. The File Sharing section is found at the bottom of that screen. Tap on OnSong on the left and then draw or add files on the right using the Add... button at the bottom. Optionally, if OnSong has exported files to this location you can select those files and tap on the Save to... button to save them on your computer.

Remember that you can select multiple files by holding down the SHIFT or CTRL (PC) or command (Mac) keys. You can also delete files in this list by selecting them and pressing the DELETE key on your computer keyboard.

Important

It is important to note that if you export an OnSong Backup file to iTunes File Sharing, you need to save the file to your computer using iTunes. If the backup file is located on your device and the device is lost, stolen, broken, or inaccessible for any reason, you will not be able to retrieve your OnSong library.

Other Sources

OnSong comes preloaded with access to a variety of chord chart services. However, you may also store your documents on a network-connected storage service.

Adding

When the screen is first accessed, no sources have yet been added. From this screen you can tap on the + button in the upper right corner to add a new source.

Editing

If you need to add additional sources, or make changes to the list of sources, tap on the Edit button in the upper right-hand corner to enter Editing Mode.

Browse Files

Once you have sources in your list, you can browse their files by tapping on one in the list.

Browse Files

Once you've selected a source from the source list, you are presented with files and folders. Tap on folders to navigate to more files.

Selecting

Tap on files to check and uncheck them for import. You can also use the Select All and Deselect All buttons on the bottom of the screen to select or deselect everything in the currently viewed folder. If you select a backup file, OnSong will prompt you that importing a backup will overwrite your current library before continuing. If confirmed, only the backup file is imported and the library is restored.

Creating Folders

You can create a new folder in the source by tapping on the + button in the lower right corner.

Importing

Once you have some files checked, tap on the Import button in the upper right corner to begin the import process. If you have selected to import a file that was already imported, OnSong will have you choose an action to take on the duplicate file. When importing begins, the progress is displayed as a percentage in the upper right corner. Once the import process is completed, you are returned to the All Songs screen.

Editing Mode

Tap on the Edit button in the sources list to enter editing mode. From there you can tap on a source to make changes to it, or tap on the Add New Source row to create a new source.

Deleting

Tap on the red minus icon to reveal a Delete button. Tapping on this will remove the source.

Editing Source

Tap on the name of the source to open the Source Editor. This allows you to make changes to the source.

Add New Source

Tap on the bottom row to open the Source Editor. This allows you to specify information for a new source.

Tap on the Done button when you are done editing the sources. You will then be able to select a source for browsing files or choose a folder.

Source Editor

When adding a new source or editing an existing one, the source editor is displayed. This lets you specify connection parameters to your network-connected storage service.

Title

Provide a title for your source so you can identify it in the sources list.

Type

Choose the type of service that you will be connecting to. This can be one of the following options:

  • FTP or File Transfer Protocol can connect to older file servers.
  • Amazon S3 or Simple Storage Service is hosted by Amazon as a mechanism for storing content for web services.
  • WebDAV or Web-based Distributed Authoring and Versioning is a file storage standard that allows network connected services to be treated like a local hard drive.

Host or Bucket

This is the web address or IP address of the service. When using Amazon S3, this is the optional bucket to access in S3.

Path

This is the directory to use as the root of the service that is being accessed.

Use SSL

Turn this on if communication should be performed securely.

Authenticate?

Turn this on if authentication is required for the service. The following fields will not be used if authentication is turned off.

Username or Access Key

The username used to authenticate against the service. When using Amazon S3, this is the Access Key for your account.

Password or Secret Key

The password used to authenticate against the service. When using Amazon S3, this is the Secret Key generated for the account.

Pick Songs

Using the pick songs menu, you can easily select songs to be added to the selected book.

Selecting Songs

Tap on the name of the song you wish to add to place a checkmark next to it. This indicates that the song will be placed in the book. Tap again to remove the song from the book. Of course these changes do not take place until you tap the Done button in the upper right corner of the screen.

You can select all songs or deselect all songs using the button on the bottom.

Searching and Sorting

You can also use the search bar to search for specific songs, or tap on the sort button in the lower left corner to sort songs by a particular attribute. Sorting methods include:

  • Title sorts songs by the song title. Default.
  • Artist sorts songs by the artist attributed to the song.
  • Added sorts songs by placing the one last added to the library at the top.
  • Starred sorts songs that have been favorited or starred at the top of the list.
  • Number sorts songs by the number given to each in the song's metadata.

Canceling Changes

If you do not wish to change the songs in your book, tap on the Books button in the upper left corner. This will return you to the books list without changing the songs contained in the book.

Planning Center

Planning Center Online is a service used by churches to organize teams and schedule events. This works great for larger organizations where timing of multiple services and resources is important.

OnSong integrates with Planning Center by allowing you to browse your service types and folders and select a plan to import. You can also import individual songs.

Signing In

Before you can use the Planning Center Online import, you will need to sign into the service. Be sure to do this first before proceeding.

Search Songs

At the top of the import menu is a search songs option. Tap on this to search your Planning Center song library to import songs into your OnSong library. This is useful if you are planning to create sets in OnSong instead of first making a plan in Planning Center.

Choose a Service Type

You can use the rest of the screen to browse folders, or to choose a service type. This will display a list of plans made for that service type.

Sign Out

The bottom of the screen displays the organization that you are signed in under, as well as a Sign Out button. Tap on the Sign Out button if you need to sign in as another user. Since Planning Center does not support multiple organization access in its API, you will need to sign in separately if you manage multiple organizations.

Choose Plan

When you select a service type, you are presented with plans that are happening currently or in the future. At the bottom of the screen is an Include past plans switch. Turning this on will display plans in the past, as well as present and future plans.

Viewing Plans

Tap on a plan in the list to view the songs contained in plan. From this screen you can import the plan into OnSong. You can also preview the files that will be imported and choose a different version of the song file if multiple attachments have been specified.

Choose Songs

When you select a plan, OnSong will display the songs in that plan in the order that they have been arranged. Tap on a song in this list to preview it.

Importing The Plan

Tap on the Import button in the upper right corner of the screen to begin the import process. This will create a set, as well as download and add the listed songs to it. After the import process is completed, the set will be loaded and viewed in the songs menu.

Previewing Songs

OnSong will automatically select the attachment that works best with OnSong. You can tap on a row in this list to preview the song. In addition, you can use this screen to choose a different version of the song.

Use my songs when importing

The switch at the bottom of the screen allows you to change how the import process works. If turned on, OnSong will look up the song in your library and use that instead of the song associated with the plan in Planning Center Online. The default setting is off, however OnSong will retain your preference.

Search Songs

While you would normally import your plans from Planning Center, you can also import individual songs from the song library stored in your Planning Center account.

Search Bar

The search bar allows you to search the songs in your Planning Center library. Type in the search bar and tap on the Search button to begin the search. This will filter the songs in this menu for import based on their title.

You can also choose what you would like to search using the buttons under the search bar. You can search the following:

  • All returns all songs in the list.
  • Title searches the title of songs.
  • Author searches the author of the songs.
  • Lyrics searches the lyrics of the songs.
  • Theme searches by the theme of the songs.

Song List

Tap on the songs to place a checkmark next to the items you would like to import. Tap again to remove the checkmark and not import the song. This will be one of the song's attachments based on a list of priorities. To change the version of the song that is imported, preview it first. Tap on the Import button to begin the import.

Previewing Songs

Tap on the magnifying glass icon on the left of the row to view the version of the song that will be imported. You can use this screen to choose a different version to import.

Sign Into Planning Center

This screen displays the Planning Center Online authentication page. Because this is hosted by Planning Center Online, you may need to zoom into the form to see what you are typing.

Enter your email address in the first field followed by your password in the second field. Tap on the checkmark button to submit your credentials to Planning Center Online. No information is passed to OnSong.

Once authenticated, OnSong will receive information that will keep you authenticated with the services.

If you've forgotten your password, tap on the Forgot password? link beneath the form. This will provide an interface to submit your email address to reset your password.

Once authenticated, this screen will automatically be dismissed and the Planning Center import screen will reload with your organization's information.

You can close this window and cancel the authentication process by tapping the Cancel button in the upper left corner of the screen.

Song Preview

The song preview screen allows you to view the version of the song that will be imported. This will either display the attachment as-is in a song viewer, or display the chord chart with the default styles that you've set in Settings Menu Settings Style Preferences.

Choosing Versions

If you are happy with the version of the file that will be downloaded, tap on the Done button and continue the download. Otherwise, tap on the Versions button to choose a different attachment to preview. This also changes the version of the song that will be imported.

Import associated backing track

This option appears if one or more audio files are associated with the song. If turned on, the song is downloaded and automatically linked to the import song. If more than one audio track is available, tap on the Choose button to pick the track to link to the imported chord chart or sheet music.

Import Priority

OnSong will automatically attempt to choose the version of the song that works best for importing. This is performed in the following order:

  1. Chord Charts are created inside of the Planning Center web application and are preferred over attachments.
  2. OnSong Archive files contain all the information of the song including annotations, styles, and transposition settings.
  3. OnSong Files are text files in the OnSong file format.
  4. ChordPro Files are text files in the ChordPro file format.
  5. Plain Text can be either OnSong or ChordPro formatted, although regular text files also display well.
  6. Adobe PDF are PDF files created from other software and are viewed "as-is".
  7. Microsoft Word files display "as-is" as well.
  8. Other Files include files that are not audio.
  9. Media Files are not imported, but associated audio files can be imported along with chord charts if configured in the bottom toolbar.

Choose Version

Planning Center allows you to have many different versions of a song using file attachments as well as text-based chord charts written inside of the Planning Center web application. You will need to choose the version of the song that you want to use in OnSong.

Tap on the Versions button in the upper right corner of the song preview. From there you can tap on the version of the song you would like to display in the preview screen. This also changes the version of the song that will be imported.

SongSelect

SongSelect is a chord chart service that is common among houses of worship that use CCLI for licensing lyrics display to their congregations. We've partnered with SongSelect to bring tighter integration with OnSong like the ability to transpose PDF chord charts on-the-fly. Start by tapping on the Sign Into SongSelect button if you haven't already.

Sign In

The first time you access the SongSelect screen, you'll need to sign in and authorize OnSong to access SongSelect on your behalf.

Search and Import

Search for songs by title and then checkmark songs you want to import.

Transpose and Capo

When you import SongSelect PDF chord charts into OnSong, they are linked to your account. This means you can transpose or capo your chord charts from within the song viewer.

Change Settings

In this screen you can change what gets downloaded to OnSong when you import. You can also view your SongSelect terms of use and the OnSong end-user license agreement.

Sign Out

Tap on the Sign Out button on the bottom right to sign out of your account if you need to sign into another account.

Note: Your downloads are limited based on your subscription classification. You can commonly download 200 unique songs as PDF chord charts per year with your SongSelect subscription.

Preview

When you tap on the magnifying glass icon next to a song in the returned search results, you can view a preview of the song and it's lyrics and metadata.

This will only display the lyrics of the song instead of the PDF chord chart to avoid using your quota of downloads for the year if you don't intend to import the chord chart.

Search and Import

This is the main interface of the SongSelect import process once you're signed in.

Searching

Get started by entering some keywords in the search bar. OnSong returns the search results which include the song title and artists.

Previewing

Tap on the magnifying glass icon to the left of each song to confirm it's the correct version you are looking for. This will display the lyrics of the song in a new window so you con confirm it's the song you want to import.

Importing

To import songs, tap on the name of the song to check or uncheck each row. This lets you import multiple songs at once. Then tap on the Import button in the upper right corner to start downloading your charts into your OnSong library. OnSong imports both the PDF chord chart as well as the text-based lyrics simultaneously so you have both.

Note: You can import just lyrics if you want by tapping on the wrench icon in the lower right and turning off PDF chord chart importing. You can also toggle between lyrics and PDF chord charts or convert PDF chord charts to text by using the Conversion Toolbar in the Song Editor.

SongSelect Settings

The SongSelect settings menu displays pertinent legal information about the SongSelect service as well as additional settings to customize how SongSelect songs are imported and searched.

Legal

This area contains links to legal documents to which you are bound when using OnSong and the SongSelect service.

  • End User License Agreement links to the Apple legal documentation for end-user use of the OnSong application.
  • SongSelect Terms of Use links to the Terms of Use for using the SongSelect service.

Customize

This section contains options that help you customize how songs are searched and imported in the SongSelect interface within OnSong.

  • Download PDF chord charts is enabled by default. This allows both the PDF chord chart and the text-based lyrics to be imported. If this is turned off, then PDF chord charts are not downloaded and only lyrics are imported.
  • Find songs with determines the type of songs that are returned. By default, all songs that contain chords or lyrics are returned. You can change this to Chords or lyrics, Chords, Lyrics or Both. If you want to only return songs that have chord charts, change this settings to Chords.

Search Results

When songs are found, they are returned in the search results screen. This displays songs based on relevance. Each row contains the song title, artist name, and songwriters of the song.

Tap on a row to view details and choose to get lyrics or get the chords sheet. You can also scroll down to view more songs, or tap on the Load More Results button to retrieve more matching songs.

Search Songs

After you've signed in, type in keywords in the search bar and tap on the Search button in the keyboard to begin searching for songs. Matching songs will be returned in the search results page.

Settings

The settings screen allows you to view your agreements and well as configure the import process.

Legal

This section contains links to:

Customize

Here you can change how your chord charts import. By default OnSong will import both the text-based lyrics and PDF chord chart of the song (if available), making the PDF chord chart the displayed file. Turn this switch off to only import text-based chord charts.

Sign Into SongSelect

When you choose to import from SongSelect, you will be prompted to sign in. This opens a screen that loads the SongSelect sign in screen.

Type in your username or email address that you use to sign into the SongSelect web site, as well as your password. You will then be prompted by SongSelect to allow OnSong to access your account and close the screen.

Once you are signed in, your authorization token is remembered so you shouldn't have to sign in again unless there is a change to your account status.

Transpose and Capo

When you import a SongSelect PDF chord chart into OnSong, it associates that file with your SongSelect account. While these chord charts are still viewed "as-is", you can now transpose the chord chart using the style preferences menu in the menu bar.

Transposing

From this menu you can both transpose and capo the chord chart. OnSong combines information from both sliders to determine the key to download from SongSelect. OnSong downloads the PDF file and stores it locally so the next time you choose a different key, it is available immediately without requiring an Internet connection.

Existing Songs

You may have already downloaded PDF chord charts from SongSelect. If you are signed into SongSelect and your PDF chord chart has a CCLI number assigned to it, OnSong will automatically connect the song to your SongSelect account and permit you to transpose and capo.

Internet Requirements

Transposing SongSelect PDF files requires downloading a new version of the PDF file from the SongSelect service which requires Internet access. Each version is saved locally which allows you to access previous versions of the song without Internet access.

View Song Details

This screen will show you details about the selected song including the song title, artist and songwriter names, CCLI Song #, and the key in which the song is written.

Choose one of the following options to view, download, and import a version of the song into OnSong:

Get Lyrics

Lyrics are available in plain text from SongSelect, but do not include chords.

Get Chord Sheet

Chord sheets are made available as PDF files which can be viewed "as-is" in OnSong.

Note: While OnSong does provide utilities to convert PDF files to text, SongSelect files are essentially pictures of chord charts, which means that the converted file will need adjustments to its text and chords. If you are planning to use text-based chord charts, we recommend using services such as Rockin' With The Cross or WorshipReady.com.

Get Chord Sheet

When you choose to get the chord sheet of a song, you must first choose a key. Tap on the pulldown menu to choose the key of the song you wish to import.

Next, tap on the Download chord sheet button to view the PDF file and choose to import it from there.

You can also choose the Email chord sheet button to email the PDF file as an attachment to the email address on file with your SongSelect account.

Note: If you are planning to convert the PDF file to text inside of OnSong, choose the key of C. This will omit any sharps and flats which can cause issues in the optical character recognition process.

Download Chord Sheet

When you decide to get the chord sheet, you must download it first in order to preview the song. This happens before it is imported into your OnSong library.

This screen will display the PDF file generated by SongSelect. Tap on the Import button to import the PDF file into your OnSong library.

You can continue to navigate the SongSelect web site using the navigation toolbar buttons at the bottom of the screen. This allows you to import additional songs. When you are done importing, tap on the Close button at the top of the screen.

Note: Downloading or emailing PDF files counts against the number of charts you are permitted to download with your SongSelect subscription.

Get Lyrics

When you choose to get lyrics, the web page that appears displays the lyrics of the song. Tap on the Import button at the top of the screen to import those lyrics into OnSong.

You can also tap on the Download button to view the lyrics as text. You can also import from that screen as well.

If you tap on the Email button, the text file will be emailed as an attachment to the email address on record in your SongSelect account.

You can continue to navigate the SongSelect web site using the navigation toolbar buttons at the bottom of the screen, or using the back button in the upper left corners of the screen. This allows you to import additional songs. When you are done importing, tap on the Close button at the top of the screen.

WorshipReady.com

WorshipReady.com provides handcrafted chord charts for use on a number of platforms including Planning Center, PDF, and OnSong. Access to content is through subscription only and limits the number of chord charts you can download per month based on your subscription level.

Sign In

The first time you access this import screen, you'll need to sign in. Enter your credentials to view chord charts.

Search and Browse

By default, the top 100 songs are listed on the screen. Use the search bar to search songs by title. You can also use the buttons below the search bar to search by artist and album as well.

Preview

Tap on the magnifying glass icon on the left side to see a preview of the song prior to importing it. This does not count against your downloads. Make sure it's the song you want before importing it into your library.

Importing

Tap on the songs that you want to import to place a checkmark on the right side. Once you've selected songs to import, tap on the Import button in the upper right side of the screen. The progress of the import will be displayed. Once finished, the number of downloads available will decrease and you will be returned to the All Songs screen.

Note: You will only be able to checkmark the number of songs that you have available to download.

Signing Out

You can use the Sign Out link at the bottom to sign out of WorshipReady.com at any time.

Sign Into WorshipReady.com

To import chord charts from WorshipReady.com, you first need to sign in. OnSong will present you with a sign in screen where you can enter your User ID or email address as well as your password. Tap on the Login button to sign into WorshipReady.

If you don't have a WorshipReady.com account, tap on the Signup button to get the web address needed to sign up. Due to App Store policies, OnSong cannot provide a direct link to signup screens for subscriptions. To sign up, go to http://worshipready.com.

Books

Books allow you to organize larger song libraries into collections. This is perfect if you are in multiple bands and don't want your songs to be mixed, or to place special event/holiday songs into a book to prevent them from being mixed with the rest of your songs.

Libraries

Tap on the Back or Libraries button in the upper left corner to view, manage and switch between libraries.

View Books

The books menu displays books that you can choose to view. This will navigate you back to the All Songs menu with only those books selected. The top two options are not books, but collections of songs in relation books:

  • All Songs contains all of your songs regardless of what book or books they are placed into.
  • Unbound Songs contains songs that have not yet been placed into a book. This is useful for finding songs that have not yet been organized into books.

Creating Books

To create a book, tap on the + button in the lower right corner to open the Add New Book Screen. Type a name for your book and tap Done. This will add a book to the list of books.

Editing Books

You can edit the songs that are in a book as well as rename and perform other functions. To do this, tap on the Edit button in the upper-right corner to enter the Editing Mode and then tap on the name of the book to view the Action Menu.

Note: the edit button does not appear unless one or more books have been added.

Adding Songs to Books

There are a number of other ways to add songs to books such as:

  • Picking Songs is the most direct way. You can do this by entering Editing Mode and then tap on the name of the book to view the Action Menu.
  • Imported Songs will automatically be added to the currently selected book. Create a book and select it to have imported songs added to the book as well.
  • Placing in Books is accomplished through the Song Editor Place In Book Menu and allows songs to be added to specific books using a menu.
  • Book Metadata can be added in imported files or the Song Editor which, when saved to the library, will automatically add the song to existing books or create a book with the appropriate name.
  • Add Songs Menu has an Add Existing Songs option to add songs to the currently selected book.

Sorting Books

You can change the order that books appear in the books list. Tap the sort button in the lower left to sort by a custom order. You can then tap on the Edit button in the upper right corner to enter Editing Mode. From there you can rearrange the order of books using the reordering handles on the right of each row.

Add New Book

The add new book screen allows you to type in the name of the book to be added to your list of books. Type a name and then tap on the Done button in the upper-right corner. If you don't wish to create the book, tap on the Cancel button in the upper-left corner.

When you return to the book list, you will find the newly added book.

Editing Mode

When you tap on the Edit button in the upper right corner of the books menu, you enter editing mode. When enabled, you can begin:

Sorting Books

When the sort button in the lower left corner is set to a down arrow, you adjust the order of the books by dragging the rows via the reordering handles on the right. When you are finished, tap on the Done button in the upper right corner to save your changes.

Note: The order of the All Songs and Unbound Songs collections cannot be sorted and will always appear at the top of the list.

Deleting Books

While you can delete books by swiping from right to left over each row and tapping on the Delete button which appears, you can also delete books in editing mode. Tap on the red minus circle to the left, and then tap on the Delete button that appears to delete the book. This will not delete the songs in the book, just the book itself.

Editing Books

You can perform advanced actions on books by tapping on the name of the book. This will display the Action Menu that can be used to perform these actions.

Book Action Menu

When in Editing Mode you can tap on the name of a book to open this action menu. From here you can choose one of the following actions:

Delete Book and Songs

This is a destructive action in that it will delete not only the book, but also any songs contained in the book.

Remove Book

This action will remove the book, but the songs in the book will be retained in the master library.

Rename Book

This will open a screen to allow you to change the name of the book.

Export Songs

This option will open the export screen with the songs in the book selected for export.

Pick Songs

This option will open a screen allowing you to choose which songs should be contained in the book.

Edit Book

The Edit Book screen allows you to rename and change the settings of the book.

Enter Book Name

Type a new name for the book.

Separate Styles

Use this option to determine if songs placed in this book should be able to have separate styles. What this means is songs added to this book can have a different key, notes, styles, drawings and other settings. This is handy if you play different songs with different bands or vocalists and want to keep everything straight. Options include.

  • Default uses the settings that you have configured under the Utilities Menu Settings Menu Settings Songs Books.
  • Off saves any changes you make to the song within the set to your master library. This will not affect other sets that have Separate Set/Song Styles turned on.
  • On saves any changes made to the set and not to the master library or any other set.

Once you're done, tap on the Done button in the upper right corner to save your changes. Tap the Cancel to discard your changes.

Export Menu

The export menu lets you choose a location where exported content should be saved. If you have more than one file to export, the number of items is displayed in parenthesis in the title.

OnSong supports four general locations with the last option allowing for future expansion to web services that implement standard access protocols.

Dropbox

Dropbox is a file storage service that allows you to place your important documents in the cloud. This means that they are near instantly available on all your devices, making the service a great candidate for backing up your library. Tapping on the Dropbox option allows you to select a folder in your Dropbox where you would like your files exported.

Google Drive

Dropbox is a cloud-based storage service that allows you to store documents in the cloud. This means that they are near instantly available on all your devices, making the service a great candidate for backing up your library or storing files. Tapping on the Google Drive option allows you to select a folder in your Google Drive where you would like your files exported.

iTunes File Sharing

This option allows the user to export to iTunes file sharing. This is a special folder contained inside of the OnSong app which can be accessed through iTunes. This means that the file is stored on your device until it is saved off of the device through the iTunes application on a computer.

Files

iOS has the ability to export files to apps from storage providers that support integration with the iOS Files app. Use this option to select a location and folder where the file should be exported.

Other

Some online storage services have support for open standards, allowing files to be securely stored and retrieved without individual configurations. Use this option if you would like to add an online source that supports Amazon S3, FTP or WebDAV protocols.

Delete Book and Songs

This option will not only remove the book, but also delete any songs that are contained in the book. An exception to this action is if the song is contained in another book. If so, it will be retained. You will be prompted prior to this action to ensure you really want to delete both book and songs.

Note: This action cannot be undone. However, you can use the Undelete Songs tool found in the Utilities Menu Tools Menu.

Pick Songs

Using the pick songs menu, you can easily select songs to be added to the selected book.

Selecting Songs

Tap on the name of the song you wish to add to place a checkmark next to it. This indicates that the song will be placed in the book. Tap again to remove the song from the book. Of course these changes do not take place until you tap the Done button in the upper right corner of the screen.

You can select all songs or deselect all songs using the button on the bottom.

Searching and Sorting

You can also use the search bar to search for specific songs, or tap on the sort button in the lower left corner to sort songs by a particular attribute. Sorting methods include:

  • Title sorts songs by the song title. Default.
  • Artist sorts songs by the artist attributed to the song.
  • Added sorts songs by placing the one last added to the library at the top.
  • Starred sorts songs that have been favorited or starred at the top of the list.
  • Number sorts songs by the number given to each in the song's metadata.

Canceling Changes

If you do not wish to change the songs in your book, tap on the Books button in the upper left corner. This will return you to the books list without changing the songs contained in the book.

Remove Book

This option will remove the book from your books list, but will not delete any songs. Tapping on this action will prompt you before performing the action.

Note: This action cannot be undone.

Rename Book

When you choose to rename a book, the rename book screen appears. Here you can change the name of the book, and then tap on the OK button in the upper right corner to save.

If you do not wish to change the name of the book, tap on the Cancel button in the upper left corner to return to the book list.

Libraries

OnSong features libraries which comprise all the songs, sets, settings and styles that you've provided. Typically you only need one library but you can create other libraries as well and switch between them.

Libraries are named and listed on this screen. The date the library was creates as well as the size of the library is displayed under the name.

Switching Libraries

To switch libraries, tap on the name of the library you want to use. You can then view and choose a book to view.

Creating Libraries

You can create new libraries by tapping on the + icon in the lower right corner.

Edit Mode

To make changes to your library list such as renaming a library, deleting or duplicating, tap on the Edit button to enter edit mode.

Sorting

Tapping on the sort button displays a menu indicating ways you can sort your libraries. The current sort method is highlighted with an arrow indicating sort direction. Tapping on the current sort order will toggle the sort direction.

  • Name sorts the list by the library name.
  • Created sorts the list of songs by placing newer libraries at the top or bottom of the list.
  • File Size sorts libraries by their file size.

Edit Mode

When you are in edit mode, tap on the name of the library to open an action menu to perform advanced options. Tap on the Done button to return to the list of libraries to choose one.

Delete

You can delete libraries by tapping on the red minus icon on the left side to reveal a delete button. You can also tap on the Delete option in the menu. This will delete the library and all of its contents.

Duplicate

This option allows you to make a copy of a library, allowing you to make changes independently of the original library.

Rename

This option will allow you to rename the library. This renames the underlying library folder as well.

Cancel

Tap on the cancel button to close the action menu and return to the list in edit mode.

Rename Library

Tap on the name of the library to choose the rename action. In this screen you can type a new name. Tap on the Done button to save your changes. This will rename the folder in which the OnSong library is stored.

New Library

When you create a new library, you only need to provide a name. Type in the name here and tap on the Done button to create the library.

Note: Libraries are created in the document storage inside of the OnSong app. Libraries are named folders stored in the **Library directory.**

Editing Mode

When you tap on the Edit button in the upper right corner of the All Songs menu, you enter editing mode. When enabled, you can:

Deleting Songs

While you can delete songs by swiping from right to left over each row and tapping on the Delete button, you can also delete songs in editing mode. Tap on the red minus circle to the left and then tap on the Delete button to delete the song.

Perform Additional Actions

You can perform advanced actions on songs by tapping on the name of the song. This will display the action menu that can be used to perform additional actions such as:

  • Delete Song is synonymous with the other methods of deleting a song. The song will be deleted immediately without an additional prompt.
  • Edit Song will open the Song Editor without first viewing the song. This can be handy for quick updates or when there is an issue with the viewable file.
  • Duplicate Song will make a copy of the selected song in the master library if you need to make a different version but wish to keep the older version.

Tap the Done button in the upper right corner when you are finished to exist the edit mode and return to the normal function of the All Songs menu.

Add To...

When in editing mode, you can select songs and then tap on the Add To... button in the editing mode. This will let you add the selected songs to books or sets with the following options.

Book

You can add the songs to a book of your choice. This option opens the Book Picker where you can select an existing book, or create a new book to add the songs to.

Current Set

If you've already started a set, you can take the songs you've selected and place them at the end of the currently selected set. If a set hasn't been explicitly selected, OnSong will select the set that is scheduled closest to the current date.

New Set

You could also take those selected songs and add them to a new set right from this screen. This will add the songs to a newly created set with the date of the set being today.

Choose Set

If you don't want to add the songs to the current set or a new set, you can also choose to add the songs to an existing set. Tapping on this option will open the Set Picker where you can choose an existing set or create a new set.

Cancel

If you choose not to add the songs to a book or a set, tap on this option to cancel the operation.

Note that songs will be added at the end of the selected set. Songs are also added in the order that they were selected in the song list.

Book Picker

The book picker allows you to pick a book in which songs can be placed. If you don't want to pick a song, tap on the Close button in the upper left corner.

Picking Books

You can tap on a book in the list to add the selected songs to the book. The book picker will automatically close.

Editing Books

You can use this option to delete or reorder books that are found in the list by placing the list into editing mode.

Sorting Books

You can sort long lists of books by tapping on the sort icon in the lower left corner. You can toggle between alphabetic and custom order.

Adding Books

If the book you want to pick is not found in the list, tap on the + button in the lower right corner to create a new book. Once you create the book, it is automatically picked and the book picker is dismissed.

Set Picker

The set picker allows you to pick a set in which songs can be placed. If you don't want to pick a set, tap on the Close button in the upper left corner.

Picking Sets

You can tap on a set in the list to add the selected songs to the set. The set picker will automatically close.

Editing Sets

You can use this option to delete or reorder sets that are found in the All Sets list by placing the list into editing mode. You can only reorder sets when the list is sorted in custom order.

Sorting Sets

You can sort your list of sets by tapping on the sort icon in the lower left corner. You can toggle between alphabetic, date and custom order.

Choosing Sets

OnSong lets you manually or automatically archive sets. This keeps your main set lists in the active tab. Use the tabs at the bottom of the screen to view active, archived or remote sets if you've signed into a content provider that supports it.

Adding Sets

If the set you want to pick is not found in the list, tap on the + button in the lower right corner to create a new set. Once you create the set, it is automatically picked and the set picker is dismissed.

Mark

You can mark multiple songs at once when in editing mode in a list of songs. Once you've selected some songs, you can tap on the Mark button in the editing toolbar. This reveals the following list of standard icons:

  • None removes any icon that has already been associated with selected songs.
  • Star marks each song with a gold star.
  • Flag marks each song with a red flag.
  • Arrow marks each song with a purple arrow that points to the right.
  • Dot marks each song with a teal dot.
  • Cancel will cancel the marking action.

This provides a fast way to mark songs. For more customization such as the color of each icon, you can use the Organizer Menu

More

Once you've selected one or more songs when in editing mode, you can tap on the More button in the editing toolbar. This will reveal a menu with the following actions to be performed:

Delete

This will delete the selected songs.

Duplicate

This will duplicate the selected songs in your library which can be useful if you want to have two different versions.

Edit

If you have only one song selected, the edit option is available. Tapping on this will open the Song Editor with the selected song loaded.

Email

The email action will open the Email Screen with the selected songs to be emailed in a format of your choice.

Export

The export action will open the Export Screen with the selected songs. You can then choose the formats and location for the files to be exported.

Open

The open action will open the Open Screen with the selected songs. You can then choose a format with which to open the file into another app.

Print

The print action will open the Print Preview Screen with the selected songs displayed in the order that they were selected. You can customize the print outs and then either print to an AirPrint printer or export as a PDF file.

Cancel

You can tap on the cancel action if you do not wish to perform any action.

Local/Remote Tab

OnSong is designed to store all your song content on your device. This ensures that OnSong works great even if there is no Internet connection.

Because of this, you need to import music separately into your library. But what if you had immediate access to thousands of chord charts right from the same menu?

The Local/Remote tab at the bottom of the All Songs menu provides for this ability. When you tap on the remote tab, you get a list of chord charts available in a third-party repository. Tap on the song to preview or view it if you are a registered user of the service.

When you sign up for a service like Rockin' With The Cross or ChordVault, you can log in with your credentials to view songs. If you find a song you like, tap on the download icon to the right to add it to your library.

You can change which chord chart repository is used in the remote tab under Utilities Menu Settings Menu Settings Songs.

Note: Chord chart repositories are not free, and be wary of those that are. This is because royalties need to be paid to the songwriters and artists who create the copyrighted works. Without payment, you could inadvertently place yourself in a legal situation by using or distributing intellectual property. OnSong works with third-party services to ensure you have the legal right to view the chords and lyrics of songs.

Keep in mind that there may be other licenses required depending on what you do with the copyrighted work. For instance, if you play it on a recording, you will need a mechanical license. If you perform it live, you may need to acquire a performance license, etc. Please consult legal counsel to ensure you are in compliance with the laws and practices of your region.

Sorting Songs

Tapping on the sort button lets the song list by sorted in the following ways:

  • Title sorts the list by the song title in ascending order. Sorting ignores "The" prefixed words if Settings » Menu Settings » Songs Remove "The" is turned on. Default.
  • Artist sorts the list of songs by the name of the artist associated with the song in ascending order.
  • Added sorts the list of songs by placing newly imported songs at the top of the list.
  • Starred sorts the list of songs by placing favorited or starred songs at the top of the list.
  • Number sorts the list of songs by song number as declared in metadata in the Song Editor.
  • Last Played sorts the list of songs by placing the last played songs at the top of the list. This is determined by the date/time of the set in which songs are added. The date on which the song was last played is listed in each row if known.
  • Most Popular sorts songs that have been played more at the top of the list. This is useful for determining if songs have been overplayed. The number of times the song has been played is displayed in each row if applicable. This information is provided by songs being added to sets.

If you don't want to change the sort order, tap on the Cancel button.

Sync

Sync with Google Drive

When you synchronize with Google Drive, OnSong will create or use a folder in your Google Drive to store the contents of your library folder. This folder contains files, settings, and the OnSong database file called OnSong.sqlite3. When these files are synchronized, it allows your library to stay up to date on multiple devices.

Authorization

You will need to authorize OnSong to access your Google Drive the first time you attempt to use it. Once your account is linked, you can use Dropbox without signing in again unless your account becomes unlinked for some reason.

File List

The files contained in your OnSong library and files stored in the synchronization folder on the remote server are presented in this list. In addition, arrows indicate the direction of synchronization that must occur. This is determined based on file system timestamps.

  • Down the file must be downloaded from the remote drive.
  • Up the file must be uploaded to the remote drive.

Note: The OnSong database file is always downloaded and synchronized with the local database file and then uploaded back to the remote drive.

Performing Synchronization

Tap on the Sync button in the upper right corner to begin the synchronization process. The status of the synchronization is provided by highlighting the files that are being uploaded, downloaded, or completed in the list. In addition, the Sync button is replaced with a percentage representing the progress of the synchronization.

Note: The default synchronization folder is called OnSong. You can change the name of this folder under Settings » Import Settings » Synchronization » Sync Folder. If you would like to be able to view and edit text-based documents contained in your OnSong database, be sure to turn on Sync As Files.

Authorizing Google Drive

Whenever you first use Google Drive in OnSong, you will need to first authorize OnSong to access your Google Drive content. This is handled completely by Google Drive, so no information is passed to OnSong in any way.

Getting Google Drive

Google Drive is a popular cloud-based storage service that offers 15 GB of free storage with options for more storage through paid subscriptions. 15 GB is more than enough space for chord charts and OnSong backups. Sign up at http://drive.google.com.

Authorization

Before you can use your Google Drive with OnSong, you need to sign in with your Google account and authorize OnSong. Enter your Google account email address and password. This will authenticate you with Google Drive and authorize OnSong to access your drive contents.

The login and authorization process is handled completely by Google and no credentials are sent to OnSong at any time. OnSong requests access to your entire Google Drive to allow you to import and export files from any folder.

Sync with Dropbox

When you synchronize with Dropbox, OnSong will create or use a folder in your Dropbox to store the contents of your library folder. This folder contains files, settings, and the OnSong database file called OnSong.sqlite3. When these files are synchronized, it allows your library to stay up to date on multiple devices.

Authorization

You will need to authorize OnSong to access your Dropbox the first time you attempt to use it. This will either open a web-based authentication screen from inside of OnSong, or redirect you to the Dropbox app on your device if installed. Once your account is linked, you can use Dropbox without signing in again unless your account becomes unlinked for some reason, or if you access Dropbox in OnSong from another device.

File List

The files contained in your OnSong library and files stored in the synchronization folder on the remote server are presented in this list. In addition, arrows indicate the direction of synchronization that must occur. This is determined based on file system timestamps.

  • Down the file must be downloaded from the remote server.
  • Up the file must be uploaded to the remote server.

Note: The OnSong database file is always downloaded and synchronized with the local database file and then uploaded back to the remote server.

Performing Synchronization

Tap on the Sync button in the upper right corner to begin the synchronization process. The status of the synchronization is provided by highlighting the files that are being uploaded, downloaded, or completed in the list. In addition, the Sync button is replaced with a percentage representing the progress of the synchronization.

Note: The default synchronization folder is called OnSong. You can change the name of this folder under Settings Import Settings Synchronization Sync Folder. If you would like to be able to view and edit text-based documents contained in your OnSong database, be sure to turn on Sync As Files.

Authorizing Dropbox

Whenever you first use Dropbox in OnSong, you will need to first authorize OnSong to access your Dropbox contents. This is handled completely by the Dropbox SDK, so no information is passed to OnSong along the way. Dropbox may show a different screen depending on what you have installed on your device.

Getting Dropbox

Dropbox is a popular cloud-based storage service that offers 2 GB of free storage for signing up. You can pay a subscription if you need to store more information. 2 GB is more than enough space for chord charts and OnSong backups. Sign up at http://dropbox.com.

App Authorization

If you have the Dropbox app installed on your device, you will be redirected to that device to complete the authorization process. Check the account you are using and switch accounts if necessary. Once you are sure that the proper account is selected, tap on the Allow button to authorize OnSong to access your Dropbox and to return to the OnSong app.

Web Authorization

If you do not have Dropbox installed, Dropbox displays a web-based authentication screen. Enter the email address you use to sign into Dropbox along with your password and tap the Sign In button. This will authenticate you with Dropbox and authorize OnSong to access your Dropbox.

Note: Both authorization methods are handled completely by Dropbox and no credentials are sent to OnSong at any time. OnSong requests access to your entire Dropbox to allow you to import and export files from any folder.

Sync with Other

The first step in synchronization with another source is to choose it. This is done using the source selection list.

Choose a Source

Tap on the source to select it for synchronization. This will display the files to be synchronized. You must then choose a location on the remote server where the synchronization will occur.

Editing Mode

You can tap on the Edit button to make changes to sources in the list or to create a new source.

Source Editor

When adding a new source or editing an existing one, the source editor is displayed. This lets you specify connection parameters to your network-connected storage service.

Title

Provide a title for your source so you can identify it in the sources list.

Type

Choose the type of service that you will be connecting to. This can be one of the following options:

  • FTP or File Transfer Protocol can connect to older file servers.
  • Amazon S3 or Simple Storage Service is hosted by Amazon as a mechanism for storing content for web services.
  • WebDAV or Web-based Distributed Authoring and Versioning is a file storage standard that allows network connected services to be treated like a local hard drive.

Host or Bucket

This is the web address or IP address of the service. When using Amazon S3, this is the optional bucket to access in S3.

Path

This is the directory to use as the root of the service that is being accessed.

Use SSL

Turn this on if communication should be performed securely.

Authenticate?

Turn this on if authentication is required for the service. The following fields will not be used if authentication is turned off.

Username or Access Key

The username used to authenticate against the service. When using Amazon S3, this is the Access Key for your account.

Password or Secret Key

The password used to authenticate against the service. When using Amazon S3, this is the Secret Key generated for the account.

Choose Folder

Using other sources requires additional steps prior to synchronizing.

Choosing a Folder

When you select the source to synchronize to, you will then need to choose a folder. Browse through your folders and when the folder is selected, tap on the Choose button in the upper right corner.

Performing Synchronization

After you've selected a folder, you will be taken to a screen that shows you the files to be synchronized between the remote server and your OnSong library.

Perform the Sync

When you synchronize, OnSong will create or use a folder in your Dropbox to store the contents of your library folder. This folder contains files, settings, and the OnSong database file called OnSong.sqlite3. When these files are synchronized, it can allow your library to stay up to date on multiple devices.

File List

The files contained in your OnSong library and files stored in the synchronization folder on the remote server are presented in this list. In addition, arrows indicate the direction of synchronization that must occur. This is determined based on file system timestamps.

  • Down the file must be downloaded from the remote server.
  • Up the file must be uploaded to the remote server.

Note: The OnSong database file is always downloaded and synchronized with the local database file and then uploaded back to the remote server.

Performing Synchronization

Tap on the Sync button in the upper right corner to begin the synchronization process. The status of the synchronization is provided by highlighting the files that are being uploaded, downloaded, or completed in the list. In addition, the Sync button is replaced with a percentage representing the progress of the synchronization.

Note: The default synchronization folder is called OnSong. You can change the name of this folder under Settings Import Settings Synchronization Sync Folder. If you would like to be able to view and edit text-based documents contained in your OnSong database, be sure to turn on Sync As Files.

Editing Mode

Tap on the Edit button in the sources list to enter editing mode. From there you can tap on a source to make changes to it, or tap on the Add New Source row to create a new source.

Deleting

Tap on the red minus icon to reveal a Delete button. Tapping on this will remove the source.

Editing Source

Tap on the name of the source to open the Source Editor. This allows you to make changes to the source.

Add New Source

Tap on the bottom row to open the Source Editor. This allows you to specify information for a new source.

Tap on the Done button when you are done editing the sources. You will then be able to select a source for browsing files or choose a folder.

By Artist

You can browse artists that are in your song library using the Artists tab. This displays artists in rows with the quantity shown on the right. Tap on the name of the artist to view songs by that artist. If you have songs that do not have an artist assigned, they are listed under the None option.

While the list of artists is sorted in alphabetic order by default, you can tap on the sort button in the lower right corner to sort the list by quantity of songs. This will place artists with the most songs at the top of the list.

The + button on the lower right allows you to Add Songs.

Note: Songs are not added to the particular artist. The + button is added for continuity in the user interface.

View Songs

When you tap on an artist in the by artist tab, the list of songs by that artist is displayed. Songs are sorted by song title.

Tap on the Pick button in the upper right to switch to a pick list. In this mode, you can place a checkmark next to songs and then tap on the Done button to add those songs to the last selected set.

By Key

Using the Keys tab, you can see what keys songs in your library are in. If you have songs that do not have a key, they can be retrieved using the None option.

This screen lists displays each key in rows with the quantity of songs in each key shown on the right. Tap on the row to view songs in that key.

While the list of keys is sorted in alphabetic order by default, you can tap on the sort button in the lower right corner to sort the list by quantity of songs. This will place keys with the most songs at the top of the list.

The + button on the lower right allows you to Add Songs.

Note: Songs are not added to the particular key. The + button is added for continuity in the user interface.

View Songs

When you tap on a key in the by key tab, a list of songs in that key are displayed. Songs are sorted by song title.

Tap on the Pick button in the upper right to switch to a pick list. In this mode, you can place a checkmark next to songs and then tap on the Done button to add those songs to the last selected set.

By Topic

Topics in OnSong are similar to saved searches. You can create a topic to search for in the content of your songs and their titles. The by topic tab allows you to manage topics that you want to use to segment your songs.

Adding Topics

To create a topic, tap on the + button in the lower right corner. This will open the New Topic Screen where you can type the name of the topic. Topics are not automatically added so your list can remain concise to your needs.

Viewing Songs

Once added, you can tap on the topic to view songs that contain that phrase.

Sorting Topics

Topics are sorted alphabetically by default. You can tap the sort button in the lower right corner to view topics in a custom order. To change the order of topics, tap on the Edit button in the upper right corner and then rearrange the topics using the reordering handles on the right. Tap Done to save the changes.

Narrowing Topic Scope

OnSong is designed to make using topics easy. However searching the content of a song for a keyword may not be accurate for your needs. In addition, you may want to find songs by genre, style, topic, emotion, or any number of attributes.

You can make topics more accurate by specifying keywords/topics in the Metadata Editor in the Song Editor. If you've specified this for a song, only these keywords will be used for that song, making the topic browsing for songs much more accurate to your needs. It also allows you to enter values that may not appear in the song content.

New Topic

Creating a new topic is easy. Simply tap on the + button in the By Topic tab and type the name of your topic. Tapping the Done button will create the topic. Tapping on the Cancel button will not create the topic.

Once the topic has been added to the topics list, tap on the topic to view songs found in the topic. Remember that you can make topic searches more accurate by using the keywords metadata tag. This can by done in the Metadata Editor in the Song Editor.

View Songs

When you tap on a topic in the by topic tab, a list of songs found for that topic are displayed. Songs are sorted by song title.

Tap on the Pick button in the upper right to switch to a pick list. In this mode, you can place a checkmark next to songs and then tap on the Done button to add those songs to the last selected set.

Star Menu

For a long time, the star located in the menubar of OnSong acted as a mere toggle to turn a star on and off for a song. What does the star mean? Well, that's entirely up to the user. However we like to think that it simply means a favorite song. You can use it to mark songs to be practiced, or to indicate ones that are ready to perform. The choice is yours.

OnSong evolves with the input of musicians who use it. One common request is the ability to add songs to sets while viewing them, and not through the set list picker. The new star menu keeps the same function as before while also allowing you to create sets and add songs to them.

Marking Favorites

Tapping on the star icon in the menubar will display the menu. Tapping on the Favorite row will cause the song toggle its star status. This is indicated by a checkmark next to the row as well as a visual change to the menubar icon.

Stars also appear when you view songs in a set. If you are currently in a set that supports Separate Song/Set Styles, then the favorite star/unstar is performed in that set list only.

Picking Songs

The star menu also shows recent, active sets. Tap on each row to add or remove the song from the set. When added, the song will be placed at the end of the set. You can rearrange the set in the My Sets tab.

Creating Sets

You can also tap on the + button in the upper right to add a new set. This will open the New Song Set screen inside the same menu. This makes creating sets and adding songs easy.

Archiving Sets

You can also swipe right to left over the sets in this menu to reveal an Archive button. Tap on the Archive button to archive the set. This will remove it from this menu and place it in the Archived Sets section.

New Song Set

Creating a new set is really easy. Tap Done to create a set that you will play today. You can change the date if you need as well. Here's some other information you can change about the set you are adding:

Date

Tap on this field to select the date on which you are planning to play the set. This is used for tracking when songs are played, giving you information for song reporting, when it was last played, or popularity information.

Title

This is an optional field that can be set to a more descriptive name for the set. When entered, this will be used when displaying the name of the set instead of the date.

Folders

Tapping on this field will display the Choose Folder Screen, allowing you to choose one or more folders in which the set should be placed. If you've already selected a folder, the set you are creating is automatically added to that one without requiring you to choose additional folders. Optional.

Separate Set/Song Styles

Sets contain songs from your master library. But what if you want to change the key of a song in a set without affecting the song in your master list? You can use separate set/song styles. This will allow you to style and transpose songs in the set without affecting the master song library.

  • Default uses the settings that you have configured under the Utilities Menu Settings Menu Settings Songs.
  • Off saves any changes you make to the song within the set to your master library. This will not affect other sets that have Separate Set/Song Styles turned on.
  • On saves any changes made to the set and not to the master library or any other set.

Audio Playback Continuity

If you are using backing tracks in your set, this setting allows you to play through all the backing tracks like a playlist. The default setting can be found in Settings Live Settings Audio Playback.

  • Off requires that each audio track be played with user interaction or a trigger.
  • On allows audio tracks to play through all songs in a set without user interaction.
  • Repeat allows audio tracks in a set to be played back continuously. Once the last audio track in the set is played, the first audio track in the set will be started.

Choose Folder

You can place newly created or existing sets into one or more folders. Tap on the folder or folders you wish to place your set into and then tap Back. When the set is saved, it will be placed in the selected folders.

You can also add a folder directly from this screen by tapping on the + button in the upper right corner. Type in a name of the folder and then select the folder to add the set to it.

Style Preferences Menu

The style preferences menu allows you to change the look of the current song as well as change the key, capo and chord diagrams.

You can also use this menu to change the look or other songs in your library. Tap on the ... button in the upper right corner to apply the current style to songs in various books, sets or to set the default look for newly imported songs.

The following items may be changed in the song:

Font Family

Four buttons on the top of the menu allow you to choose the font of the entire song. You can choose from:

  • Georgia is a serif font that may be easier to read for some users.
  • Helvetica is a sans-serif font that is perfect for displaying chord charts. Default.
  • Courier is a fixed-width font that is useful in some cases for aligning chords.
  • Marker is a handwritten font that is very narrow, allowing more content to fit on the page.

Font Sizes

Below the font family buttons are four sliders. Each one allows the size of different elements on the chord chart to be adjusted. To the right of each is a power button. To turn off one of the items in the list, tap until it turns grey.

Keep in mind that you can tap on the icons to the left and right of all font size sliders to fine-tune adjust each value by one point.

  • Header is the title of the song. You can adjust the font size from 12 to 38 points. Default is 21 points. Turn the header off to have more room on the page for chords and lyrics.
  • Metadata is the artist of the song, key, tempo and time signature. This appears below the header. Turn this off, or reduce its size to make more room for chords and lyrics. You can adjust the size from 6 points to 30 points. Default is 14 points.
  • Lyrics are nearly everything else on the screen. Turn these off if you just need to play the instrument. You can adjust the size from 6 points to 30 points. Default is 14 points.
  • Chords appear above or within lyrics and can be styled separately to make them more visible. Turn chords off for vocalists or musician who memorize their music. While more options are found below, you can change the size from 6 points to 30 points. Default is 14 points.

Line Spacing

When you want to fit more onto the screen, consider reducing the line spacing, or space between lines. You can also increase the line spacing for more room between lines for better visibility. You can tap on the icons to the left and right of all sliders to fine-tune adjust each value. Adjusts between 0.7 and 1.3 lines. Default is 1.0.

Chord Highlight

This is the color of the background for chords used to highlight them from the page background. Default color presets in the chord highlight palette are the following with a 50% opacity: Clear (default), yellow, orange, green, turquoise, purple, magenta and grey. You can add and customize colors in the chord highlighting palette using the Color Picker.

Chord Style

This allows you to set a color for the chord text as well as to make chords italic or bold for greater visibility. It's recommend that either highlight colors or text colors be used to highlight chords as some combinations may be hard to read. Color presets for text colors include: Black (default), red, blue, green, light blue, and purple. You can add and customize colors in the text color palette using the Color Picker.

Transpose

The transpose slider allows you to set the key of the chord chart. This can be different than the metadata written in the song editor as transposition is performed. Move the slider from the left to the right to go from C through Cb. To turn off the transposition engine, tap on the power button on the right side. This will display the chord chart as it appears in the song editor as long as no capo is applied.

OnSong is also able to display numeric chords in addition to alphabetic variations. Please see Alternate Keys for configuring OnSong to show numeric chords.

You can tap on the icons to the left and right of the transpose slider adjust the key up or down by one half step.

Capo

The capo slider allows OnSong to adapt the chords based on capo position. This maintains the key of the song found in the transpose slider but alters the chords to work with the capo. You can capo from 0 to 11 and determine if the capo is applied by toggling the power button on the right.

By default, increasing the capo slider will modulate the chords of a song down. The reason for this is to allow the declared key of the song to be maintained. For instance, if the key of the song is C#, and a capo is applied on the first fret, then you should set the capo slider to 1. This will display the chords of the song down one half step in the key of C.

You can change how capo effects your chord chart in Settings Display Settings Song Formatting Capo.

You can tap on the icons to the left and right of the capo slider to adjust the capo up and down one fret.

Diagrams

Diagrams can be drawn on the chord chart to help when you play, or for printing chord charts for educational purposes. You turn chords on and off with the power button to the right of the slider. Use the slide to adjust the size of the diagrams to fit between 4 and 10 diagrams across the width of the page.

You can change the diagram instrument by either tapping on chords or diagrams in the song viewer, opening the Chord Inspector. Here you can browse chord formations on different instruments. When the chord inspector is closed, the chord chart is redrawn with the last selected instrument's chord diagrams.

You can change how chord diagrams are drawn on the chord chart in Settings Display Settings Song Formatting Chord Diagrams

You can tap on the icons to the left and right of the slider to adjust the number of diagrams.

Methodology

Note: Changes made in this menu are applied on top of the original content of the song as found in the song editor. For instance, if you set the key in the song editor and apply transposition, the original content is not effected.

When you select a song in the All Songs list, the changes are applied to the master library. If you select a song in a set that has Separate Set/Song Styles enabled, the changes are only applied to the song within that set. This allows you to transpose a song in a different key when present in a different set.

Document

The Document tab lets you change the document settings for each song such as the font, paper size, and margins.

The style preferences menu is only available for text-based chord charts. If you are viewing an imported file, you will have the option to Extract and Edit or Use Text Version.

Font Family

Four buttons on the top of the menu allow you to choose the font of the entire song. You can choose from:

  • Georgia is a serif font that may be easier to read for some users.
  • Helvetica is a sans-serif font that is perfect for displaying chord charts. Default.
  • Courier is a fixed-width font that is useful in some cases for aligning chords.
  • Marker is a handwritten font that is very narrow, allowing more content to fit on the page.

Mode

The mode determines the colors used to draw the song on the screen and can be used to help make the screen more visible in different environments or for users with visual stress disorders. Modes change accordingly for Low Light Mode. If no option is selected, OnSong will display the song using default settings. Options include:

  • Paper displays the song in high contrast black and white.
  • Dim displays similar to paper, but with lower contrast.
  • Sepia displays similar to dim, but with warmed color tones.
  • Sky displays the song by overlaying a blue tint to help with visual stress disorders.

Low Light Mode

To the right of the mode buttons is an icon which you can use to toggle low light mode. This is set system wide when toggled and you'll notice that it applies those changes to the mode we've selected too. This effects all songs and menus in OnSong.

Page

This lets you set the size of the virtual page which effects the size of the fonts you select. For instance, larger paper sizes will display fonts in a smaller size. The icons on the right allow you to choose between portrait and landscape orientation.

Margins

Margins allow you to add an inset on the edges of the virtual paper on the screen. This is useful for making text visible and providing space for Hot Corners or Navigation Zones when also using section selection. The icon on the right side shows when margin is changed: left, right, top, or bottom.

Footer

This allows you to set the size of the foot as a percentage of the lyrics font size. You can also use the button on the right to toggle the footer on and off.

All of the controls on this tab except low light mode applies to the selected song. We will see how to apply our changes to different songs in our library in a little bit.

You can change the default values of each aspects of the document by tapping on the wrench icon in the upper left corner to access the Style Preferences Document options.

Unavailable

When you import PDF or word processing files, OnSong can only display those files "as-is". When you open the Style Preferences Menu, the controls will be disabled and you'll have one of the following options.

Extract and Edit

If you've viewing a file that is being viewed "as-is" and cannot be formatted or transposed, you'll see a screen like show with the option to Extract and Edit. Tapping on this button will open the Song Editor and automatically extract text from the document.

Use Text Version

If you're currently viewing an imported file, but you have text content available, this button will appear allowing you to toggle to the text-based chord chart. If you need to make changes to the text version, use the Song Editor

If you are viewing SongSelect PDF chord charts, you may still be able to transpose the song using the Key and Capo controls.

Apply Styles

To apply the current style, tap on an item in one of the sections in this screen. When you tap on an item, the progress of applying styles is displayed in the upper right corner. The screen returns to the style preferences menu when finished.

The first section allows you to apply the style to the most common selections. These include:

  • All Songs will apply this style to every song in your library.
  • Current Book will apply the style to all songs in the currently selected book.
  • Current Set will apply the style to songs in the currently viewed set.
  • Future Songs will apply the style to songs that you have not yet imported by setting this style as the default.

Books

This section displays all currently created books. Tapping on a book will apply the current style to every song contained in that book.

Note: If a book is currently selected, a teal dot will appear to the right to indicate the current book.

Sets

This section displays all current sets. Tapping on a set will apply the current style to every song in that set.

Note: If a set is currently selected, a teal dot will appear to the right to indicate the current set.

Versions

When you are using Separate Set/Song Styles you can have different styles for the same song. Choosing the Original Version option will reset the style on the original, master song in your library but will not change the style of the song in other sets. Choosing the All Versions option will reset the style of all songs versions.

Reset Style

The reset style option will reset the style of the currently selected song to the default styles.

Choose Book

When you choose to apply a style to a book and do not currently have a book selected, OnSong will prompt you to select a book. Tap on a book in this screen to begin the style application process.

Note: After you select a book to apply the style to, a window will appear that indicates the progress of this operation. This window should close upon completion or can be manually closed by tapping on the Close button in the upper left corner of the screen.

Choose Set

When you choose to apply a style to a set and do not currently have a set selected, OnSong will prompt you to select a set. Tap on a set in this screen to begin the style application process.

Note: After you select a set to apply the style to, a window will appear that indicates the progress of this operation. This window should close upon completion or can be manually closed by tapping on the Close button in the upper left corner of the screen.

Chords

The chords tab lets you transpose and capo chords as well as determine how those chords appear. It also lets you select an instrument for chord diagrams.

Style

The style choosers lets you pick how the chords should appear on the screen. You can choose from the following options:

  • Alpha displays chords as an alphabetic character (A-G) including enharmonic preference (sharp or flat). Default.
  • Nashville displays chords as numbers (1-7) based on their position in the key.
  • Roman displays chords as Roman numerals (I, ii, iii, IV, V, vi, vii) based on their position in the key.
  • Italian displays chords as numbers using Latin (do, re, mi, fa, so, la, ti) based on their position in the key.

Key

The key chooser lets you set the key of the chord chart. This can be different from how the song was written in the song editor as transposition is performed from the original key to the one selected here.

The most common keys are presented in a "circle of fifths" order, placing keys with less sharps and flats toward the left. Keys switch between major and minor based on the how song is written. You can change this interface to be in alphabetic order, or to use the original slider interface instead using the Transpose Control option.

Users who prefer more options in keys or who want to access theoretical keys can turn on Theoretical Keys option.

Capo

The capo slider allows OnSong to adapt the chords based on capo position. This maintains the key of the song found in the transpose slider but alters the chords to work with the capo. You can capo from 0 to 11 and determine if the capo is applied by toggling the power button on the right.

By default, increasing the capo slider will modulate the chords of a song down. The reason for this is to allow the declared key of the song to be maintained. For instance, if the key of the song is C#, and a capo is applied on the first fret, then you should set the capo slider to 1. This will display the chords of the song down one half step in the key of C.

You can change how capo effects your chord chart in Settings » Display Settings » Song Formatting » Capo.

You can tap on the left and right sides of the slider to adjust the capo up and down one fret.

Diagrams

Diagrams can be drawn on the chord chart to help when you play, or for printing chord charts for educational purposes. You turn chords on and off with the power button to the right of the slider. Use the slide to adjust the how many diagrams can fit across one page from between 4 and 10 diagrams per line.

You can tap on the left and right side of the slider to adjust the number of diagrams by one.

Instrument

You can change the diagram instrument by choosing from the selection in the instrument chooser. You can also change the instrument by tapping on chords or diagrams in the song viewer to open the Chord Inspector. Here you can browse chord formations on different instruments. When the chord inspector is closed, the chord chart is redrawn with the last selected instrument's chord diagrams.

Diagram Position

The diagram position chooser lets you determine where diagrams and drawn on the page. You can choose from:

  • None turns off chord diagrams. Default.
  • Below draws diagrams under the song content.
  • Above draws diagrams above the song content directly below the title and metadata.
  • Within draws chord diagrams in place of chords within the lyrics.

Methodology

Changes made in this menu do not modify the original content of the song as found in the song editor.

When you select a song in the All Songs list, the changes are applied to the master library. If you select a song in a book or set that has Separate Set/Song Styles enabled, the changes are only applied to the song within that set. This allows you to transpose a song in a different key for that book or set without changing the master version.

You can change the default behavior and interface options for this screen by tapping the wrench icon in the upper left corner to change Style Preference Chords options.

Format

The Format tab lets you change the appearance of the song content. You can change the following aspects of the song.

Font Family

Four buttons on the top of the menu allow you to choose the font of the entire song. You can choose from:

  • Georgia is a serif font that may be easier to read for some users.
  • Helvetica is a sans-serif font that is perfect for displaying chord charts. Default.
  • Courier is a fixed-width font that is useful in some cases for aligning chords.
  • Marker is a handwritten font that is very narrow, allowing more content to fit on the page.

Font Sizes

Below the font family buttons are four sliders. Each one allows the size of different elements on the chord chart to be adjusted. To the right of each is a power button. To turn off one of the items in the list, tap until it turns grey. Tap and slide anywhere in the slider control to adjust the value. Tap on the left or right side of the slider to fine-tune adjust each value by one point.

  • Header is the title of the song. You can adjust the font size from 12 to 38 points. Default is 21 points. Turn the header off to have more room on the page for chords and lyrics.
  • Metadata is the artist of the song, key, tempo and time signature. This appears below the header. Turn this off, or reduce its size to make more room for chords and lyrics. You can adjust the size from 6 points to 30 points. Default is 14 points.
  • Lyrics are nearly everything else on the screen. Turn these off if you just need to play the instrument. You can adjust the size from 6 points to 30 points. Default is 14 points.
  • Chords appear above or within lyrics and can be styled separately to make them more visible. Turn chords off for vocalists or musician who memorize their music. While more options are found below, you can change the size from 6 points to 30 points. Default is 14 points.

Line Spacing

When you want to fit more onto the screen, consider reducing the line spacing, or space between lines. You can also increase the line spacing for more room between lines for better visibility. You can tap on the icons to the left and right of all sliders to fine-tune adjust each value. Adjusts between 0.7 and 1.3 lines. Default is 1.0.

Low Light Mode

Tap on the icon to the right of the line spacing slider to toggle low light mode on and off. This will cause chord charts and menus to appear as light text on a dark background. This is applied throughout the app and is useful when playing in a dimly lit venue to reduce light wash and eye strain.

Chord Highlight

This is the color of the background for chords used to highlight them from the page background. Default color presets in the chord highlight palette are the following with a 50% opacity: Clear (default), yellow, orange, green, turquoise, purple, magenta and grey. You can add and customize colors in the chord highlighting palette using the Color Picker.

Chord Style

This allows you to set a color for the chord text as well as to make chords italic or bold for greater visibility. It's recommend that either highlight colors or text colors be used to highlight chords as some combinations may be hard to read. Color presets for text colors include: Black (default), red, blue, green, light blue, and purple. You can add and customize colors in the text color palette using the Color Picker.

You can change the default values of each aspects of the appearance by tapping on the wrench icon in the upper left corner to access the Style Preferences Format options.

Transpose and Capo Menu

While the Style Preferences menu can control the formatting and transposition of text-based chord charts, it cannot modify imported files such as PDF and word processing chord charts. However, if chord charts haver been imported into OnSong using CCLI SongSelect, OnSong can request those chord charts in different keys as long as you have a valid SongSelect subscription.

The transpose and capo menu allows you to pick the key of the SongSelect chord chart as well as choose a capo. OnSong calculates appropriate key to retrieve and then downloads the new PDF chord chart as needed. You can turn off both transpose and capo as well to retrieve the song in its original key.

Internet connectivity is required to transpose SongSelect chord charts since they must be requested from the SongSelect service. Downloading new keys of a song do count against your download quota, however once versions of the SongSelect chord chart are downloaded, they are retained in your OnSong library. If you've already downloaded versions of the song, you do not need to be connect to the Internet to transpose into that key and the songs will not be counted against your quota.

Utilities

The utilities menu provides access to this help screen, as well as other functions that are outside of the typical flow of OnSong. The following details the function of each item in this menu.

Getting Started

This menu option provides access to the Getting Started screen. This provides links to the user manual, videos, and other information you need to get started using OnSong.

Communicate

Gives you quick access to communicate with the OnSong team.

Editors

Some features don't fit in the normal flow of the app. Editors gives you access to other functions for configuring OnSong.

Add-Ons

OnSong is a powerful app, and add-ons make it even more powerful. Manage your add-ons in this screen.

Console

The console allows you to manage your OnSong library through a web browser making adding and editing chord charts easy.

Settings

For every musician, there's different way to do music. Settings let you configure every aspect of OnSong.

Tools

Provides more advanced tools for managing your library.

Account

The Account Details screen shows information about your OnSong account and subscription tier. The screen appears differently depending if you are authenticated.

Signed Out

This is the default presentation of the account screen and will display your base plan and previously purchased add-ons.

Signed In

This screen will appear to show your subscription tier and allow you to manage your account information and devices.

Add-Ons

If you're using OnSong Pro as a base plan, you may have purchased add-ons that were previously available in OnSong. In that event, you retain access to those add-on features. This screen allows you to view and restore those purchases including:

  • Console allows you to use a modern web browser on a computer or device to manage your OnSong library and enter songs.
  • Drawing enables the ability to make marks and drawings on any song content in your OnSong library.
  • MIDI Integration makes OnSong a powerful, context-aware MIDI controller for automating your instruments and effects on-stage. This is included with OnSong Pro if purchased on or after mid-2016.
  • Scenes allows you to control stage lighting as well as custom media and lyrics projection settings on a per song or section basis. This is included with OnSong Pro if purchased in 2019 or later.

Add-ons are no longer available for sale as they are included in an OnSong Premium subscription along with many new and upcoming features.

Restore Past Purchases

Purchased add-ons appear with a checkmark beside the purchase. If you have previously purchased add-ons that have not been activated, you can tap on the Restore Past Purchases button at the bottom of this screen to cause the App Store to sign in, check your purchase history, and return applicable purchases to OnSong.

Soundbanks are included with all versions of OnSong and are no longer listed.

Create Account

In order to use OnSong Premium, you'll need to first create an OnSong account. Your OnSong subscription is bound to your OnSong account allowing you to use it on a different device. In addition, OnSong cloud services will require you to have an account to deliver your personal experience.

This screen has only a few functions.

Create Account

The button in the center of the screen will begin the account creation process. Creating an account only requires an email address, name, and password.

Sign In

Certain functions in OnSong require you to have an OnSong account. If you already have an OnSong account, you can tap on the Sign In button in the upper-right corner to sign into an existing account.

Email

For simplicity, OnSong uses your unique email address to authenticate your account. This screen displays two fields for you to enter your email address.

Email Address

Type in the email address that you will use to access your OnSong account. We recommend ensuring that onsongapp.com is "whitelisted" in your email service and software to ensure uninterrupted communication.

Confirm Email Address

We require that you type your email address again. This is an extra step to ensure that you've entered an email address without error. If the emails do not match, you can then double-check the email address.

Continue

When done, press the Go return key on the keyboard or tap on arrow button to the right of the fields to continue to enter your first and last name.

Name

Let's make things a little more personal by typing your first and last name. Don't worry, you can always change this later.

First Name

Type your first name in the first field on the screen.

Last Name

Type your last name in the second field on the screen.

Continue

Once you're done entering your name, press the Go return key on the keyboard, or tap on the arrow button to the right of the fields to continue to the last step for setting up your account.

Password

The last step of setting up an account is to set a password. This lets you securely sign into your account through the OnSong app.

Password

Type in a password you desire in the first field. Passwords must be six-characters or longer in length.

Confirm Password

Type the same password again in the next field. This will allow the app to confirm that your passwords match. Please keep your password in a safe place and remember that you can always reset your password.

Continue

Once you've set your password, press the Go return key on the keyboard or tap on the arrow button to create your account and move on to what required your account.

Sign Into OnSong

This screen appears to allow you to sign into your OnSong account. Type in the e-mail address you used to register your OnSong account, followed by your password. You can then tap Done return key on the keyboard, or the arrow button to the right of the e-mail/password fields.

Forgot Password?

In the event that you've forgotten your password, attempt to authenticate to receive an error and a link to click to reset your password.

Sign Up

If you don't have an OnSong account, you can tap on the Sign Up button in the upper-left corner to view the Create Account screen.

Forgot Password

If you are certain you have an OnSong account but forgot your password, attempting to sign in will result in an error. Under this error will appear a link to reset your password.

Reset Password

To reset your password, tap on the link to open the Reset Password prompt. The email address that you filled out for authentication will appear in the text field. Ensure that the email address is correct and tap the Send button. You will receive an email message with a link to reset your password.

Forgot Email Address

If you've forgotten the email address you've used to create your account, please contact OnSong Support for assistance.

Signed In

If you access the Account Details screen when signed into your OnSong account, it provides additional details and the ability to manage your account and devices with the following sections:

Subscription

This section provides details about your subscription.

  • Tier is the plan that you have purchased. If you have not purchased an OnSong subscription plan, this will display your base plan such as OnSong Pro.
  • Expires On displays the date and time when your subscription expires. Your subscription will automatically renew at this time so you do not lose access.
  • Billed To displays the method used to bill for your subscription. If you've purchased through the Apple App Store, this will indicate that your Apple ID is billed.
  • Manage Your Subscription is a button that can be pressed to open the Apple App Store Subscriptions Screen within the App Store app.

Personal

This information can be edited by tapping on the Edit button in the upper-right corner of the screen. You will be prompted to enter your account password to verify your account in order to make changes. To save your changes, tap Done in the upper-right corner, or revert your changes by tapping on the Cancel button that appears in the upper-left corner.

  • Email Address allows you to the change the email address associated to your account and that is used for signing in.
  • Screen Name allows you to set up a nickname to be used for cloud-based services in the future.
  • First Name and Last Name let you change your name.

Authenticated Devices

This section lists the devices that have signed into you account. The name of the device is listed on the left and the date the device last signed in will appear on the right. Since OnSong accounts have a limit to the number of devices that can be used, you can sign out devices by swiping right to left and tapping the revealed Sign Out button. While this will free up devices, it will not reduce the functionality of OnSong apps that are currently open.

Password

This section allows you to change your password once you tap on the Edit button in the upper-left corner. Until then, passwords appear as eight dots when not in edit mode. The number of dots is arbitrary and does not reflect the length of your actual password since your password is never stored or transferred.

  • New Password is used to type in a new password for your account.
  • Confirm Password is used to confirm the first password to make sure it was entered correctly.

To change your password, you will need to tap the Done button that appears in the upper-right corner. To revert your changes, tap on the Cancel button that appears in the upper-left corner.

Sign Out

This button at the very bottom allows you to sign out of your OnSong account.

Signed Out

When you first arrive at the Account Details screen, you have likely not yet signed into an OnSong account. It will appear with the following fields:

Sign In

If you already have an OnSong account, tap on the Sign In button to sign into your account.

Subscription

This section provides information about your subscription and then plan that you have selected. It has the following fields:

Tier

This is the level of features that are available within OnSong. If you've purchased OnSong, your base plan is OnSong Pro which provides access to most features.

Expires On

If you were signed into an OnSong account with a subscription, this would display the date and time when your subscription expires. If you are not signed in, this displays Never to indicate your base plan.

Add-Ons

This displays the number of add-ons that have been purchased previously. Tap on this to view those add-ons or restore past purchases, if needed.

Upgrade to OnSong Premium

If you have not yet subscribed to OnSong Premium, you can tap this button to create an OnSong account and choose a subscription tier for purchase.

Subscription Plan

To gain more features and services in OnSong, you'll need to upgrade to a paid account. This is done through the subscription plan selection screen. Here you can do the following:

Choose Period

The first choice in the upper left corner is to select the payment period. Here you can choose between:

  • Month-to-month pays for a month of access and renews automatically at the end of the month.
  • Annual pays for a year of access up-front with a discount and renews automatically on the anniversary of the purchase.

View Features

Below the period chooser is a list of features sets that differentiate the tiers. Here you can see what types of features are available with each subscription package. Tap on a feature set to view individual features and more details.

Select Tier

On the right side of the screen is where you can select the tier. This coincides with a column of checkboxes that details what features are available. While only premium is available, you will be able to toggle between basic and premium in the future.

Upgrade/Renew Button

At the bottom of the screen is the Upgrade or Renew button. If you are eligible, this will also prompt to start your free trial. You can view a calculation of the cost of the subscription before you buy. Tap on this to begin the in-app purchase process.

Backup

Backing up is essential to keeping your OnSong library safe and ready to perform at a moment's notice. This screen is used to manually create backups, or to schedule backups to occur automatically on a schedule while the app is running. Once you've configured your backup strategy, tap Close to save your changes, or tap on Backup to save your backup file manually.

Export Location

The export location section lets you choose where OnSong should save the backup file. Tap on this row to choose a service and location for your backup file.

It's recommended that you backup to a remote storage service to ensure the backup file is stored in a safe and remote location.

Backup File

The backup file section lets you set a file name to use when saving the file. The first row lets you enter a name. By default, this is set to "OnSong". The ".backup" file extension is automatically added to the filename. The default filename is "OnSong".

Append a timestamp to the filename

By default, OnSong will append a timestamp after the filename but before the file extension. The timestamp includes the year, month, day, hour, and minute such as 201509091045. Appending the timestamp will create a new backup file every time a backup is saved. Omitting the timestamp will overwrite the backup file with the latest version.

Automatic Backup

Backup files are great, as long as you remember to make them. OnSong can be configured to automatically backup your library.

Toggle this on and then choose the scheduling on the second row. Using the stepper control on the right, you can choose between backing up when the app is closed or frequencies including hourly, daily, weekly or monthly.

Note: If both automatic backup and appending timestamps to filename is enabled, an alert will appear with a recommendation to disable timestamps. This is because this configuration can create multiple files that take up a lot of space. You can given the option to disable the timestamp.

Status Bar

At the bottom of the screen is a status bar that will show when the last backup was saved. If a backup is in progress, it will display the progress for both creating the backup file and exporting it to the service location.

While a backup is occurring, the Backup button in the upper right corner will become a Stop button. Tapping on this will halt the creation of the backup file, exporting to the service, and close the backup screen. OnSong will continue running in the background while a backup operation is in progress.

Add-Ons

Manage all your in-app purchases from one screen. Available and purchased add-ons appear in the list. Tap on an add-on to select it and then tap the Buy button in the upper right corner. You will be prompted to sign into the App Store using your Apple ID. Once completed, the purchase will be made.

If you've already purchased items and have switched to a different device, simply tap on the Restore Past Purchases button at the bottom of the screen. This will review your purchases and automatically enable those that were purchased. This step also may require you to sign into the App Store using your Apple ID.

Note: OnSong in-app purchases are a one-time purchase and can be used on any device as long as you are using the same Apple ID on each device

Communicate

Got questions or need help troubleshooting an issue? The communicate menu is just what you are looking for.

Give Feedback

The feedback option opens an email composition screen where you can let us know how we are doing. Share an idea or ask a question.

Get Support

The send diagnostics option gives you a way to share your library with the OnSong support team. If you are having trouble, fill out this form.

Rate OnSong

We try hard to make OnSong the best app available. Rate us on the iTunes App Store and help us out. Remember that we can't respond to reviews on the App Store so it's best to ask your question first.

Get Support

If you require technical support or are experiencing an issue, please fill out the following field to ensure the best service from the OnSong support team.

Email Address

Type your email address here and ensure it is accurately filled out. This will give us a way to respond to you. Also make sure that you whitelist the onsongapp.com domain name so that our responses are not blocked by spam filters.

Ensure that you enter the correct email address here so that we can respond to you. Also make sure you can receive responses from OnSong.

Full Name

Type in your full name so that we can be more personal when we communicate with you.

Subject

Enter a brief description (50 characters or less) of the problem so we can direct the issue to the best support agent.

Steps to Replicate

This part is important! Type in the issue you are having followed by specific steps you take that demonstrate the issue. Express what you desire to happen in contrast to what is happening. Provide details, but also remain brief as long responses can sometimes slow down our response rate.

Song/Set/Book

OnSong will automatically attach your current set or book as well as the song you were viewing at the time you accessed this screen. You can customize the set or book as well as the songs that are selected by tapping in this field.

Fast Track

Filling out this form is a great way to get placed in our support queue for standard service. Requests are handled in the order they are received. If you opt for the Fast Track service, your request is placed at the top of our list to be addressed with priority and before any other request.

Send Button

When you are all done, the Send button will illuminate. This will send your library to us with your diagnostic information. This combined with the information provided in this form will help us replicate the issue and either provide valuable advice, or issue a report to be addressed by our developers.

Crash Logs

If you are experiencing a crash condition, it is useful for OnSong to receive crash logs to resolve the issue that may be hard to diagnose. These are not able to be sent via the diagnostics step due to security restrictions in iOS. Please follow these steps to send your crash logs to OnSong.

Crash Logs

If OnSong abruptly returns to the iOS home screen, this is a sign of a crash condition. These can happen for a number of reasons that require some more troubleshooting than your library diagnostics can provide. If you send your diagnostics to OnSong after a crash, we may request a crash log to determine what is happening. Here are instructions for finding a crash log for OnSong when using MacOS or Windows.

Sync with iTunes

Crash logs are transferred to iTunes whenever you sync your device. Connect your device using the included USB sync/charge cable and open iTunes. Open the iOS device in iTunes and click on the Sync button. This will copy the crash logs on the device to your computer.

Retrieve the Crash Log

This process is slightly different depending on the operating system you are running with iTunes. Please note that you can find your device's name within iTunes, or by opening the Settings app on your device and choosing General » About.

MacOS

  1. Open Finder (found in the Dock) 2. Click on the "Go menu at the top of your screen, and select "Go to Folder"
  2. Type (or paste): ~/Library/Logs/CrashReporter/MobileDevice/
  3. Open the folder with the same name as your device.
  4. Look for files starting with "OnSong". If you don't see any, try opening the folder called "Retired". Here, you should see at least one item starting with "OnSong". Copy any that you find to your Desktop.
  5. Attach the file(s) to your reply to the support case email.

Windows Vista/7

  1. Open any Windows Explorer Window (My Computer, My Documents, etc.)
  2. Enter %appdata%, and press enter.
  3. Navigate to Roaming Apple computer Logs CrashReporter Mobile Device and choose the folder with your device's name.
  4. You will see at least one item starting with "OnSong". Copy any that you find to your Desktop.
  5. Attach the file(s) to your reply to the support case email.

Windows XP

  1. Locate your Application Data folder. Click here to learn how to access this folder.
  2. Navigate to Apple computer » Logs » CrashReporter » Mobile Device and open the folder with your device's name.
  3. You will see at least one item starting with "OnSong". Copy any that you find to your Desktop.
  4. Attach the file(s) to your reply to the support case email.

Social Media

OnSong is very active on different social media platforms. You can tap on each to open the native app for that platform, or be linked to a web-based experience.

Facebook

View the official OnSong page for company news and announcements.

OnSong Community

Participate with other OnSong users around the globe to discuss issues and find answers.

OnSong Insiders

For OnSong Premium members only to connect with OnSong staff and experts.

Instagram

Here's where we share fun things and live stream with some of our favorite people.

Twitter

Get tips, tricks, and announcements involving your favorite app.

YouTube

Get access to tons of video tutorials and reviews.

Rate OnSong

If you enjoy OnSong, please take some time to rate and review the app. It really helps us continue to make the best app possible.

Start by giving us five stars. If you can't give us five stars for any reason, please contact us for support. We want to make sure your experience is the best it can possibly be and will work hard to ensure your needs are met.

Once you submit, your star rating will be confirmed. You can then choose to write or update your review. OnSong is an active app and we work hard to put out new releases with new features and stability improvements. Please refresh your review as it helps others know more accurately how users make the most out of OnSong.

Give Feedback

At OnSong, we always want to hear from our users. If you are having a tough time figuring out how to do something, have a general question, or even want to share an idea, we are all ears.

The feedback form lets you write your message. When your message is received, it goes into our support help desk to be reviewed. We read everything we receive and try to respond as quickly as we can.

Console

OnSong Console is an in-app purchase that gives you the ability to manage your OnSong library from a web browser on another computer. You can import and write chord charts to see a preview of the chord chart in real-time as you type. When you're all done making changes, save it back to your device's library.

Opening the Console screen displays a video tutorial about setting up and using console. Take some time to watch the video tutorial as it covers the common use patterns of the web-based application. You can also view the video tutorial, frequently asked questions (FAQ) and user manual on the Console web site.

To purchase Console, tap on the price in the upper right corner to begin the in-app purchase process. You can also tap on the Enable Console button at the bottom of the screen to either begin the in-app purchase process, or to enable Console.

Once enabled, a web address will appear at the bottom of the screen under the Disable Console button. Type this into a web browser location bar to load the Console web application.

Note: This web address is an IP address that changes as you switch wireless networks. Be sure that you are typing in the web address from this screen each time you use console. Don't bookmark this web address as it may change.

Editors

Editors are screens that provide additional functions in OnSong that don't fit in the typical use of the app. These screens allow you to configure OnSong or access information.

Chord Diagram Library

The chord diagram library lets you manage chord diagrams for playing with different instruments.

Song Reporting

The song reporting editor provides access to usage of songs by timeframe.

MIDI

The MIDI editor lets you map MIDI commands to OnSong actions, turning your MIDI controller into a control interface for OnSong.

Navigation

The navigation screen helps you configure various methods of navigating OnSong such as foot pedals or hot corners.

Scenes

The scenes editor lets you enable the feature, connect to lighting systems, and create scenes to be set when switching songs or sections.

Actions Editor

There are many ways to navigate your songs and sets in OnSong. Whether you are tapping on the screen or using wireless foot pedals for hands-free operation, this screen can configure OnSong to work the way you by mapping these triggers to actions.

Pedals

OnSong works great with foot pedals for hands-free operation. This tab lets you configure OnSong for use with your foot pedal model and to choose actions for each foot pedal to trigger.

MIDI

Take your performance to the next level with MIDI triggers. Control OnSong using your guitar pedalboard, synthesizer, or load songs and scroll through them using Ableton Live from your laptop.

Screen

The screen is the primary input device you use. Leverage the power of hot corners and navigation zones to get OnSong to trigger more actions.

Foot Pedal Triggers

The Pedals tab allows you to configure one or more foot pedals to trigger actions in OnSong.

Choose Pedal

OnSong works with many popular foot pedal models. Swipe or tap on the title bar to pick one of the supported foot pedal models.

Buy a foot pedal

A green button appears in the upper right corner to purchase a foot pedal from the OnSong Store. Pressing this pedal will open an in-app web browser allowing you to view options for controlling OnSong and other on-stage solutions.

Select actions to perform

Foot pedals are configured with default actions "out of the box" to navigate your songs and sets. You can change this default behavior by either pressing a foot pedal or tapping on the pedal on the screen. This will display actions that OnSong can perform. For a complete list, please see Actions Menu.

Reading the manual

Just below the foot pedal model is either a Configure or User Guide button to give you quick access to how to setup the physical foot pedal.

Configure advanced options

In the lower left corner is a wrench icon that provides access to more advanced settings. From this screen you can configure scrolling behavior, triggers, and other options. See Foot Pedal Settings for more details.

Set up gears

Gears is a powerful tool that lets you expand the actions you can perform with just a single foot pedal. Imagine controlling your live performance with just a few physical pedals. Gears allows you to do just this by providing a great way to make the most of your pedal.

AirTurn BT200 S2

The AirTurn BT200 S2 is an affordable and convenient way to add page turning and other actions to your pedal board, or all on its own. It features a rechargeable battery and 9V power supply with modern, energy efficient Bluetooth connectivity.

Swipe to the AirTurn BT200 S2 setup screen to configure the AirTurn BT200 S2 foot pedal.

Choose Actions

Here you can tap on the foot pedals in the screen to set the action in the Actions Menu.

Choose Pedal Mode

The AirTurn BT200 can operate in a number of modes. Use this method to choose the pedal based on it's current mode to configure. This allows you to configure multiple AirTurn BT200 devices from one screen.

Buy

If you are interested in purchasing an AirTurn BT200 S2, tap on the Buy button to view the AirTurn store.

Configure

Learn how to configure and use the AirTurn BT200 series of foot pedals by watching the tutorial video.

AirTurn BT200 S4

The AirTurn BT200 S4 is an affordable and convenient way to add four configurable switches for page turning and more to your pedal board, or all on its own. It features a rechargeable battery and 9V power supply with modern, energy efficient Bluetooth connectivity.

Swipe to the AirTurn BT200 S4 setup screen to configure the AirTurn BT200 S4 foot pedal.

Choose Actions

Here you can tap on the foot pedals in the screen to set the action in the Actions Menu.

Choose Pedal Mode

The AirTurn BT200 can operate in a number of modes. Use this method to choose the pedal based on it's current mode to configure. This allows you to configure multiple AirTurn BT200 devices from one screen.

Buy

If you are interested in purchasing an AirTurn BT200 S4, tap on the Buy button to view the AirTurn store.

Configure

Learn how to configure and use the AirTurn BT200 series of foot pedals by watching the tutorial video.

AirTurn BT200 S6

The AirTurn BT200 S6 is an affordable and convenient way to add six configurable switches for page turning and more to your pedal board, or all on its own. It features a rechargeable battery and 9V power supply with modern, energy efficient Bluetooth connectivity.

Swipe to the AirTurn BT200 S6 setup screen to configure the AirTurn BT200 S6 foot pedal.

Choose Actions

Here you can tap on the foot pedals in the screen to set the action in the Actions Menu.

Choose Pedal Mode

The AirTurn BT200 can operate in a number of modes. Use this method to choose the pedal based on it's current mode to configure. This allows you to configure multiple AirTurn BT200 devices from one screen.

Buy

If you are interested in purchasing an AirTurn BT200 S6, tap on the Buy button to view the AirTurn store.

Configure

Learn how to configure and use the AirTurn BT200 series of foot pedals by watching the tutorial video.

AirTurn QUAD 200

Switch to the AirTurn QUAD 200 screen if you are using an AirTurn QUAD 200 foot pedal.

Choose Actions

Tap on each of the foot pedals in the screen or press the pedals on the device to open the Actions Menu allowing you to pick from momentary actions.

Choose Pedal Mode

The AirTurn QUAD 200 includes the BT200 module which can operate in a number of modes. Use this method to choose the pedal based on its current mode to configure. This allows you to configure multiple AirTurn BT200 devices from one screen.

Buy

Tap on the Buy button in the upper right corner to purchase the AirTurn QUAD 200.

Configure

Tap on the Configure button to learn more about using the AirTurn QUAD and how to turn on, pair, change modes and turn off the device.

Coda STOMP

Swipe to the Coda STOMP setup screen to configure the Coda Music Technologies STOMP foot pedal.

Choose Actions

Here you can tap on the foot pedals in the screen to set the action in the Actions Menu.

Choose Pedal Mode

The Coda STOMP can operate in a number of modes. Use this method to choose the pedal based on its current mode to configure including up/down, left/right, and space/enter modes.

Buy

If you are interested in purchasing a Coda STOMP, tap on the Buy button to view the Coda Music Technologies store.

Manual

Learn how to configure and use the Coda STOMP by reading the user manual by Coda Music Technologies.

Flic

Flic are smart, Bluetooth buttons that you can place anywhere that's convenient. OnSong lets you grab these buttons to perform any action in OnSong. You can assign up to three actions per button with single click, double click and press and hold.

Grabbing Flics

To get started, you'll need to add Flic buttons using the Flic app. You can then tap on a + button to be taken to the Flic app to grab the button and add it to OnSong. You can learn more about how to add Flics to OnSong in our video tutorial.

Choose Actions

Just tap on the buttons that you've added or press the Flic button choose an action in the Actions Menu.

Buy

Tap on the Buy button in the upper right corner to purchase Flic smart buttons online.

Configure

Tap on the Configure button to learn more about how to set up your Flic smart button.

You can configure up to six Flic smart buttons and use those with a foot pedal. Just configure your Flic smart buttons on this screen and then swipe back to the correct foot pedal screen to ensure the foot pedal mode is set.

Action Picker

When picking actions for Flic, you're presented with the standard Action Picker but with three tabs to select actions for single click, double click and press and hold actions. The name of the Flic you have selected is displayed at the top of the menu.

Single Click

Use this tab to select an action to perform when you click the selected Flic smart button once. This will prompt you to pick from the standard list of actions.

Double Click

Use this tab to select an action to perform when you double-click on the selected Flic smart button. This will prompt you to pick from the standard list of actions. Please note that setting an action to double-click will result in additional latency for the single click action so that Flic can determine what gesture was used.

Press and Hold

Use this tab to select an action to perform when you press and hold on the selected Flic smart button. This will prompt you to pick from the standard list of actions. Please note that setting an action to press and hold will result in additional latency for the single click action so that Flic can determine what gesture was used.

Forget

The forget button in the upper-right corner is used to cause OnSong to release the button in the event that you want to grab it with another app, or if you want to unpair the button from your device. You can learn more about pairing and unpairing your Flic smart buttons in our video tutorial.

Configure

This screen features a video tutorial for how to set up one or more Flic smart buttons for use in OnSong. Tap on the play button in the middle of the screen to play the video tutorial within OnSong.

Video Player

The video plays inside of the window and can either be played full screen or played as a picture-in-picture so you can watch the video and use OnSong at the same.

Manual

You can tap on the Manual button in the upper-right corner to view the user manual for the Flic documentation on the Flic.io website.

Flic 2

Flics are smart, Bluetooth buttons that you can place anywhere that's convenient. OnSong lets you pair these to perform any action in OnSong. You can assign up to three actions per button with single click, double click and press and hold.

Pairing Flics

To get started, you'll need to add Flic 2 buttons by pairing them with your device. Tap on a + button to scan for Flic buttons and then add them to your interface.

Choose Actions

Just tap on the buttons that you've added or press the Flic button choose an action to each function.

Buy

Tap on the Buy button in the upper right corner to purchase Flic 2 smart buttons online.

Configure

Tap on the Configure button to learn more about how to set up your Flic smart button.

You can configure up to six Flic 2 smart buttons and use those with a foot pedal. Just configure your Flic 2 smart buttons on this screen and then swipe back to the correct foot pedal screen to ensure the foot pedal mode is set.

Action Picker

When picking actions for Flic, you're presented with the standard Action Picker but with three tabs to select actions for single click, double click and press and hold actions. The name of the Flic you have selected is displayed at the top of the menu.

Single Click

Use this tab to select an action to perform when you click the selected Flic smart button once. This will prompt you to pick from the standard list of actions.

Double Click

Use this tab to select an action to perform when you double-click on the selected Flic smart button. This will prompt you to pick from the standard list of actions. Please note that setting an action to double-click will result in additional latency for the single click action so that Flic can determine what gesture was used.

Press and Hold

Use this tab to select an action to perform when you press and hold on the selected Flic smart button. This will prompt you to pick from the standard list of actions. Please note that setting an action to press and hold will result in additional latency for the single click action so that Flic can determine what gesture was used.

Flic Information

The information button in the upper-right corner provides detailed information about the Flic button and the available to forget the Flic button.

Flic Information

This screen lets you view and edit your Flic button using the following fields:

Name

This is the name of your Flic. This will display the name assigned to your Flic and you can customize it. To return to use the default name of the Flic, you can leave this field blank.

Battery

This shows the approximate voltage of the battery for your Flic with a maximum of 3 volts. If this turns red, it is time to change your battery.

Bluetooth

This is the physical Bluetooth address on the Flic.

Firmware

This is the version of the firmware installed in the Flic button from the factory.

Presses

This is the number of presses of the button since it was reset.

Serial

This is the unique serial number of the Flic.

Forget

This button at the bottom allows you to forget this Flic on the device. Tapping this will unpair the Flic.

Configure

This screen features a video tutorial for how to set up one or more Flic smart buttons for use in OnSong. Tap on the play button in the middle of the screen to play the video tutorial within OnSong.

Video Player

The video plays inside of the window and can either be played full screen or played as a picture-in-picture so you can watch the video and use OnSong at the same.

Manual

You can tap on the Manual button in the upper-right corner to view the user manual for the Flic documentation on the Flic.io website.

Pairing

Flic 2 allows you to pair your smart buttons directly with an app like OnSong.

Grabbing Flics

As soon as you tap on the + button, the pairing screen appears and begins scanning for Flic 2 buttons. Press and hold the Flic 2 button for about 8-10 seconds until the pairing prompt appears.

Once you tap on the Pair button in the prompt, the Flic 2 will appear in the list. Tap on the Flic 2 to connect it to the OnSong app.

Managing Flics

Flic 2 buttons can be paired to multiple devices at once and will rotate through devices. This means that you shouldn't have to forget or unpair the button to use it on multiple devices. If needed, you can swipe right to left over buttons in this list and forget those buttons on the device.

Once you're paired to a Flic button, you can manage the button by tapping on it to open the Action Picker and then tap on the information icon to open the Flic Information Screen. There you can rename the button, view additional details, and forget the button as well.

PageFlip Butterfly

The PageFlip Butterfly pedal which can both be configured on this screen.

Choose Actions

Tap on each foot pedal to configure your PageFlip Butterfly pedal actions. This will open the Actions Menu providing you with momentary actions.

Choose Pedal Mode

Tap on the mode button in the upper right corner to determine which mode on the pedal is currently enabled. For instance, you can have two foot pedals with each in a different arrow mode and configure both through this screen for a total of four foot pedals.

Buy

Tap on the Buy button in the upper right corner to purchase a PageFlip foot pedal.

User Guide

For more details on how to use the PageFlip Butterfly, tap on the User Guide button to be directed to PDF user manuals on the PageFlip website.

PageFlip Dragonfly

The PageFlip Dragonfly pedal which can both be configured on this screen.

Choose Actions

Tap on each foot pedal to configure your PageFlip Dragonfly pedal actions. This will open the Actions Menu providing you with momentary actions.

Choose Pedal Mode

Tap on the mode button in the upper right corner to determine which mode on the pedal is currently enabled. For instance, you can have two foot pedals with each in a different arrow mode and configure both through this screen for a total of four foot pedals.

Buy

Tap on the Buy button in the upper right corner to purchase a PageFlip Dragonfly foot pedal.

User Guide

For more details on how to use the PageFlip Firefly, tap on the User Guide button to be directed to PDF user manuals on the PageFlip website.

PageFlip Firefly

The PageFlip Firefly pedal which can both be configured on this screen.

Choose Actions

Tap on each foot pedal to configure your PageFlip Firefly pedal actions. This will open the Actions Menu providing you with momentary actions.

Choose Pedal Mode

Tap on the mode button in the upper right corner to determine which mode on the pedal is currently enabled. For instance, you can have two foot pedals with each in a different arrow mode and configure both through this screen for a total of four foot pedals.

Buy

Tap on the Buy button in the upper right corner to purchase a PageFlip Firefly foot pedal.

User Guide

For more details on how to use the PageFlip Firefly, tap on the User Guide button to be directed to PDF user manuals on the PageFlip website.

AirTurn Digit III

The AirTurn Digit III is perfect for vocalists or speakers who want to push a button rather than press a foot pedal. It's compact size and six, user-assignable buttons makes it incredibly flexible for scrolling songs, turning pages, triggering backing tracks(/docs/features/audio/) or any one of more than 50 actions in OnSong.

Choose Actions

Just tap on the buttons on the AirTurn Digit III on the screen or press the button on the device in your hand to choose an action in the Actions Menu.

Buy

Tap on the Buy button in the upper right corner to purchase the AirTurn Digit III on the AirTurn online store.

Configure

Tap on the Configure button to watch a video on how to connect your AirTurn Digit III to your iOS device so you can use it in OnSong.

Note: The AirTurn Digit III works with a number of apps on your device including control of iTunes and even Keynote presentations.

AirTurn STOMP 6

Switch to the AirTurn STOMP 6 screen if you are using an AirTurn STOMP 6 foot pedal to assign actions for all six stomp-style footswitches.

The STOMP 6 features an all-metal enclosure that's designed to be mounted on a standard pedalboard. This gives you instant access to dozens of actions in OnSong that let you transpose on the fly, start backing tracks or send MIDI to other devices in your setup. The STOMP 6 lets you completely automate your performance.

Choose Actions

Tap on each of the foot switches in the screen or press the switches on the STOMP 6 to open the Actions Menu allowing you to pick from momentary actions.

Buy

Tap on the Buy button in the upper right corner to purchase the AirTurn STOMP 6 on the OnSong online store or from an AirTurn dealer in your area.

Configure

Tap on the User Guide button to learn more about using the STOMP 6 foot pedal by being directed towards a tutorial video or user manual.

Configure

This screen features a video tutorial for how to set up an AirTurn STOMP 6 for use in OnSong. Tap on the play button in the middle of the screen to play the video tutorial within OnSong.

Video Player

The video plays inside of the window and can either be played full screen or played as a picture-in-picture so you can watch the video and use OnSong at the same.

Manual

You can tap on the Manual button in the upper-right corner to view the user manual for the AirTurn STOMP 6 on the AirTurn website.

iRig BlueTurn

IK Multimedia makes a number of products for iOS music production. The BlueTurn is similar to other Bluetooth-enabled foot pedals that OnSong supports.

Choose Actions

Tap on each foot pedal to configure your BlueTurn pedal actions. This will open the Actions Menu providing you with momentary actions.

Buy

Tap on the Buy button in the upper right corner to purchase the IK BlueTurn.

Choose Pedal Mode

Tap on the mode button in the upper right corner to determine which mode on the pedal is currently enabled. For instance, you can have two foot pedals with each in a different arrow mode and configure both through this screen for a total of four foot pedals.

User Guide

For more details on how to use the BlueTurn, tap on the User Guide button to be directed to more information on the IK Multimedia website.

AirTurn Digit II

The AirTurn Digit II is perfect for vocalists or speakers who want to push a button rather than press a foot pedal. It's compact size and five function buttons makes it incredibly flexible for scrolling songs, turning pages, triggering backing tracks or any other function in OnSong.

Choose Actions

Just tap on the buttons on the AirTurn Digit II on the screen or press the button on the device in your hand to choose an action in the Actions Menu.

Buy

Tap on the Buy button in the upper right corner to purchase the AirTurn Digit II on the OnSong online store or from an AirTurn dealer in your area.

Configure

Tap on the Configure button to watch a video on how to connect your AirTurn Digit II to your iOS device so you can use it in OnSong.

Note: The AirTurn Digit II works with a number of apps on your device including control of iTunes and even Keynote presentations.

Setup Your AirTurn Digit

When you tap on the configure button in the AirTurn Digit II setup screen, you can view a video on how to set up your AirTurn Digit II for use with OnSong. The following are steps you can take to ensure proper functionality. Be sure to refer to the user manual for details on operation.

Choosing the Right Mode

The AirTurn Digit II works when placed in Mode 2. To enter Mode 2, hold down the the left button when you power up the device until both the LED lights blink and then release. This will allow OnSong to use all five buttons of the device.

Powering On/Off

To power on your AirTurn Digit II, press and hold the center button for about 1 seconds until the lights begin to blink. To power off, press and hold the center button for about 2 seconds. The device will power off automatically after 10 hours of non-use.

Pairing

Go into the Settings app on your iPad or iPhone and open the Bluetooth section. Tap on the device in the Other Devices list and wait for it to pair. Once paired, it will appear in the My Devices list as connected.

Resetting

If you've connected the AirTurn Digit II to a different iOS device or are having trouble pairing in general, you may need to reset it. This removes any pairing memory it had and returns it to the factory defaults. To reset, press and hold the top button for 8 seconds until both lights blink.

Toggling the On-Screen Keyboard

The AirTurn Digit II acts like a computer keyboard so iOS will hide the on-screen keyboard when in use. You can bring the on-screen keyboard back and use the AirTurn Digit II at the same time by pressing and holding the left button.

AirTurn DUO

Switch to the AirTurn DUO screen if you are using an AirTurn DUO BT-105 pedal board.

Choose Actions

Tap on each of the foot pedals in the screen or press the pedals on the device to open the Actions Menu allowing you to pick from momentary actions.

If you have an AirTurn Digit or BT-106 module, tap on the module in the middle to open the Handheld Menu to configuration actions for handheld functions.

Buy

Tap on the Buy button in the upper right corner to purchase the AirTurn DUO on the OnSong online store or from an AirTurn dealer in your area.

Configure

Tap on the Configure button to learn more about using the BT-105 module and how to turn on, pair, change modes and turn off the device.

AirTurn PED

Swipe to the AirTurn PED setup screen to configure the AirTurn PED foot pedal.

Choose Actions

Here you can tap on the foot pedals in the screen to set the action in the Actions Menu.

Choose Pedal Mode

The AirTurn PED can operate in a number of modes. Use this method to choose the pedal based on it's current mode to configure. This allows you to configure multiple AirTurn PED devices from one screen.

Buy

If you are interested in purchasing an AirTurn PED, tap on the Buy button to access the OnSong online store or be redirected to dealers in your region.

Setup

Learn how to configure and use the AirTurn PED by watching the tutorial video. You can also alter advanced settings on the device here as well.

AirTurn PED Setup

This screen features a video tutorial for how to set up one or more AirTurn PED devices in OnSong. Tap on the play button in the middle of the screen to playback the video tutorial within OnSong.

Configuring

If you are currently paired to an AirTurn PED in App Direct Mode, you can configure additional properties of the device by tapping on the Configure button in the bottom right to Configure the foot pedal further.

Properties of that foot pedal that can be configured are:

  • Name displays the name of the device which is currently read-only.
  • Repeat Delay adjusts the amount of time in seconds to wait until repeat is enabled on the device.
  • Repeat Rate sets the speed at which repeated signals are sent while the pedal is being pressed.
  • Idle Power Off sets the amount of time to wait until the device automatically powers off. The default setting is to turn off the pedal after 2 hours without use.
  • Forget Device is a button in the toolbar that will unpair the device from OnSong.

AirTurn QUAD

Switch to the AirTurn QUAD screen if you are using an AirTurn QUAD BT-105 pedal board.

Choose Actions

Tap on each of the foot pedals in the screen or press the pedals on the device to open the Actions Menu allowing you to pick from momentary actions.

If you have an AirTurn Digit or BT-106 module, tap on the module in the middle to open the Handheld Menu to configuration actions for handheld functions.

Buy

Tap on the Buy button in the upper right corner to purchase the AirTurn QUAD on the OnSong online store or from an AirTurn dealer in your area.

Configure

Tap on the Configure button to learn more about using the BT-105 module and how to turn on, pair, change modes and turn off the device.

Choose Pedal Mode

This menu allows you to choose which mode you'd like to configure for your AirTurn PED. If you have more than one AirTurn PED, use this menu to choose one to configure at a time. Options include:

  • Up/Down Arrow Mode or Mode 2 is the default mode for the AirTurn PED which simulates up and down arrows on a computer keyboard.
  • Left/Right Arrow Mode or Mode 3 can be used in conjunction with other modes to support more than one AirTurn PED foot pedal.
  • App Direct Mode or Mode 1 is used to connect the AirTurn PED directly to your OnSong app. This means that you can connect a different AirTurn PED to another app for simultaneous control. Tapping on this option will open the AirTurn Peripherals screen to choose which AirTurn device to pair with OnSong.

AirTurn Peripherals

Use the AirTurn peripherals picker to choose which AirTurn PED that has been placed in App Direct Mode or Mode 1 to pair. This screen will automatically locate AirTurn PED devices that are in range. Tap on the Scan button to locate nearby devices again if needed.

Connecting

Once one or more devices have been found, tap on it to pair the device to OnSong. Once paired, the peripherals screen is closed.

Note: You can only connect to one AirTurn PED at a time using App Direct Mode. To connect a different PED instead, you will need to forget the device in the setup screen and also forget the device from your device's Bluetooth screen in the Settings app.

Configure

If you are currently paired to an AirTurn PED in App Direct Mode, you can configure additional properties of the device by tapping on the connected foot pedal in the AirTurn Peripherals list.

Properties of that foot pedal that can be configured are:

  • Name shows the current name of the AirTurn PED and can be changed.
  • Repeat Delay adjusts the amount of time in seconds to wait until repeat is enabled on the device.
  • Repeat Rate sets the speed at which repeated signals are sent while the pedal is being pressed.
  • Idle Power Off sets the amount of time to wait until the device automatically powers off. The default setting is to turn off the pedal after 2 hours without use.
  • Forget Device is a button in the toolbar that will unpair the device from OnSong.

If your AirTurn PED is due for an update, you will be prompted to install the latest firmware. This will open the App Store for you to download and install the AirTurn Manager app in order to perform the update.

Custom Foot Pedal

OnSong has the ability to map custom character sequences to perform an action. This is great if you create your own foot pedals out of spare computer keyboards, or have a foot pedal that is not typically supported.

Choose Actions

Since the location of pedals are not known, tapping on the keyboard-like graphic on this screen will present a Pedal Picker where you can choose between four different configured pedals. This will then allow you to set actions for each pedal accordingly.

Settings

Of course you will need to set up character sequences for each foot pedal that you want to use. Tap on the Settings button to open the Pedal Setup Screen.

Pick Pedal

This menu allows you to pick the pedal that you want to set actions for. Once you tap on an option, you'll be shown the Action Picker allowing you to set an action to a custom foot pedal.

Foot Pedal Settings

The foot pedal settings menu allows you to configure more advanced settings for how foot pedals interact with OnSong.

Scroll Behavior

When a scroll down or scroll up action is performed, it can be handled in various ways. These include:

  • Scroll Page scrolls down the screen a certain percentage of the height of the screen. By default this is 75% of the height and can be adjusted by using the scroll amount slider.
  • Jump to Section moves through the sections of the song. Not only does this select the section, but will also scroll it into view.
  • Jump to Page is used when viewing PDF files or text-based chord charts that have page breaks added. This will scroll the song to the top of each page.
  • Jump to Song will not scroll the song but rather navigate back and forth through the set.

Scroll Amount

When using the Scroll Page pedal behavior, OnSong will scroll the page a specified percentage of the screen height. You can adjust this between 25% and 100%. The default value is 75% to allow some overlap.

Scroll Speed

Animation helps maintain context through the scrolling action. You can adjust this speed from zero seconds (no animation) to three seconds. Default is 0.3 seconds which is the standard animation speed of scrolling.

Forward Pedal Trigger

The forward pedal trigger is an action to take the first time the Scroll Down foot pedal is pressed. This allows one foot pedal to have multiple uses. After the action is triggered, the pedal returns to its normal scroll down action. Options include:

  • None performs no action and scrolls down on the first press. Default.
  • Audio starts the audio track playback.
  • Autoscroll begins autoscrolling the chord chart. Note that you can also set an autoscroll trigger to perform more than one action at a time like starting audio and autoscroll simultaneously.
  • Metronome toggles the metronome.

Start Set Trigger

When using foot pedals to navigate to the start of the set, you can have an action performed when the scroll up pedal is pressed at the beginning of the set. Options include:

  • None performs no action. Default.
  • Show Songs List will display the songs menu to pick a different list or song.
  • Previous Set will load the previous set in the currently selected list of sets. For instance, if you choose a set folder in a particular order, the set preceding the current set will be loaded.

End Set Trigger

When using foot pedals to navigate to the end of the set, you can have an action performed when the scroll down pedal is pressed when on the last song of the set. Options include:

  • None performs no action. Default.
  • Show Songs List will display the songs menu to pick a different list or song.
  • Next Set will load the next set in the currently selected list of sets. For instance, if you choose a set folder in a particular order, then the set succeeding the current set will be loaded.

Options

The following options can be toggled on and off.

  • Half Page Scrolling effects how pages are scrolled when pedal behavior is set to Jump to Page. This could miss content if the device is in the landscape orientation. Half page scrolling allows scrolling to occur halfway through a page. Options include on, off and automatic. The default is automatic which will determine if half page scrolling is applicable based on the current orientation of the device in comparison to the orientation of the page.
  • Disable Section Navigation can be toggled on to prevent lyrics projection from automatically switching to the Jump To Section scroll behavior.
  • Disable Set Navigation prevents foot pedal presses from navigating between songs in a set. By default, scroll up and scroll down actions will go to the previous or next song in the set once the top or bottom of the chord chart is reached. If this is enabled you must swipe, tap the screen or use another action to move through songs in your set.
  • Scroll To Tapped Section is used to reposition the song viewer to encompass the selected section when tapped.
  • Show Icon in Menubar This option will show the Foot Pedal Setup icon in the Menubar. Turn this off to remove the icon from the menubar. Default is set to on.

Gears

Gears enable you to extend the number of actions you can perform with just one foot pedal model. For instance, one 4-switch foot pedal can be extended to perform dozens of actions.

Configuring Gears

To use, tap on the icon in the lower right corner of the Foot Pedal Setup Screen. This will display currently configured gears. By default, you have just one gear that is selected. You can configure the foot pedal switches to perform actions.

Adding Gears

To add a gear, tap on the "+" button in the upper right corner. Once a gear has been added, tap on it to select it. Close the gears menu and configure your foot pedals again. Now you have two distinct set of actions operating on the same foot ped